Home

Telindus 1031 Router

1. kal telindus1031 g703 channel ppp authenPeriod Default 00000d 00h 10m 00s R 00000d 00h 00m 00s Use this attribute to set the PPP authentication interval SI 248554 03h a a Refer to 6 2 4 Configuring PPP authentication on page 76 for more infor mation on authentication Normally on an authenticated PPP link authentication is not only performed at link set up but also at regular intervals during the data transfer You can set this interval using the authenPeriod attribute If you set the authenPeriod attribute to 00000d 00h 00m 00s then authentication is only performed at link set up and not during the data transfer 188 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 4 4 Frame Relay configuration attributes ra telindus1031 g703 channel frameRelay ip Default lt empty gt Range structure see below Use this attribute to globally configure the IP parameters of the DLCIs More specifically use this attribute to configure the IP related parameters of all the DLCIs for which e in the diciTable no IP address is defined for that specific DLCI and the mode element is set to routing or routingAndBridgning q If you want to configure the IP related parameters for one specific DLCI then configure for that DLCI the ip structure in the dlciTable Refer to e 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 58 for a detailed description of the ip struct
2. Example put sourcefile destinationfile pwd Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 5 65 User manual Basic configuration 5 5 Configuring the major features of the Telindus 1031 Router The following list shows you where you can find an introduction to and a basic configuration of the most important features of the Telindus 1031 Router 6 1 Selecting a WAN encapsulation protocol on page 72 6 3 Configuring Frame Relay encapsulation on page 77 6 2 Configuring PPP encapsulation on page 73 6 4 Configuring ATM encapsulation on page 86 7 2 Configuring static routes on page 100 7 3 Configuring the Routing Information Protocol on page 107 7 4 Configuring address translation on page 116 7 5 Configuring L2TP tunnelling on page 127 7 6 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the router on page 130 7 7 Configuring an extended access list on page 138 8 9 Configuring bridging on page 149 8 10 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the bridge on page 154 Refer to the Telindus 1030 Router Orchid function manual for more information on the proxy function 66 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 5 User manual Basic configuration 5 6 Executing configuration actions This section shows you how to execute actions on the configuration The following gives an overview of this section 5 6 1 What are the different configuration types on page 67 5 6 2 Activating the configuration on page 68 5 6 3 Loading the
3. The netbiosNodeType element has the following values no node B node P node M node H node 212 Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual Chapter 10 Configuration attributes ra telindus1031 router dhcpDynamic Use this attribute to specify the IP address range from which an IP address may be dynamically assigned to a client its MAC address The dhcpDynamic table contains the following elements mn LET Default lt empty gt Range table see below ipStartAddress Use this element to define the start address of the IP Default 0 0 0 0 address range It is from this range that an IP address Range up to 255 255 255 255 will be dynamically assigned to a client If no IP start address is specified all other attributes on the same line in the table are ignored ipEndAddress Use this element to define the end address of the IP Default 0 0 0 0 address range It is from this range that an IP address Range up to 255 255 255 255 will be dynamically assigned to a client The IP address range will only contain the ipStartAddress in case e no ipEndAddress is specified e the specified ipEndAddress is the same as the ipStartAddress e the specified ipEndAddress is smaller than the ipStartAddress e the specified ipEndAddress belongs to another subnet than the ipStartAddress mask Use this element to set
4. 2 gt 1 network2 up routing lt Struct gt lt Struct gt b 2 network3 up routing lt Struct gt lt Struct gt gt 3 network4 up routing lt Struct gt lt Struct gt pycT able row 1 ip y lt py cT able row 1 atm netMask remote gt KIA 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 2 pveT able row 2 ip pveT able row 2 atm netMask remote gt 0000 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 3 pveTable row 3 ip pycT able row 3 atm netMask remote VC gt KAA 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 4 gt pU 104 Telindus 1031 Router User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 4 4 Configuring the PCR The Peak Cell Rate PCR is comparable to the EIR in Frame Relay refer to What is EIR on page 78 In other words it is the specified amount of unguaranteed bandwidth measured in bits per second on an ATM service Refer to the Important remarks below to see how to set a guaranteed bandwidth The major difference between the PCR mechanism on ATM and the CIR EIR mechanism on Frame Relay refer to 6 3 5 Configuring CIR and EIR on page 85 is that in case of ATM the bandwidth assigned to each PVC is recalculated at regular intervals This means that depending on the traffic on the PVCs the Telindus 1031 Router can proportionally divide the bandwidth over the different PVCs As a result over dimensioning the PCR on ATM is not as fatal as over dimensioning the CIR on Frame Relay The
5. Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 287 Reference manual Status attributes 11 6 Bridge status attributes ra telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup ifDescr This attribute displays the interface description This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter kal telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup ifType This attribute displays the interface type This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup ifOperStatus This attribute displays the current operational status of the bridge group This is an SNMP MIB2 param eter kal telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup ifMtu This attribute displays the interface its Maximum Transfer Unit i e the maximum number of bytes that one packet can contain on this interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup ip This attribute displays the IP information of the bridge The ip structure contains the following elements mon pen OOO O O O address This is the IP address of the bridge It is either configured or retrieved automati cally netMask This is the IP subnet mask of the interface It is either configured or retrieved auto matically 288 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes ra telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup arpCache This attribute displays all the MAC address IP address pairs from ARP requests and replies received on the LAN interface Refer to What is the ARP cache on page 179 for more information
6. a reference to another manual E g Refer to the TMA manual for vi Telindus 1031 Router User and reference manual Graphical conventions Preface The following icons are used in this manual Name This icon indicates Remark remarks or useful tips Caution text to be read carefully in order to avoid damage to the device Warning text to be read carefully in order to avoid injury DIP switch a DIP switch or strap table Basic attribute a basic attribute in the containment tree of the Telindus 1031 Router Advanced attribute an advanced attribute in the containment tree of the Telindus 1031 Router Structured attribute a structured attribute within another attribute in the containment tree of the Telindus 1031 Router Action an action in the containment tree of the Telindus 1031 Router Telindus 1031 Router Table of contents vii User and reference manual Table of contents User manualean aaa aata aasa amka AAA AAA Ta vl 1 1 Introducing the Telindus 1031 Router nnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnu 3 1 1 Whatisthe Telindus 1031 Router wwrme 4 1 2 Telindus 1031 Router applications 5 1 3 Telindus 1030 Router family overview 0 nnennrennnnnnenenennnnnaaenna 6 1 4 Maha ge MMA GOIS v ra kand la kandi alailma aaa Seali im lima Asad kik NESEN 10 1 5 Management tools connecti
7. gt gt gt bridgeGroup bridgeCache bridgeDiscards bridgeFloods gt gt gt accessList bridgeAccessList gt gt gt gt frameRelay diciTable Imi cllmInFrames gt gt gt gt atm pvcTable unknownCells gt gt management cms2SessionCount tftpSessionCount cliSessionCount tcpSessionCount Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual gt gt operatingSystem currUsedProcPower usedProcPower freeDataBuffers totalDataBuffers largestFreeBlockSize freeBlockCount freeMemory totalMemory taskinfo gt gt proxy Refer to the Telindus 1030 Router Orchid l function manual for more information on the performance attributes of the proxy function also called Orchid function Chapter 121301 Performance attributes 302 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 2 LAN interface performance attributes ra telindus1031 lanInterface iflnOctets This attribute displays the number of octets bytes received on this interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter Ta telindus1031 laninterface ifInUcastPkts This attribute displays the number of unicast packets received on this interface and delivered to a higher layer protocol Unicast packets are all non multicast and non broadcast packets This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1031 lanInterface iflnNUcastPkts This attribute displays the number of non unicast packets received on this i
8. routingAndBridging The SNAP header is checked to determine whether the packets have to be bridged or routed priorityPolicy Use this element to set a priority policy per PVC Default lt empty gt Refer to telindus1031 g703 channelf J priorityPolicy on Range 0 24 characters page 184 for more information Use this element to configure the IP related parame Defauit ters of the PVC Range structure see below Refer to 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 58 for a detailed description of the ip structure 194 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes Benet Besser O O ridging se this element to configure the bridging relate n bridgi Use this el t t fi the bridgi lated Default parameters of the PVC Range structure see below Refer to e 8 Configuring the bridge on page 139 for more information on bridging 8 9 6 Explaining the bridging structure on page 152 for a detailed description of the bridging structure Use this element to configure the specific PVC param Default eters Range structure see below Refer to telindus1031 g703 J channel atm pvcTable atm on page 195 for a detailed description of the atm structure Use this element to configure the PPP related param Defauit eters of the PVC in case you choose to map PPP onto Range structure see below AALS refer to th
9. 93 94 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 4 5 Configuring multi protocol over ATM Refer to 6 4 1 Introducing ATM on page 87 for an introduction on multi protocol over ATM In order to configure multi protocol over ATM use the element e higherLayerProtocol to define which protocol e multiProtocolMech to define how the protocol has to be mapped onto ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AALS Refer to telindus1031 g703 channel atm pvcTable atm on page 195 6 4 6 Configuring Classical IP Classical IP RFC1577 is one of the first commonly used encapsulations of IP over ATM The encapsu lation method is the same as described in RFC2684 formerly RFC1483 The IP traffic is encapsulated without Ethernet header Reverse ARP is in use for the resolution of IP addresses to PVC channels In order to configure Classical IP use the following elements e Set the mode element to routing for the relevant PVC refer to telindus1031 g703 channelf J atm pvcTable on page 193 e Set the higherLayerProtocol to rfc2684 for the relevant PVC refer to telindus1031 9703 J channelf atm pvcTable atm on page 195 e Set the multiProtocolMech to vcMultiplexing for the relevant PVC refer to telindus1031 g703 channel J atm pvcTable atm on page 195 q Note that Reverse ARP is always in use Therefore there is no dedicated attribute to enable or disable RARP Telindus 1031 Ro
10. If supported by the network the Reverse ARP protocol can obtain the remote IP address automatically In that case the remote IP address is not displayed in the configuration window but can be found in the status window Use this element to configure the RIP related param Default eters of the interface Range structure see below Refer to 7 3 3 Explaining the rip structure on page 110 for a detailed description of the rip structure Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 5 User manual 59 Basic configuration Fe MM trafficPolicy 1 directedBroadcasts This element is not present in the telindus1031 g703 Jchannelf frameRelay ip structure You have to specify a traffic policy per DLCI Use this element to apply a traffic policy on the routed Default lt empty gt data on the interface Range 0 24 characters Do this by entering the index name of the traffic policy you want to use You can create the traffic policy itself by adding a trafficPolicy object under the router object and by configuring the attributes in this object Example If you created a trafficPolicy object with index name my_traffic_policy tralficPolicy i e trafficPolicy my_traffic_policy and you want to apply this traffic policy here then enter the index name as value for the trafficPolicy N element Refer to 7 6 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the router on page 130 for more informa
11. VV rT Ve Ve ee Refer to 4 2 2 Containment tree terminology on page 42 for an explanation of the terms associated with the containment tree 42 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1031 Router 4 2 2 Containment tree terminology Refer to 4 2 1 Graphical representation of the containment tree on page 41 for a figure of a containment tree The following table explains the terminology associated with the containment tree containment tree The containment tree represents the hierarchical structure of the Telindus 1031 Router It is composed of a number of objects that are ordered in a tree This tree resembles a Windows directory structure e itis also a levelled structure with nodes which can be expanded or reduced the containment tree objects can be compared with file folders e the objects contain attributes like file folders contain files object An object represents a physical interface an application or a combination of both Each object has its own set of attributes parent and child Some objects are not present in the containment tree by default If you want to use object the features associated with such an object then you have to add the object first You always add an object under another object The object you add is called the child object The object under which you add this child object is called the parent object index name Of some objects more than one objec
12. encapsulation This is the used encapsulation It is related to the interface for this route Possible values are none The IP packets are not encapsulated ethernet The IP packets are encapsulated with the ARPA MAC header frameRelay The IP packets are encapsulated in Frame Relay RFC1490 ppp The IP packets are encapsulated in PPP The IP packets are encapsulated in ATM status This is the route status Possible values are up The route can be used down The route is currently not in use discard Packets for this destination are discarded Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 275 Reference manual Status attributes Bement per O OO preference This displays the route preference If more than one route matches the IP destina tion address this attribute determines which route is used The route with the low est preference value will be used This is the type of the route Possible values are This is a host route i e a route to a single IP address instead of a complete network This is also used for the router its own IP address internal A route with this status is irrelevant local This route is for directly connected networks rip This route has been received by a RIP update This route has been configured i e it is a static route metric If two routes exist with the same preference then the route with the lowest metric value is chosen The metric attrib
13. 160 Telindus 1031 Router User manual Chapter 9 Configuration examples 9 1 LAN extension over a PDH SDH network In this example a remote office is connected to a central office over a PDH or SDH network A modem link connects the remote office to the PDH or SDH network At the local office a Telindus 1031 Router is installed The central router is a third party router The WAN encapsulation is PPP with active link monitoring WAN interface IP 192 168 100 1 mask 255 255 255 252 LAN interface IP 192 168 47 254 Router modem eo oo IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 WAN interface IP 192 168 100 2 mask 255 255 255 252 LAN interface IP 192 168 48 254 network IP subnet 192 168 48 0 mask 255 255 255 0 The configuration of the Telindus 1031 Router in CLI format is as follows action Load Default Configuration SET SELECT lanInterface LIST ip address 192 168 47 254 mode routing SELECT g703 1 SELECT channel g703_ 1 LIST encapsulation ppp SELECT ppp l LIST ip address 192 168 100 1 netMask 255 255 255 252 linkMonitoring operation enabled SELECT router LIST routingTable a network 192 168 48 0 mask 192 168 100 2 action Activate Configuration Telindus 1031 Router User manual 9 2 Chapter 9 161 Configuration examples LAN extension over a Frame
14. 2 3 Selecting a site AA WARNING gt Always place the unit on its feet without blocking the air vents Do not stack multiple units directly onto each other as stacking can cause heat build up that could dam age the eguipment A ACHTUNG gt Stellen Sie das Ger t niemals seitlich sondern nur auf den F en auf und achten Sie darauf da die L ftungsschlitze an der Seitenverkleidung frei bleiben Stapeln Sie nicht mehrere Ger te direkt bereinander dies kann zu einem Hitzestau f hren Install the unit in an area free of extreme temperatures humidity shock and vibration Position it so that you can easily see and access the front panel and its control indicators Leave enough clearance at the back for cables and wires Position the unit within the correct distances for the different accesses and within 2m of a power outlet Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 2 17 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1031 Router 2 4 installation and connection precautions A ESD WARNING The circuit boards are sensitive to electrostatic discharges ESD and should be handled with care It is advisable to ensure an optimal electrical contact between yourself the working area and a safety ground before touching any circuit board Take special care not to touch any component or connector on the circuit board D EMC WARNING EMC compliant installation The Telindus access products are fully EMC compliant To ensure compliance
15. 2 6 6 The LAN collision LED LAN COL This LED lights up each time there is an Ethernet frame collision on the LAN 28 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1031 Router Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 3 29 User manual DIP switches of the Telindus 1031 Router 3 DIP switches of the Telindus 1031 Router This chapter locates the DIP switches on the Telindus 1031 Router motherboard It gives an overview of their function and it explains how to change their settings The following gives an overview of this chapter e 3 1 The Telindus 1031 Router motherboard on page 30 e 3 2 DIP switches of the Telindus 1031 Router on page 31 e 3 3 Opening and closing the housing on page 32 30 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 3 User manual DIP switches of the Telindus 1031 Router 3 1 The Telindus 1031 Router motherboard The figure below shows the position of the DIP switches on the Telindus 1031 Router motherboard RI C1 RiR2 C2 c3 kass oN rd TPL Fro Oe o UUDE RE B On 273 E E t Ou1s1s y m n 71819 2 RIDRIL PWR CODE 175516 Tea 1c2 1c3 ei 6N c14 L_ ci2 a Pe argi E m css 17 LDL Ab 1 OO sea R22RZ3R24 19 6703 ACT A g 1 y T a al cae 18 gl SI ZT 1 2 2 3 TE TRS ST2 103 BA VLL RS530 RS232 ca CZA STI VLL VLO RS530 RS232 Ti ler a STH 113
16. Bridging loops Bridges connected in a LAN must detect potential bridge loops They must then remove these loops by EE blocking the appropriate ports to other bridges Bridge A segment 1 This is illustrated in the following fig Bridge B ure l An alternate path has been estab Ee Ibridge B lished by connecting Bridge B in par Bridge C l allel with Bridges A and C This also creates a potential bridge loop How segment 3 ever by using the Spanning Tree Algorithm Bridge B breaks the loop and blocks its path to segment 3 segment 2 Bridge failure Bridges connected in a LAN must segment 1 also detect bridge failure They must then establish an alternative path Should the root bridge fail also a new root bridge must be selected Padar A lt dropout eS A bridge failure is illustrated in the fol OT segment 2 Bridge B lowing figure Bridge C activated by If Bridge A fails the Spanning Tree bridge B Algorithm must be capable of activat ing an alternative path such as Bridge B segment 3 Network extension Bridges connected in a LAN must segment 1 also detect topology changes They must adapt to these changes A topology change is illustrated in the Bridge A following figure lt dropout segment 2 Bridge B l l blocked by I bridge B l If the network is extended by adding Bridge D the Spanning Tree Algo rithm must be capable of adapting
17. Network X Router A 10 0 0 1 ote Router C Network Z If you consider Router A then for this router e two DLCls are configured in the frameRelay dlciTable being DLCI 16 and DLCI 17 no IP addresses are specifically configured for these DLCls e inthe frameRelay ip attribute a global IP address is configured for the DLCls being 10 0 0 3 The characteristics of a set up with a global IP address for the DLCls are Broadcasts are copied and sent over all DLCls that use the global IP address E g pinging 10 0 0 255 results in a reply from 10 0 0 1 10 0 0 2 and 10 0 0 3 e Pinging 10 0 0 3 results in a reply when LMI is up e Routes learned over one DLCI are not passed to other DLCls E g a route learned over DLCI 16 is not passed to DLCI 17 This means that split horizon is applicable RIP only functions if the network is fully meshed l e if every router is directly connected to its neigh bour with a DLCI as in the example above 82 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols Example DLCI specific IP Suppose you have the following set up Network Y Network X 10 1 0 1 10 2 0 1 Router C Network Z If you consider Router A then for this router e two DLCls are configured in the frameRelay dlciTable being DLCI 16 and DLCI 17 an IP address is specifically configured per DLCI in the frameRelay dlciTable ip attribute no global IP addr
18. Reference manual 13 6 G703 channel alarms Chapter 13 Alarm attributes Refer to 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 329 for general information on the alarm attributes Ta telindus1031 g703 channel alarminfo The alarm related to the g703 J channel object together with its explanation and default alarmMask and alarmLevel value is given in the following table The alarm is generated linkDown when an error situation is detected in the encapsulation protocol Frame Relay PPP or ATM For instance an error condition in the Frame Relay LMI a failed authentication in PPP Default value alarmMask enabled alarmLevel Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual 13 7 Router alarms Chapter 13 337 Alarm attributes Refer to 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 329 for general information on the alarm attributes telindus1031 router alarminfo The alarm related to the router object together with its explanation and default alarmMask and alarmLevel value is given in the following table The alarm is generated pingActive in case of a pending ping for example an indefinite ping This notification is necessary because you can only transmit one ping at a time Furthermore there is no pro tection when a new ping is started before the previous is stopped Default value alarmMask enabled alarmLevel 338 Tel
19. Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 15 343 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1031 Router 15 2 Getting the LAN IP address The following figure shows how the Telindus 1031 Router obtains its LAN IP address from a BootP server on its Ethernet interface Server file contains e g ee 00 C0 89 00 94 6F and BootP server 192 168 47 254 255 255 255 0 Router IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 The IP address is obtained as follows SN O In case on the LAN interface no IP address or subnet mask are configured default value AND the telindus1031 lan Interface mode attribute is set to routing OR e no IP address or subnet mask are configured default value AND the telindus1031 lan Interface mode attribute is set to bridging default value AND no IP address or subnet mask are configured in the bridgeGroup default value then the Telindus 1031 Router starts sending BootP requests every 10 seconds on its LAN interface These requests contain the Telindus 1031 Router its MAC address The BootP server looks in its MAC address IP address file If the MAC address in the BootP request matches a MAC address in this file the BootP server replies with the cor responding IP address and subnet mask Example In the example above the Telindus 1031 Router its MAC address is 00 C0 89 00 94 6F The server replies with IP address 192 168 47 254 and corresponding subnet mask 255 25
20. The mode element has the following values bridging All packets received on the tunnel are bridged routing All packets received on the tunnel are routed routingAndBridging The SNAP header is checked to determine whether the packets have to be bridged or routed Use this element to configure the IP related parame pefault ters of the tunnel Range structure see below Refer to 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 58 for a detailed description of the ip structure bridging Use this element to configure the bridging related Default parameters of the tunnel Range structure see below When bridging is enabled on a tunnel interface the tunnel acts exactly as a bridge port for a physical PPP connection Refer to e 8 Configuring the bridge on page 139 for more information on bridging 8 9 6 Explaining the bridging structure on page 152 for a detailed description of the bridging structure Use this element to configure the L2TP related Default parameters of the tunnel Range structure see below Refer to telindus1031 router tunnels I2tpTunnels I2tp on page 219 for a detailed descrip tion of the I2tp structure Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 219 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1031 router tunnels I2tpTunnels I2tp Default Range structure see below Use the I2tp structure in the I2tpTunneis table to confi
21. channel frameRelay dlciTable This attribute lists the complete performance information of all known DLCIS The diciTable table contains the following elements mon pee o name This is the name of the DLCI as you configured it mibCounters This displays the SNMP MIB2 parameters of the DLCI These are the same as the SNMP MIB2 parameters on the LAN interface Refer to 12 2 LAN interface performance attributes on page 302 frameRelay This displays the specific Frame Relay related performance information of the DLCI Refer to telindus1031 g703 channel J irameRelay dlciTable frameRelay on page 309 for a detailed description of the frameRelay structure Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 309 Reference manual Performance attributes telindus1031 g703 J channel frameRelay diciTable frameRelay The frameRelay structure in the dlciTable displays the specific Frame Relay related performance information of the DLCI The frameRelay structure contains the following elements ETS LETA dlci This is the DLCI identification number inFecn This is the number of frames received from the network indicating forward conges tion and this since the virtual circuit was created inBecn This is the number of frames received from the network indicating backward con gestion and this since the virtual circuit was created inDe This is the number of frames received with the Discard Eligibility bit set inOcte
22. time UDP TCP Time Server nameserver UDP Host Name Server domain UDP TCP Domain Name Server tacacs ds UDP TCP TACACS Database Service bootps UDP Bootstrap Protocol Server bootpc UDP Bootstrap Protocol Client tftp UDP Trivial File Transfer www http TCP World Wide Web HTTP nntp TCP Network News Transfer Protocol netbios ns UDP NETBIOS Name Service netbios dgm UDP NETBIOS Datagram Service netbios ssn UDP NETBIOS Session Service snmp UDP SNMP snmptrap UDP SNMPTRAP telindus UDP Telindus Protocol used by TMA 374 Telindus 1031 Router Annex A Annex common TCP and UDP numbers Telindus 1031 Router Annex B 375 Annex product information Annex B product information The following table displays the product information of the Telindus 1031 Router Product name Description 177460 TELINDUS 1031 ROUTER 230VAC IP router and bridge with 1 10 100Mbit s Ethernet interface and 1 2Mbit s G 703 interface Includes European 230VAC power adapter 177461 TELINDUS 1031 ROUTER NPWR IP router and bridge with 1 10 100Mbit s Ethernet interface and 1 2Mbit s G 703 interface Delivered without power adapter 177485 USER AND REFERENCE MANUAL User and Reference manual for the Telindus 1030 router TELINDUS 1030 SERIES ROUTER series The Orchid functionality is not included in this ma
23. Range 0 64 characters Use this attribute to specify the physical location of the Telindus 1031 Router The sysLocation attribute is an SNMP MIB2 parameter kal telindus1031 bootFromFlash Default auto Range enumerated see below Part of the flash memory of the Telindus 1031 Router is organised as a file system In this file system you can store two complete application software versions You can use the bootFromFlash attribute to switch between these softwares When you store two application software versions in the file system they are automatically renamed as CONTROL1 and CONTROLZ respectively You can check this with the status attribute telindus1031 file System fileList The bootFromFlash attribute has the following values When the Telindus 1031 Router boots the application software CONTROL1 is active the application software CONTROLZ is active the Telindus 1031 Router automatically chooses the most recent application soft ware It does this by comparing the application software version numbers Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual Chapter 10 175 Configuration attributes kal telindus1031 security Use this attribute to create a list of passwords with associated access levels Default lt empty gt Range table see below in order to avoid unauthorised access to the Telindus 1031 Router and the network The security table contains the following e
24. The Telindus 1031 Router can be configured to act as a bridge This enables you to split up your LAN network into smaller parts or segments This decreases the amount of data traffic on the separated LAN segments and consequently increases the amount of available bandwidth Example The following figure shows an example of bridging STEN PC1 STEN PC2 network 1 network 2 Data coming from network 1 will only be let through by the bridge if this data has a destination outside network 1 orifithas a broadcast or multicast address This means the bridge filters the data and decreases the amount of data traffic on the separated LAN segments Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 8 141 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 2 The self learning and Transparent Spanning Tree bridge The Telindus 1031 Router features two bridging mechanisms e self learning bridging e self learning bridging in conjunction with the Transparent Spanning Tree TST algorithm or briefly Spanning Tree bridging self learning The bridge learns which data it has to forward to the other LAN segment and which data it has to block l e it builds its own bridging table In other words you do not have to configure a bridging table with MAC addresses of stations that are located on the separated LAN segments but that have to be able to communicate with each other self learning TST This is based on the self learning principle but a protocol is used
25. disabled interval Use this element to set the time interval between two consecutive echo requests Default 00000d 00h 00m 10s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s 24855d 03h 14m 07s replyTimeOut Use this element to set the time the Telindus 1031 Router waits for a reply on the echo request If no reply has been received within this time out then the Telindus 1031 Router considers this as a failed echo request Default 00000d 00h 00m 02s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s 00000d 00h 04m 15s failsPermitted Use this element to set the number of failed echo requests after which the Telindus 1031 Router declares the WAN link down Example Default 4 Range 1 30 Suppose failsPermitted is set to 10 If on 10 consecutive echo requests no reply is given then the Telindus 1031 Router declares the WAN link down and the PPP handshake is started again Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 187 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1031 g703 channel ppp authentication Default disabled Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to enable or disable CHAP authentication on the PPP link Refer to 6 2 4 Configuring PPP authentication on page 76 for more information on authentication The authentication attribute has the following values disabled Authentication is disabled chap This side of the link requests a CHAP authentication from the remote router
26. e 6 3 1 Introducing Frame Relay on page 78 e 6 3 2 Configuring IP addresses on the Frame Relay WAN on page 80 6 3 3 Configuring the DLCls on page 83 e 6 3 4 Configuring LMI on page 84 e 6 3 5 Configuring CIR and EIR on page 85 78 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 3 1 Introducing Frame Relay What is Frame Relay Frame Relay is a networking protocol that works at the bottom two levels of the OSI reference model the physical and data link layers It is an example of packet switching technology which enables end stations to dynamically share network resources Frame Relay devices fall into the following two general categories e Data Terminal Equipment DTEs which include terminals personal computers routers and bridges e Data Circuit terminating Equipment DCEs which transmit the data through the network and are often carrier owned devices What is DLCI Frame Relay networks transfer data using one of the following connection types e Switched Virtual Circuits SVCs which are temporary connections that are created for each data transfer and then are terminated when the data transfer is complete not a widely used connection e Permanent Virtual Circuits PVCs which are permanent connections The Telindus 1031 Router makes use of Permanent Virtual Circuits The Data Link Connection Identifier DLCI is a value assigned to each virtual circuit and
27. tion on managing Telindus devices 17 4 Auxiliary connector specifications on page 365 for the specifications of this connector This RJ45 connector is the serial G703 interface towards the WAN Refer to 17 1 G703 interface specifications on page 362 for the specifications of this connector Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 2 21 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1031 Router 1 Refer to the TAP catalogue for the layout and the sales codes of these cables 22 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1031 Router 2 5 3 Connecting the Telindus 1031 Router an example The following figure shows a typical Telindus 1031 Router set up computer running TMA Crocus modem EB straight male female DB9 cable straight male male DB9 cable RS530 DTE TOTT straight RJ45 RJ45 cable s at Wit Wal external power supply kis ka In this set up the external power supply is connected to the power input the LAN connector is connected to an Ethernet hub using a straight RJ45 RJ45 cable In this way the Telindus 1031 Router is connected to your local network LAN the CTRL connector is connected to the COM port of a computer using a straight male female DB9 cable In this way you can for example manage the Telindus 1031 Router locally using TMA CLI CLI ATWIN etc the AUX connector is connected to the control connector of a
28. unknown cause 270 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes 11 4 5 ATM status attributes ra telindus1031 g703 channel J atm atmSync This attribute displays the ATM synchronisation status Possible values are synced notSynced ra telindus1031 g703 channel J atm pvcTable This attribute gives the complete status information of all known PVCs The pvcTable table contains the following elements pe ee This is the name of the PVC as you configured it If you did not configure a name then this element displays lt WAN interface name gt vci lt vci number gt E g wan vei 40 ifOperStatus This is the current operational status of the PVC ifLastChange This is the system up time on the moment the PVC entered its current operational state l e the moment the value of the ifOperStatus element changes from up to down or vice versa the system up time value is written into the ifLastChange element This displays the IP information of the PVC Refer to telindus1031 g703 J channel frameRelay diciTable ip on page 267 for a detailed description of the ip structure bridging This displays the bridging information of the PVC Refer to telindus1031 laninterface bridging on page 254 for a detailed description of the bridging structure This displays the specific ATM related status information of the PVC Refer to telindus1031 g703 J channel atm pvcTable atm o
29. Configuration examples LAN extension over an ATM network In this example a remote office is connected to a central office over an ATM network A modem link connects the remote office to the ATM network At the local office a Telindus 1031 Router is installed The central router is a third party router WAN interface IP 192 168 100 1 mask 255 255 255 252 LAN interface IP 192 168 47 254 Router modem IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 modem VPI 100 VCI 100 WAN interface IP 192 168 100 2 mask 255 255 255 252 LAN interface IP 192 168 48 254 network IP subnet 192 168 48 0 mask 255 255 255 0 The configuration of the Telindus 1031 Router in CLI format is as follows action Load Default Configuration SET SELECT lanInterface LIST ip address 192 168 47 254 mode routing SELECT 9703 1 SELECT channel g703 1 LIST encapsulation atm SELECT atm LIST pvcTable D name pvcl ip address 192 168 100 1 netmask 255 255 255 252 remote 192 168 100 2 atm vpi 100 vei 100 SELECT router LIST routingTable a 192 168 48 0 192 168 100 2 network gateway action Activate Configuration Telindus 1031 Router User manual Chapter 9 163 Configuration examples 9 4 Connecting a LAN to the Internet using NAT and PAT This is an example of a local network t
30. Device as router or higherLayerProtocol multiProtocolMech NAT PAT bridge support router rfc2684 IleEncapsulation ppp IleEncapsulation vcMultiplexing pppOverEthernet IleEncapsulation rfc2684 IleEncapsulation ppp IleEncapsulation veMultiplexing pppOverEthernet llcEncapsulation peakCellRate Use this element to set the maximum bandwidth of the Defauit auto PVC Range enumerated see below The peakCellRate element has the following values auto and 64kbps up to 2304kbps in steps of 64kbps In auto mode the PVC will try to get the maximum bandwidth i e the speed of the physical connection towards the ATM network Refer to 6 4 4 Configuring the PCR on page 91 for more information on the peak cell rate inArpTimeOut Use this element to set the time between the trans Default 00000d 00h 00m 30s mission of two consecutive Reverse ARP frames Range 00000d 00h 00m 01s 00000d 01h 00m 00s oamFSLoopback Use this element to configure the transmission of Default OAM F5 loop back cells Range structure see below Refer to telindus1031 g703 J channel atm pvcTable atm oamF5Loopback on page 197 fora detailed description of the oamF5Loopback structure Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 197 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1031 g703 channel atm pvcTable atm oamF5Loopback Default Range structure see below Use the
31. Important remark If you set the configuration attribute telindus1031 laninterface mode to bridging then the settings of the configuration attribute telindus1031 laninterface ip are ignored As a result if you want to manage the Telindus 1031 Router via IP you have to config ure an IP address in the bridgeGroup object instead telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup ip WAN interface each WAN encapsulation object frameRelay You can find the ip structure on two levels e inthe frameRelay object telindus1031 g703 channell frameRelay ip e in the diciTable attribute the ip element in telindus1031 9703 channel J frameRelay dlciTable Section 6 3 2 Configuring IP addresses on the Frame Relay WAN on page 80 explains why You can find the ip structure in the ppp object telindus1031 g703 channel ppp ip You can find the ip structure in the pvcTable attribute the ip ele ment in telindus1031 g703 channel J atm pvcTable tunnels the I2tpTunnels attribute the ip element in telindus1031 router tunnels I2tp Tunnels bridge the bridgeGroup object telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup ip Refer to 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 58 for a detailed description of the ip structure 1 The interface can be a physical interface such as the LAN interface but can also be a DLCI a PVC a tunnel etc 58 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 5 User manual Basic configuration 5 2 3 Explaini
32. The arpCache table contains the following elements mom pe O macAddress This is the MAC address ipAddress This is the associated IP address type This is the ARP cache entry type Possible values are dynamic The MAC IP address pair is retrieved from an ARP request or reply message static The MAC IP address pair is configured There is only one static entry i e the Telindus 1031 Router its own IP and MAC address timeOut This is the time the entry will remain in the ARP cache For the static entry this value is 0 Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual Chapter 11 289 Status attributes ra telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup bridgeCache When a port of the bridge enters the learning state it stores the MAC addresses of the stations situated on the network that is connected to this port The MAC addresses are stored in a MAC address database or bridge cache The bridgeCache attribute visualises this address database Refer to What is the bridge cache on page 232 for more information The bridgeCache table contains the following elements eec a interface This is the interface through which the station can be reached macAddress interface This is the MAC address of the station situated on the network connected to the type This displays whether the MAC address entry is static or dynamic dynamic The corresponding MAC address is learned on one of the interfaces
33. User manual Scenario Configured PCR Chapter 6 Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols Amount of data sent 2048 kbps Assigned bandwidth 512 kbps 1024 kbps 512 kbps 640 kbps 512 kbps 512 kbps 512 kbps Because all PCRs are set to auto each PVC tries to get a maximum bandwidth Hence the total available bandwidth 2 Mbps is divided equally over the four PVCs So in this scenario PVC 3 is the only one that gets all of its data on the ATM network Scenario Configured PCR Amount of data sent 2048 kbps Assigned bandwidth 2048 kbps Because PVC 1 is the only one sending data and because its PCR is set to auto it gets the total available bandwidth 2 Mbps and is able to send its data at 2048 kbps Scenario Configured PCR 2048 kbps Amount of data sent 2048 kbps Assigned bandwidth 1024 kbps 1024 kbps 2048 kbps 512 kbps 512 kbps 2048 kbps 256 kbps 512 kbps 2048 kbps 256 kbps gt In this case the PCRs of the PVCs are over dimensioned i e the sum of the PCRs exceeds the bandwidth of the physical connection towards the ATM network What is more the total amount of data that the PVCs try to send also exceeds the total amount of available bandwidth As a result the total available bandwidth 2 Mbps is divided proportionally over the PVCs 2048 kbps is the total available bandwidth and 512 kbps is
34. configuring 109 explaining the RIP structure 110 how works 108 Index introduction 108 support 108 what is 108 RIP hold down timer what is 205 RIP structure explanation 110 router alarms 337 basic configuration 97 configuration attributes 200 general configuration at tributes 201 general performance at tributes 313 general status attributes 274 introduction 98 performance attributes 312 specifications 367 status attributes 273 router applications introducing 5 routing basic activities 98 determining the optimal path 98 static versus dynamic 99 transporting packets 98 versus bridging 98 what is 98 routing and bridging perform ance specifications 367 routing table configuring the 102 routing traffic policy applying on an interface 136 S safety compliance 368 instructions 14 requirements ii sales codes 375 security correcting the security table 63 selecting a site 16 self learning bridge what is 141 SNMP configuration attributes 238 Telindus 1031 Router Annex software downloading 353 what is boot loader and ap plication 354 Spanning Tree behaviour 146 bridge failure 146 bridging loops 146 network extension 146 BPDU 145 propagation of 145 what is 145 bridge port states 144 bridge priority what is 147 path cost example 148 path cost what is 147 port priority example 148 port priority what is 147 priority and cost 147 root bridge 14
35. including traps The private MIB comes with your copy of TMA After installation of the TMA data files the private MIB file is available in directory C Program Files TMA snmp with the name lt filename gt mib Refer to 10 7 SNMP configuration attributes on page 238 and the documentation of your SNMP browser for more information 1 The first part of the directory path may be different if you did not choose the default path during the installation of the TMA data files 2 The filename is product dependent To determine which MIB file corresponds with which prod uct refer to the models nms file located in C Program Files TMA model 12 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 1 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1031 Router 1 5 Management tools connection possibilities The following table gives an overview of all the management tools and how you can connect them with the Telindus 1031 Router Management PC Telindus 1031 Router connec PC management concentrator con tool tion nection Serial IP Serial IP EasyConnect CLI ATWIN TMA TMA CLI TMA for HPOV SNmpP amp Web Interface 1 Examples of management concentrators are the Orchid 1003 LAN and the Telindus 1030 Router series Refer to their corresponding manuals for more information on how to set these devices up as management proxy 2 A serial connection is a connection between the COM port of your PC
36. network They do this through an exchange of data messages called Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs This exchange of messages results in the following phases Cc e a The selection of a root bridge The bridge with the highest bridge priority i e the lowest numerical priority value is selected as the root bridge If all bridges are configured with the default priority 32768 the bridge with the lowest MAC address becomes the root bridge The selection of a designated bridge for every bridged LAN segment The removal of loops in the bridged network by blocking bridge ports connected to redun dant links Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 8 143 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 4 The Spanning Tree topology The cost factor is used to calculate the distance from each port of a bridge to the root bridge On the basis of this each port on a bridge is assigned one of the following states T T E root port The port that is closest to the root bridge Only one port on each bridge is assigned as the root port designated port The port that connects to bridges further away from the root bridge The root bridge only has designated ports blocking If a port is not assigned a root port or a designated port state they are assigned a blocking state Frames with the exception of Configuration BPDUs are not accepted or transmitted by the port when it is in the blocking state The port can be said to be in stand
37. or discard disable SNMP reguests kal telindus1031 management telnet Use this attribute to accept enable or discard disable Telnet sessions Default enabled Range enabled disabled telindus1031 management tftp Use this attribute to accept enable or discard disable TFTP sessions Default enabled Range enabled disabled telindus1031 management consoleNoTrafficTimeOut Use this attribute to set the time out period after which a management ses sion is closed when there is no user interaction Default 00000d 00h 30m 00s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s 24855d 03h 14m 07s The purpose of such a timer is to protect the Telindus 1031 Router against unauthorised access in case the last user did not close his session ra telindus1031 management ctriIPortProtocol Use this attribute to set the function of the control connector The ctrlPortProtocol attribute has the following values Default console Range enumerated see below management Router to Select this value if you want to connect the control connector of the Telindus 1031 a management concentrator for management purposes the control connector of another Telindus 1031 Router using a crossed cable i e they are connected back to back in order to create an extended manage ment link Refer to What is relative and absolute addressing on page 240 for more information on extended management
38. routingProtocol rip2 SELECT tunnels LIST l2tpTunnels a name tunnell ip address 192 168 5 1 remote 192 168 5 2 rip filter tunnelFilter 12tp locallpAddress 207 46 197 101 remoteIpAddress 198 182 196 56 type outgoingLeasedLine SELECT routingFilter tunnelFilter LIST filter action Activate Configuration 168 Telindus 1031 Router User manual Chapter 9 Configuration examples 9 8 Connecting VLAN enabled switches over a WAN This is an example of 2 VLAN enabled switches that connect multiple VLANs over a WAN link In this example VLAN 10 is used to manage the Telindus 1031 Router and the remote third party router whereas VLAN 1 and 2 are used for user data Note that when dotQTagging is enabled the Telindus 1031 Router does not interpret spanning tree frames This allows the switches to run the spanning tree proto col themselves as if they were connected directly via Ethernet IP 10 1 0 1 mask 255 255 255 0 VLAN 1 Untagged port VLAN enabled switch trap collection e g HP OpenView IP 10 10 0 1 mask 255 255 255 0 ama VLAN 2 Untagged port IP 10 2 0 1 mask 255 255 255 0 VLAN 1 2 10 Tagged port Router mod IP bridgeGroup mask 255 255 255 0 0 2 mask 255 255 255 0 P ATM network AA IP 10 1 0 2 mask 255 255 255 0 PVC IP 10 10 0 3 IP 10 2 0 2 mask 255
39. static There are only two static entries the Telindus 1031 Router its own MAC address e a MAC address used for Spanning Tree This is the elapsed time since a frame was received from the station Example The following figure shows part of a bridge cache table as an example V bridgeCache interface Bridge Protocol Entity Bridge Protocol Entity macAddress 01 80 22 00 00 00 00 20 89 00 fe 20 00 c0 89 00 d4 56 00 c0 89 00 70 98 00 c0 89 00 6b 9c 00 c0 89 01 26 86 00 10 b5 ec 3f 24 00 a0 24 a2 97 6c 00 c0 89 00 d4 53 00 60 8c 95 bb fe 00 10 4b 47 38 fa 00 c0 89 00 d4 c2 static static dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic dynamic Q0000d 00h 00m 00s 00000d 00h 00m 00s 00000d 00h 00m 01s 00000d 00h 00m 09s 00000d 00h 00m 16s 00000d 00h 00m 05s 00000d 00h 00m 00s 00000d 00h 01m 25s 00000d 00h 01m 53s 00000d 00h 00m 00s 00000d 00h 00m 15s 00000d 00h 01m 40s 290 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes kal telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup bridging The bridging attributes or elements in the individual interface objects display the bridging information for that particular interface This bridging attribute however displays the bridging information of all the bridged interfaces of the Telindus 1031 Router Refer to telindus1031 laninterface bridging on page 254 for a detailed description of the bridging struct
40. 1031 Router supports a number of higher layer IP protocols Telnet SNMP and TMA for management purposes If an IP packet is sent to the Telindus 1031 Router for a higher layer protocol that it does not support it normally sends an ICMP Destination unreachable Port unreachable mes sage to the originator of the packet With the sendPortUnreachable attribute you can define whether you want the Telindus 1031 Router to send such an ICMP message or not The sendPortUnreachable attribute has the following values enabled The Telindus 1031 Router sends ICMP port unreachable messages disabled The Telindus 1031 Router does not send ICMP port unreachable messages This also implies that the router is not recognised by the UNIX or Windows trace route feature telindus1031 router sendAdminUnreachable Default enabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to enable or disable the sending of ICMP Destination unreachable Communication with destination is administratively prohibited messages The ICMP message communication prohibited If the Telindus 1031 Router receives an IP packet that is destined for a prohibited destination because this destination is defined in an access list then it sends an ICMP Destination unreachable Commu nication with destination is administratively prohibited message to the originator of the packet With this attribute you can define whether you want the Telind
41. 128 characters hostName Use this element to set the name of the client Default lt empty gt Range max 20 characters Because the DHCP server can not give the same name to all clients of this IP address range a number is added to the host name from the second IP address onwards The number goes up to 99 Example Suppose the host name is Telindus In that case the name for the start IP address is Telindus for the second IP address Telindus1 and so on domainName Use this element to set the name the client should use Default lt empty gt when resolving hostnames via the Domain Name Range max 20 characters System DNS netbiosNameServer Use this element to set the IP address of the NetBios Defauit 0 0 0 0 server Range up to 255 255 255 255 netbiosNodeType Use this element to configure the client as described Default lt opt gt in RFC1001 RFC1002 Range enumerated see below The netbiosNodeType element has the following values no node B node P node M node H node DHCP server reaction on a BootP request The DHCP server reacts on a BootP request as follows the source MAC address of the incoming BootP request packet is compared with the MAC addresses that have been entered in the dhcpStatic table Then there are two possibilities If the source MAC address corresponds with a MAC address in the dhcpStatic table then the DHCP server replies with a BootP r
42. 154 for more information on policies e 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 45 for more information on adding objects priority Use this element to set the port priority of the inter Defayit 128 face Range 0 255 Each port of a bridge has a unique port identifier The priority element is a part of this port identifier and allows you to change the priority of the port It is taken as the more significant part in priority comparisons The other part of the unique port identifier has a fixed relationship to the physical or logical port This assures the uniqueness of the unique port identifier among the ports of a single bridge Refer to 8 8 The Spanning Tree priority and cost on page 147 for more informa tion on port priority pathCost Use this element to set the path cost of the interface Defayit 100 The path cost is the value that is added to the total Range 1 65535 cost of the path to the root bridge provided that this particular port is a root port l e that the path to the root goes through this port Refer to 8 8 The Spanning Tree priority and cost on page 147 for more informa tion on port priority topologyChange Detection Use this element to enable or disable the communica Default enabled tion of Spanning Tree topology changes to the root Range enabled disabled bridge 154 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 8 User manual Confi
43. 2 TUNNUST Use this element to set the DLCI number to reach a remote network Default 16 Range 16 1022 The DLCI number may have any value between 16 and 1022 However if you set the configuration attribute Imi to 9933 Annex A you should only use DLCls up to 1007 Use this element to set the Committed Information Rate for the DLCI Default 0 Range 0 2048000 The CIR is expressed in bps Any value between 0 and 2048000 bps can be con figured If the cir value is set to 0 default it means the complete bandwidth may be used no flow control Use this element to set the Excess Information Rate for the DLCI Default 0 Range 0 2048000 The EIR is expressed in bps Any value between 0 and 2048000 bps can be con figured If the eir value is set to 0 default it means no excess burst is allowed The bursts of data that are allowed are the CIR value EIR value l e If you want a CIR of 1 Mbps and you want to allow bursts up to 1 5 Mbps then set the CIR to 1024000 bps and the EIR to 512000 bps Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual Chapter 10 191 Configuration attributes telindus1031 g703 channel frameRelay Imi Use this attribute to select the Local Management Interface LMI protocol and to fine tune the LMI operation Default Range structure see below Refer to 6 3 4 Configuring LMI on page 84 for more information
44. 2 b 3 172 31 77 10 255 255 255 248 172 31 77 6 wan 10 2 Now in order to reach network 172 31 75 0 DLCI 16 is used However when DLCI 16 goes down the Telindus 1031 Router automatically uses DLCI 17 in order to reach network 172 31 75 0 l e it automat ically reroutes and this without the need of a routing protocol This only works for the entries of the routing table not for the default gateway e This type of route is always up In the status information the interface element of such a route displays internal Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 107 User manual Configuring the router 7 3 Configuring the Routing Information Protocol This section introduces the Routing Information Protocol RIP and gives a short description of the attributes you can use to configure RIP The following gives an overview of this section 7 3 1 Introducing RIP on page 108 e 7 3 2 Configuring RIP on page 109 e 7 3 3 Explaining the rip structure on page 110 e 7 3 4 Configuring RIP authentication on page 115 108 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 3 1 Introducing RIP What is RIP The Routing Information Protocol RIP is a protocol that routers use to exchange dynamic routing infor mation How does RIP work When RIP is enabled the Telindus 1031 Router advertises every 30 seconds its routing information to adjacent routers It also receives the routing information from the adjacen
45. 2 and 5 represent the subnets on the LAN and WAN interface respectively Lines 3 and 6 represent the interface its IP addresses e Line 7 represents the static route to the remote LAN Finally line 4 represents the multicast address for RIP version 2 Remark If the LAN is not connected to the Telindus 1031 Router it is still possible to contact the Telindus 1031 Router with e g TMA or Telnet over the WAN link by using the IP address of the LAN interface This means that the status attribute telindus1031 laninterface ip status still indicates up although in the routingTable the corresponding route to the network is down This seemingly unlogic implementation is necessary to insure correct operation with HP OpenView IP address LAN interface 192 168 47 254 AD vV ae i modem tus TMA Telnet TFTP SNMP 192 168 47 254 OK IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 277 Reference manual Status attributes telindus1031 router igmpTable This attribute shows the multicast address reported by one or more clients The igmpTable is always updated even if no proxy is configured The igmpTable contains the following elements KSN SUE multicast This is the multicast address interface This is the interface name ofthe client s In case of multiple interface names they are separated from each other by a comma What is IGMP Internet Group Management Protoc
46. 255 255 0 The configuration of the Telindus 1031 Router in CLI format is as follows action Load Default Configuration SET SELECT 9703 1 SELECT channel g703 1 LIST encapsulation atm SELECT atm LIST pvcTable name pvcl mode bridging atm vpi 100 vei 100 SELECT bridge SELECT bridgeGroup LIST ip address 10 1 0 2 vlan dotQTagging enabled vid 10 action Activate Configuration Telindus 1031 Router 169 Reference manual Reference manual 170 Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 101171 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 Configuration attributes This chapter discusses the configuration attributes of the Telindus 1031 Router The following gives an overview of this chapter 10 1 Configuration attribute overview on page 172 10 2 General configuration attributes on page 174 10 3 LAN interface configuration attributes on page 178 10 4 WAN interface configuration attributes on page 181 10 5 Router configuration attributes on page 200 10 6 Bridge configuration attributes on page 231 10 7 SNMP configuration attributes on page 238 10 8 Management configuration attributes on page 240 10 9 Proxy configuration attributes on page 244 172 Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual 10 1 Configuration attribute overview Chapter 10 Configuration attributes gt tel
47. All VPIs and VCls however have only local significance across a par ticular link and are remapped as appropriate at each switch How does ATM switching work The basic operation of an ATM switch is straightforward The cell is received across a link on a known VCI or VPI value The switch looks up the connection value in a local translation table to determine the outgoing port or ports of the connection and the new VPI VCI value of the connection on that link The switch then retransmits the cell on that outgoing link with the appropriate connection identifiers Because all VCls and VPIs have only local significance across a particular link these values are remapped as necessary at each switch 88 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols What are the ATM layers The ATM reference model is composed of the following ATM layers physical layer Analogous to the physical layer of the OSI reference model the ATM physical layer manages the medium dependent transmission ATM layer Combined with the ATM adaptation layer the ATM layer is roughly analogous to the data link layer of the OSI reference model The ATM layer is responsible for the simultaneous sharing of virtual circuits over a physical link cell multiplexing and passing cells through the ATM network cell relay To do this it uses the VPI and VCI information in the header of each ATM cell ATM Adaptation Combine
48. Example 1 Static IP route with an IP address on the WAN interface IP address WAN interface IP address WAN interface 192 168 100 1 192 168 100 2 IP address LAN interface IP address LAN interface 192 168 47 254 192 168 48 254 5 Router A Router B E E amp modem modem C3 5 IP subnet 192 168 47 0 IP subnet 192 168 48 0 mask 255 255 255 0 mask 255 255 255 0 In this example two LANs are interconnected via a modem link The two routers have an IP address on their WAN interface To make network 192 168 48 0 reachable from network 192 168 47 0 and vice versa you have to define one static route in router A left and one static route in router B right as fol lows Router A routingTable network interface preference metric gt 1 192 168 48 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 100 2 10 2 Router B routingT able interface preference metric 2 network p1 192 168 47 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 100 1 10 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 105 User manual Configuring the router Example 2 Static IP route without an IP address on the WAN interface IP address LAN interface IP address LAN interface 192 168 47 254 192 168 48 254 Router A Router B modem IP subnet 192 168 47 0 IP subnet 192 168 48 0 mask 255 255 255 0 mask 255 255 255 0 This example is similar to the previous one except that now the WAN interfaces do not have an IP address To make network 192 168 48 0 r
49. In conjunc tion with routers from other vendors e g Cisco specifically select an L2TP mode lac or Ins tunnelAuthentication Use this element to enable on or disable off tunnel Default off authentication Range on off L2TP incorporates a simple optional CHAP like tunnel authentication system dur ing control connection establishment If the LAC or LNS wishes to authenticate the identity of the peer it is contacting or being contacted by it sends a challenge packet If the expected response and response received from a peer does not match the tunnel is not opened To participate in tunnel authentication a single shared secret has to exist between the LAC and LNS tunnelSecret Use this element to set the tunnel secret This secret Default lt empty gt is used in the tunnel authentication in order to verify Range 0 64 characters the peer its response copyTos Use this element to enable on or disable off the cop Default on ying of the Type Of Service TOS field value of the Range on off packets maxNrOfRetrans Use this element to set the number of times a control Defauit 4 missions message has to be retransmitted in case no acknowl Range 0 10 edgement follows before the tunnel is closed Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 221 Reference manual Configuration attributes KES pe O O OO transmitWindowSize Use this element to set the win
50. Relay network In this example a remote office is connected to a central office over a Frame Relay network A modem link connects the remote office to the Frame Relay network At the local office a Telindus 1031 Router is installed The central router is a third party router The Frame Relay network uses LMI accord ing to the ANSI standard No Reverse ARP is supported by the network WAN interface IP 192 168 100 1 mask 255 255 255 252 LAN interface IP 192 168 47 254 Router modem oo IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 WAN interface IP 192 168 100 2 mask 255 255 255 252 LAN interface IP 192 168 48 254 network IP subnet 192 168 48 0 mask 255 255 255 0 The configuration of the Telindus 1031 Router in CLI format is as follows action Load Default Configuration SET SELECT lanInterface LIST ip address 192 168 47 254 mode routing SELECT g703 1 SELECT channel g703_ 1 LIST encapsulation frameRelay SELECT frameRelay LIST dlciTable on name dlcil ip address 192 168 100 1 netMask 255 255 255 252 remote 192 168 100 2 frameRelay dlci 19 dg lmi type ansiT1 617 d SELECT router LIST routingTable a network 192 168 48 0 gateway 192 168 100 2 action Activate Configuration 162 Telindus 1031 Router User manual 9 3 Chapter 9
51. Remote file field e g X sdsltt mod File name sdsit mod Click on Open Files of type ai files z Cancel Remote file Jsdsltt mad TFTP and TML tftp gt put filenamel ext filename2 ext my_pwd tml c1 v ffilename1 extofilename2 ext my pwd Where filename1 ext is the source filename This is a file on your computer filename2 ext is the target filename This is the filename the source file will get when it is placed on the file system Source and target filename may be the same but if wanted you may specify a different target filename Example e tftp gt put models nms models nms pwd123 e tml c1 v fmodels nmsemodels nms pwd123 360 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 16 Reference manual Downloading software Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 17 361 Reference manual Technical specifications 17 Technical specifications This chapter gives the technical specifications of the Telindus 1031 Router The following gives an over view of this chapter e 17 1 G703 interface specifications on page 362 e 17 2 LAN interface specifications on page 363 e 17 3 Control connector specifications on page 364 e 17 4 Auxiliary connector specifications on page 365 17 5 ATM encapsulation specifications on page 366 e 17 6 Frame Relay encapsulation specifications on page 366 17 7 PPP encapsulation specifications on page 366 e 17 8 IP routing specifications on page 367 e 17 9 Bridging specific
52. Router Once you installed the Telindus 1031 Router you can proceed with the configuration of the Telindus 1031 Router You can do this using any of the management tools introduced in 1 4 Management tools on page 10 This chapter briefly highlights one of those management tools the Telindus Maintenance Application TMA It introduces TMA and describes how to start a session on the Telindus 1031 Router It also intro duces the terminology concerning the management of a Telindus device Furthermore it explains why and how to add an object to the containment tree The following gives an overview of this chapter 4 1 Managing the Telindus 1031 Router with TMA on page 34 4 2 Introducing the management terminology on page 40 e 4 3 The objects in the Telindus 1031 Router containment tree on page 44 e 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 45 e 4 5 Telindus 1031 Router attribute overview on page 50 34 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1031 Router 4 1 Managing the Telindus 1031 Router with TMA First this section introduces TMA Then it describes how to start a session on the Telindus 1031 Router The following gives an overview of this section 4 1 1 What is TMA on page 35 4 1 2 How to connect TMA on page 35 e 4 1 3 Connecting through the control connector on page 36 e 4 1 4 Connecting over an IP network on page 38 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 4 35 User ma
53. Router and the other side to a network outlet If you want to connect the Telindus 1031 Router to e a regular Ethernet network outlet then use a crossed RJ45 cable an Ethernet hub then use a straight RJ45 cable Refer to 17 2 LAN interface specifications on page 363 for the specifications of this connector This female 9 pins subD connector is the control connector You can connect this connector to a COM port of your PC with a straight male female DB9 cable This enables you to manage the Telindus 1031 Router locally using TMA CLI ATWIN etc You can also connect this connector to the control connector of another Telin dus device with a crossed male male DB9 cable This enables you to manage this device with the Telindus 1031 Router i e the Telindus 1031 Router as management concentrator Refer to Refer to the Telindus 1030 Router Orchid function manual for more informa tion on managing Telindus devices 17 3 Control connector specifications on page 364 for the specifications of this connector This female 9 pins subD connector is the auxiliary connector You can connect this connector to the control connector of another Telindus device with a straight male male DB9 cable This allows you to manage this device with the Telindus 1031 Router i e the Telindus 1031 Router as man agement concentrator Refer to e Refer to the Telindus 1030 Router Orchid function manual for more informa
54. Telindus 1031 Router are completely filled up it has to discard the excess data Examples Suppose you have a 2 E Mbps physical connection Jal mA f towards the Frame Relay Es DLCI 16 service provider and you LAN 2 Mbps connection rect define 2 DLCls 4 e Suppose you assign to Fe CAS both DLCls a CIR of 1 Mbps and an EIR of 0 gt In that case you have per DLCI a guaranteed bandwidth of 1 Mbps and no bursts are allowed e Suppose you assign to both DLCls a CIR of 512 kbps and an EIR of 512 kbps gt In that case you have per DLCI a guaranteed bandwidth of 512 kbps and you allow bursts up to 1 Mbps This means that if on both DLCls a burst up to 1 Mbps occurs at the same time the speed of the physical connection 2 Mbps is still not exceeded so no data is discarded If however somewhere else on the network a congestion occurs it is possible that some of the excess data is discarded refer to What is the Discard Eligible bit on page 79 e Suppose you assign to both DLCls a CIR of 1 Mbps and an EIR of 1 Mbps gt In that case you have per DLCI a guaranteed bandwidth of 1 Mbps and you allow bursts up to 2 Mbps Obviously this means that if on both DLCls a burst up to 2 Mbps occurs at the same time the speed of the physical connection 2 Mbps is exceeded and some data is discarded In that case the principle of first come f
55. The following gives an overview of this chapter 5 1 Reading DIP switch tables and TMA attribute strings on page 52 e 5 2 Configuring IP addresses on page 55 5 3 Configuring the G703 interface on page 61 5 4 Configuring passwords on page 62 5 5 Configuring the major features of the Telindus 1031 Router on page 65 5 6 Executing configuration actions on page 66 A Refer to the Reference manual on page 169 for a complete overview of the attributes of the Telindus 1031 Router 52 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 5 User manual Basic configuration 5 1 Reading DIP switch tables and TMA attribute strings As this chapter explains the basic configuration of the Telindus 1031 Router it contains some DIP switch tables and a lot of TMA attribute strings To enable you to read this information in a correct manner this section explains the structure of such tables and strings The following gives an overview of this section e 5 1 1 Reading a DIP switch table on page 53 e 5 1 2 Reading a TMA attribute string on page 54 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 5 53 User manual Basic configuration 5 1 1 Reading a DIP switch table A DIP switch configuration table has the following layout 1 on off The following table explains the DIP switch configuration table layout BZA This position displays the DIP switch icon 1 the DIP switch name the DIP switch position on the DIP switch bank The abbreviati
56. The mode attribute has the following values bridging All packets are bridged The settings of the IP configuration attributes of the LAN are ignored If you want to manage the Telindus 1031 Router via IP you have to configure an IP address in the bridgeGroup object Refer to telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup ip on page 233 routing The IP packets are routed All other protocols are discarded routingAndBridging IP packets are routed Non IP packets are bridged A telindus1031 laninterface bridging Default Range structure see below Use this attribute to configure the bridging related parameters of the LAN interface Refer to e 8 Configuring the bridge on page 139 for more information on bridging e 8 9 6 Explaining the bridging structure on page 152 for a detailed description of the bridging structure telindus1031 laninterface adapter Default autoDetect Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to set the Ethernet mode of the LAN interface The adapter attribute has the following values autoDetect 10Mb halfDuplex 10Mb fullDuplex 100Mb halfDuplex telindus1031 lanInterface alarmMask telindus1031 lanInterface alarmLevel Refer to e 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 329 for more information on the configuration attributes alarmMask and alarmLevel and on the alarms in general e 13 4 LAN interface alarms on page 334 for more infor
57. against digital radio telephone Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 17 369 Reference manual Technical specifications 17 16 Environmental compliance e Storage conditions ETSI ETS 300 019 1 1 Class 1 1 In addition the storage temperature has to be between 25 to 70 C Transport conditions ETSI ETS 300 019 1 2 Class 2 3 e Stationary use conditions ETSI ETS 300 019 1 3 Class 3 2 In addition the requirements below apply relative humidity 5 to 95 non condensing and ambient operational temperature 5 to 45 C or relative humidity 0 to 95 non condensing and ambient operational temperature 10 to 50 C e Maximum altitude 3000m International protection IP class of protection against solid and liquids IP40 370 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 17 Reference manual Technical specifications Telindus 1031 Router 371 Annex Annex 372 Telindus 1031 Router Annex Telindus 1031 Router Annex Annex A 373 common TCP and UDP numbers Annex A common TCP and UDP numbers The following table shows the port numbers for a number of common protocols using TCP and UDP as transport protocol As far as possible the same port numbers are used for TCP as for UDP A complete list can be found in the RFCs Requests For Comment ftp data UDP TCP TCP Description File Transfer Default Data ftp TCP File Transfer Control telnet TCP Telnet smtp TCP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
58. and the control connec tor of the Telindus 1031 Router using a male female DB9 cable 3 An IP connection is a connection between your PC and the Telindus 1031 Router over an IP network Using a VT100 terminal emulation program Using Telnet Using an SNMP browser Using a web browser NOOO Ff Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 2 13 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1031 Router 2 Installing and connecting the Telindus 1031 Router First this chapter gives some important safety instructions Then it explains how to install and connect the Telindus 1031 Router You are advised to read this chapter from the beginning to the end without skipping any part By doing so your Telindus 1031 Router will be completely installed and ready for configuration when you reach the end of this chapter The following gives an overview of this chapter e 2 1 Safety instructions on page 14 2 2 Unpacking on page 15 e 2 3 Selecting a site on page 16 e 2 4 Installation and connection precautions on page 17 e 2 5 Connecting the Telindus 1031 Router on page 18 e 2 6 The front panel LED indicators on page 24 14 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1031 Router 2 1 Safety instructions IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Disconnect the power supply before installing adjusting or servicing the unit Cy ACHTUNG WICHTIGE SICHERHEITSINSTRUKTIONEN Vor s mtliche
59. application software This may be necessary in case a software download failed or a flash memory error occurred making the Telindus 1031 Router inaccessible or even inoperative What is application software The application software also called control software or firmware completely controls the Telindus 1031 Router It is located on the highest software level Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 16 355 Reference manual Downloading software 16 2 Downloading application software using TMA To download application software to the Telindus 1031 Router using TMA proceed as follows w poo o O Establish a link between TMA and the Telindus 1031 Router either over a serial or an IP connection Refer to 4 Managing the Telindus 1031 Router on page 33 In the TMA window select Tools gt Download In case you made e an IP connection skip this step Password Files Options e aserial connection select the Options tab in ile asta ead cies the TMA Download window Then set the following Serial port feom z Set the initial transfer speed to 9600 bps Ifyou set the maximum transfer speed to 115200 bps the actual transfer speed will be negotiated between 9600 bps and 115200 bps EE In the TMA Download window select the Configuration tab and click on Add In the Remote filename window do the following Look in a Tma i El c i E 1 Select the file you want to download Le tar a e 9 T12
60. as chan nelised E1 interfaces offering multiple logical interfaces on one physical port The versions with serial interface X 21 V 35 V 36 RS530 or RS530A allow speeds up to 10Mbps The Telindus 1030 Router series can directly encapsulate the LAN traffic for transmission over ATM and frame relay WAN networks ATM encapsulation includes RFC2684 formerly RFC1483 PPP over ATM and PPP over Ethernet and RBE Routed Bridge Encapsulation For point to point set ups and connec tions over PDH or SDH networks PPP can also be used as the WAN protocol Additionally the Telindus 1030 Router series is equipped with an AUX V 24 WAN interface for low speed asynchronous PPP con nections and a control V 24 management interface The Telindus 1030 Router series supports differentiated services based on VPNs Virtual Private Net works Therefore it integrates features like L2TP Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol IPSEC 802 1Q VLAN tagging and COS Class Of Service based on Diffserv priority tagging and queuing A specific model supporting DES and 3DES encryption is also available The Telindus 1030 Router series is designed for integration into demanding network environments and can be controlled by a complete set of network maintenance and management tools It supports auto install features over the WAN network This makes it ideally suited for plug and play installation at cus tomer premises while the configuration is prepared at a central site Wha
61. authentica Pefault disabled tion Range enumerated see below Refer to 7 3 4 Configuring RIP authentication on page 115 for more information on RIP authentication The authentication element has the following values disabled No authentication is used text The authentication secret is exchanged in clear text md5 Instead of sending the authentication secret together with the RIP updates it is hashed together with the rout ing information into a unique value This authentication is the most secure This because it provides also protec tion against tampering with the contents of a packet both an incorrect password and modified routing infor mation result in different hash values Remarks e If authentication is enabled either text or md5 then only updates using that authentication are processed All other updates on that interface are discarded e Ifyou use md5 and if for a certain interface multiple secrets are present in the ripv2SecretTable then the first entry in the ripv2SecretTable is used to transmit RIP updates Authentication of the received RIP updates is done by looking for the first secret with a matching key e Ifyou use text and if for a certain interface multiple secrets are present in the ripv2SecretTable then only the first entry in the ripv2SecretTable is used to transmit and receive RIP updates 114 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router e
62. authentication method Refer to 7 3 3 Explaining the rip structure on page 110 e Use the ripv2SecretTable attribute to define the secrets used for the RIP authentication Refer to telindus1031 router ripv2SecretTable on page 206 116 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 4 Configuring address translation This section explains Network Address Translation NAT and Port Address Translation PAT Firstly it gives an introduction Secondly a table is presented that will help you to determine which translation method meets your requirements Then this section teaches you how to configure NAT and PAT The following gives an overview of this section 7 4 1 Introducing NAT and PAT on page 117 7 4 2 When use NAT and or PAT on page 118 7 4 3 Configuring PAT on page 119 7 4 4 How does PAT work on page 120 7 4 5 PAT limitations on page 122 7 4 6 PAT limitations workaround on page 123 7 4 7 Configuring NAT on page 124 7 4 8 How does the NAT address table work on page 125 7 4 9 Combining PAT and NAT on page 126 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 117 User manual Configuring the router 7 4 1 Introducing NAT and PAT What is NAT and PAT Network Address Translation NAT and Port Address Translation PAT are used to translate private IP addresses into official IP addresses This is also known as IP masquerading If you use the Telindus 1031 Router to have a permanent connection to
63. by An elementary example of a Spanning Tree topology is given in the figure below segment 1 DP segment 2 BP Bridge B l RP l l l l DP Bridge C I segment 3 RP Root Port DP Designated Port BP Blocking Port 144 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 8 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 5 The Spanning Tree bridge port states Bridge port states There are four possible states a bridge port can be in State A port in this state blocking does no frame forwarding e does not incorporate station location into its address database There is no learning on a blocking port so there is no MAC address database update e receives BPDUs but does not process or propagate them A bridge always enters the blocking state following bridge initialisation listening does no frame forwarding does not incorporate station location into its address database There is no learning on a listening port so there is no MAC address database update receives and processes BPDUs but does not propagate them learning does no frame forwarding incorporates station location into its MAC address database receives processes and propagates BPDUs forwarding forwards frames incorporates station location into its MAC address database receives processes and propagates BPDUs Bridge port state transition diagram The following figure shows how a bridge port moves through the dif
64. create a list of passwords create at least one with write and security access If not you will be unable to make configuration and password changes after activation of the new configuration 176 k i Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1031 alarmMask telindus1031 alarmLevel Refer to e 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 329 for more information on the configuration attributes alarmMask and alarmLevel and on the alarms in general e 13 3 General alarms on page 332 for more information on the alarms of the telindus1031 object telindus1031 Activate Configuration If you execute this action the editable non active configuration becomes the active configuration This action corresponds with the TMA button Send all attributes to device 4 md When use this action Use this action after you made all the necessary configuration settings and you want to activate these settings telindus1031 Load Default Configuration If you execute this action the non active configuration is overwritten by the default configuration After executing this action click on the TMA button Retrieve all attributes from device wap to see the new non active configuration When use this action If you install the Telindus 1031 Router for the first time all configuration attributes have their default val ues If the Telindus 1031 Router has already been configu
65. down or vice versa iflnOctets the number of octets bytes received on this interface iflnPackets the number of packets received on this interface iflnErrors the number of packets received on this interface that could not be delivered to a higher layer protocol because they contained errors ifOutOctets the number of octets bytes transmitted by the interface including framing char acters ifOutPackets the number of packets transmitted by the interface ifOutDiscards the number of outgoing packets that were discarded to prevent they were trans mitted by the interface This could be due to for instance the presence of an access list ifOutErrors the number of packets that could not be transmitted by the interface because they contained errors ra telindus1031 lanInterface h24Performance This attribute displays the 24 hours performance summary of the LAN interface The h24Performance table contains the same elements as the telindus1031 laninterface h2Performance table Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 305 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 3 WAN interface performance attributes This section discusses the performance attributes of the WAN interface First it describes the perform ance attributes of the physical interface Then it explains the performance attributes of the encapsulation protocols that can be used on the interface The following gives an overview of this section e
66. dynamic 00000d 01h 59m 56s b 6 00 08 C7 09 40 10 194 7 48 10 dynamic 00000d 01h 59m 02s gt 7 00 10 54 4D 32 56 194 7 48 185 dynamic 00000d 01h 58m 115 b8 00 10 54 FB BA 8E 10 0 8 154 dynamic 00000d 01h 55m 06s b9 00 20 4F F1 EE 34 10 0 8 180 dynamic 00000d 01h 56m 48s gt 10 00 10 83 27 17 97 194 7 48 60 dynamic 00000d 01h 59m 31s 254 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes kal telindus1031 laninterface bridging This attribute displays the bridging status of the interface The bridging structure contains the following elements AA 11 SANS This displays the current state ofthe port Possible values are disabled The port is not in use because of a management action blocking The port does not participate in frame forwarding listening The port prepares to participate in frame forwarding but it does not update its MAC address database also called bridge cache learning The port prepares to participate in frame forwarding and it learns the present MAC addresses forwarding The port participates in frame forwarding These are the only possible port states for a bridge that is not run ning the Spanning Tree protocol IEEE p802 1D Refer to 8 5 The Spanning Tree bridge port states on page 144 for more informa tion on port states subState This gives additional information on the port state Possible values are This is the port through w
67. elements ET pee O O OOOO OS keyld Use this element to set a unique identifier for each Default 0 secret Range 0 255 secret Use this element to define the secret Default lt empty gt Range 0 16 characters This secret is sent with the RIP updates on the speci fied interface It is also used to authenticate incoming RIP updates interface Use this element to specify on which interface the Default all secret is used Range 0 24 characters Entering the string all default means the secret is used on all the interfaces D Remarks e If authentication is enabled either text or md5 then only updates using that authentication are proc essed All other updates on that interface are discarded e If you use md5 and if for a certain interface multiple secrets are present in the ripv2SecretTable then the first entry in the ripv2SecretTable is used to transmit RIP updates Authentication of the received RIP updates is done by looking for the first secret with a matching key e Ifyou use text and if for a certain interface multiple secrets are present in the ripv2SecretTable then only the first entry in the ripv2SecretTable is used to transmit and receive RIP updates Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual Chapter 10 207 Configuration attributes telindus1031 router sysSecret Use this attribute for the CHAP authentication process The CHAP authen ticator uses the
68. features as there are default NAT L2TP tunnelling filtering traffic and priority policy etc The following gives an overview of this section 10 5 1 General router configuration attributes on page 201 10 5 2 Default NAT configuration attributes on page 215 10 5 3 L2TP tunnel configuration attributes on page 218 10 5 4 Routing filter configuration attributes on page 222 10 5 5 Traffic policy configuration attributes on page 223 10 5 6 Priority policy configuration attributes on page 228 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 201 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 5 1 General router configuration attributes telindus1031 router defaultRoute Default Use this attribute to set the default route also called gateway address Range structure see below Refer to 7 2 Configuring static routes on page 100 for more information on static routes The defaultRoute structure contains the following elements aS a gateway Use this element to specify the IP address of the next Default 0 0 0 0 router that will route all packets for which no specific Range up to 255 255 255 255 static or dynamic route exists in the routing table Whether you can omit the gateway element or not is linked to the following condi tions If the interface element specifies the LAN interface you can not omit the gateway element the WAN interface you can omit the gateway element only whe
69. following examples will clarify this To configure the PCR use the peakCellRate element in the atm structure within the pvcTable Refer to telindus1031 g703 channel J atm pvcTable atm on page 195 Important remarks e Per definition the PCR is the specified amount of unguaranteed bandwidth However if you want to set a guaranteed bandwidth then donotover dimension the PCR i e do not let the sum of the PCRs of the PVCs exceed the band width of the physical connection donot set the PCR to auto When you do exceed the total bandwidth of the physical connection then the Telindus 1031 Router first buffers the data However when the buffers of the Telindus 1031 Router are completely filled up it has to discard the excess data Examples se PVC 1 lt Suppose you have a 2 D SA a x i aj ls PVC 2 Mbps physical connection E amm towards the ATM service AN IA provider and you define 4 f A PVCs z Ga The following tables show some possible scenarios Scenario Configured PCR Amount of data sent Assigned bandwidth Chapter 6 91 2048 kbps 512 kbps 2048 kbps 512 kbps 2048 kbps 512 kbps 2048 kbps 512 kbps Because all PCRs are set to auto each PVC tries to get a maximum bandwidth Hence the total available bandwidth 2 Mbps is divided equally over the four PVCs 92 Telindus 1031 Router
70. getting with TFTP 344 configuration type active 67 default 67 explaining the 67 non active 67 what is 67 configuring a priority policy 135 configuring a traffic policy on the bridge 156 on the router 134 connecting a LAN to the Inter net using NAT and PAT a configuration example 163 connecting the device 18 an example 22 connecting the different parts of the device 20 connecting two networks through a tunnel a configu ration example 166 connecting VLAN enabled switches over a WAN a configuration example 168 connecting with TMA over an IP network 38 through the control connec tor 36 containment tree adding an object 45 of the device 44 terminology 42 what is 42 control connector specifica tions 364 conventions in this manual graphical vi typographical v copyright notice ii creating passwords in the se curity table 63 380 Telindus 1031 Router Annex D default NAT configuration attributes 215 performance attributes 315 status attributes 280 default route an example 103 DHCP relay agent 342 what is 342 DHCP server reaction on a BootP request 213 DHCP versus BoofP releasing IP addresses 213 dimensions of the device 368 DIP switch table reading a 53 DIP switches 29 opening and closing the housing 32 overview 31 position on the motherboard 30 directed broadcast what is 59 Discard Eligible bit what is 79 DLCI basic configuration 83 what is 78 docum
71. has been assigned to this slot load30s This is the load on the processor in percent during the last 30 seconds load5m This is the load on the processor in percent during the last 5 minutes runninginMedium Each task can be running with a low medium or high priority This element gives the percentage of time this task has been running with medium priority during the last 30 seconds runninginHigh Each task can be running with a low medium or high priority This element gives the percentage of time this task has been running with high priority during the last 30 seconds The percentage of time this task has been running with low priority can be calcu lated using the following formula running in low priority 100 runninginMedium runninginHigh programCounter This is the current value of the program counter The program counter is the mem ory address for the current instruction of this task Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 297 Reference manual Status attributes 11 10 Proxy status attributes Refer to the Telindus 1030 Router Orchid function manual for more information on the status attributes of the proxy function also called Orchid function 298 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 299 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 Performance attributes This chapter discusses the performance attributes of the Telindus 103
72. have their default val ues If the Telindus 1031 Router has already been configured but you want to start from scratch then use this action to revert to the default configuration Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 5 69 User manual Basic configuration 5 6 5 Loading the default configuration using the DIP switch The following procedure shows how to load the default configuration using the Load Default Configura tion DIP switch on the Telindus 1031 Router PCB Disconnect the power supply and open the housing as described in 3 3 Opening and closing the housing on page 32 Set DIP switch bank DS2 position 2 to off Refer to 3 1 The Telindus 1031 Router motherboard on page 30 to locate this DIP switch bank Replace the cover without fastening the screws and reconnect the power supply gt The Telindus 1031 Router reboots and loads the default configuration Activate the loaded default configuration Open a TMA session on the Telindus 1031 Router Refer to 4 1 Managing the Telindus 1031 Router with TMA on page 34 Execute the Activate Configuration action 1 If you are performing this load default configuration procedure because you accidentally made a configuration error you have the possibility to retrieve this erroneous configuration before executing the Activate Configuration com mand In that case you do not have to reconfigure the complete device again but you only have to correct the error in question Re
73. is designed to randomise the pattern of 1s Range enabled disabled and Os carried in ATM cells or the physical layer frame Randomising the digital bits can prevent continuous non variable bit patterns in other words long strings of all 1s or all Os Several physical layer protocols rely on transitions between 1s and Os to maintain clocking Use this element to enable or disable coset Default enabled Range enabled disabled Coset is an ATM parameter which indicates when to calculate the header error correction bit if it is to be OR ed with another value or not known as the COSET Polynomial Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 199 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 4 6 HDLC configuration attributes ra telindus1031 g703 channel hdlc bridging Default Range structure see below Use this attribute to configure the bridging related parameters of the HDLC link Refer to e 8 Configuring the bridge on page 139 for more information on bridging e 8 9 6 Explaining the bridging structure on page 152 for a detailed description of the bridging structure 200 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 5 Router configuration attributes This section discusses the configuration attributes concerned with routing First it describes the general routing configuration attributes Then it explains the configuration attributes of the extra
74. its TOS field value is changed Selecting unchanged leaves the TOS field value as it is When you select a new TOS field value then a packet priority Use this element to set the destination queue for a Default Oueue1 packet matching an entry in the trafficShaping table Range enumerated see below In case an overload condition occurs then a packet that matches an entry in the trafficShaping table is sent to the specified gueue The priority element has the following values Queue1 Queue2 Queue3 Queue4 Aueue5 lowDelayQueue Start and end values Except for the ipProtocol newTosValue and priority elements it is possible to specify ranges using the start and end values There are two special cases e A start value is entered but no end value gt an exact match is needed for the start value e Neither a start nor an end value is entered gt the field is not checked 226 Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual Chapter 10 Configuration attributes kal telindus1031 router trafficPolicy dropLevels Use this attribute to define for each user configurable queue how many packets may be queued before they are dropped The dropLevels table contains the following elements Default Range table see below Benet oseepton OO maxLength1 This is the maximum length drop level 1 In case you set the attribute telindus1031 router trafficPol icy method to Def
75. may be possible that the Telindus 1031 Router becomes inaccessible or even inoperative In that case new soft ware can still be downloaded by forcing the Telindus 1031 Router in loader mode Do this by means of the loader mode DIP switch Refer to 3 2 DIP switches of the Telindus 1031 Router on page 31 To download loader or application software to a Telindus 1031 Router in loader mode proceed as fol lows Disconnect the power supply and open the housing as described in 3 3 Opening and closing the housing on page 32 Set DIP switch bank DS2 position 1 to off Refer to 3 1 The Telindus 1031 Router motherboard on page 30 to locate this DIP switch bank Replace the cover without fastening the screws and reconnect the power supply The Telindus 1031 Router reboots in loader mode Now proceed as explained in the previous section 16 4 Downloading application or loader software using TML on page 357 When the software download is finished again disconnect the power supply and open the housing Reset DIP switch bank DS2 position 1 to on Properly replace the cover as described in 3 3 Opening and closing the housing on page 32 and reconnect the power supply Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 16 359 Reference manual Downloading software 16 6 Downloading files to the file system When you use the proxy function of the Telindus 1031 Router you may need to download certain files to the file system of t
76. network mask of the destination network gateway This is the IP address of the next router on the path to the destination network interface This is the interface through which the destination network can be reached Pos sible values are internal The own protocol stack is used lt name gt The destination network can be reached through this particular interface The lt name gt of the interface is the name as you configured it Note that the interface can also be a DLCI an ATM PVC a tunnel etc discard Packets for this destination are discarded This lists how many times the route has been used since it is listed in the routing table For each IP packet that matches this route the attribute value is incremented by one RIP routes may disappear from the routing table and re appear afterwards The attribute value is reset when a RIP route disappears from the routing table 314 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes kal telindus1031 router pingResults Use this action to send a ping to an IP address only one ping at a time You can start and stop pinging with the ping actions startPing and stopPing The pingResults attribute lists the results of the transmitted ping The routingTable contains the following elements Benet pe O ipAddress This is the IP address being pinged numOfTxPackets This is the number of transmitted pings numOf
77. number of unan pefayit 3 swered Status Enquiry messages that the Telindus Range 1 10 1031 Router will accept before declaring the DLCI down Also see the monitoredEvents element 192 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes e pl monitoredEvents Use this element to set the number of status polling Default 4 intervals over which the error threshold is counted Range 1 10 In other words ifthe station receives an errorThreshold number of unanswered Sta tus Enguiry messages within a monitoredEvents number of pollinginterval intervals then the interface is declared down Example If the station receives 3 unanswered Status Enquiry messages within 4 x 10s 40s then the interface is declared down expectedPollinterval Use this element to set the maximum time between Pefault 00000d 00h 00m 15s two consecutive incoming Status Enquiry messages Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s Select the value 0 in order to disable verification 00000d 00h 00m 30s This element is only relevant when using Frame Relay over a point to point link no Frame Relay network In Frame Relay language a router is normally considered as a DTE However if two routers are connected to each other in Frame Relay but without a real Frame Relay network in between then the routers also take the role of a DCE refer to the mode element The Status Enquiry messages are sent
78. occurs at a higher level it can perform more complex analysis to determine the optimal path for the packet Basic routing activities Routing involves two basic activities e determining optimal routing paths e transporting information groups typically called packets Determining the optimal routing path In order to determine a routing path routers initialise and maintain routing tables These routing tables contain a variety of information For example e Destination next hop associations tell a router that a particular destination can be reached optimally by sending the packet to a particular router representing the next hop on the way to the final desti nation When a router receives an incoming packet it checks the destination address and attempts to associate this address with a next hop e Desirability of a path Routers use metrics to evaluate what path will be the best for a packet to travel Routers communicate with one another and maintain their routing tables through the transmission of a variety of messages The routing update message is one such message that generally consists of all or a portion of a routing table By analysing routing updates from all other routers a router can build a detailed picture of network topology Transporting packets In most cases a host determines that it must send a packet to another host Having acquired a router s address by some means the source host sends a packet addressed spe
79. on WAN and LAN interfaces 17 9 Bridging specifications Bridging with spanning tree protocol IEEE 802 1D e VLAN interconnect IEEE 802 1Q Integrated Routing and Bridging IRB 17 10 Routing and bridging performance specifications Full forwarding performance of 64 byte packets at 10 Mbps e Buffering up to 4800 packets 64 bytes packet 368 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 17 Reference manual Technical specifications 17 11 Power requirements e 9 Vdc 10 500 mA e External power adapters available for 48Vdc and 230 Vac 17 12 Dimensions e Height 45 mm e Width 220 mm Depth 235 mm e Weight 700 g 17 13 Safety compliance EN60950 e Class 1 equipment for Table Tops with 115 230 Vac internal power supply e Class 3 equipment for Table Tops with 115 230 Vac external power supply adapter Table Tops with 48 Vdc internal power supply Card Versions 17 14 Over voltage and over current protection compliance The over voltage and over current protection complies with ITU T K 44 and ETSI ETS 300 386 2 recom mendations 17 15 EMC compliance e EN55022 B Emissions e EN55024 Immunity e EN61000 3 2 Harmonics e EN61000 3 3 Voltage fluctuations and flicker e EN61000 4 2 ESD e EN61000 4 3 Radiated immunity e EN61000 4 4 EFT burst e EN61000 4 5 Surge e EN61000 4 6 Conducted immunity e N61000 4 8 Power magnetic field immunity e EN61000 4 11 Voltage dips amp drops e ENV50204 Radiated immunity
80. or a combination of both Chapter 7 Configuring the router NAT allows the use of private IP addresses on the local Ethernet while still having access via the WAN interface to the Internet official IP addresses Each Ethernet IP address that needs Internet access is translated into an official IP address before sending traffic on the WAN interface The number of simultaneous users with Internet access is limited to the number of official IP addresses This is a dynamic process PAT uses only one single official IP address on the WAN network The Tel indus 1031 Router translates all private IP addresses on the local Ethernet to the single official IP address Only outgoing TCP sessions are supported NAT and PAT You can combine both translation methods and tune them to specific needs Check in the next table whether you need NAT and or PAT No of official IP No of devices on local Use NAT of PAT Refer to addresses network more than 1 Use PAT 7 4 3 Configuring PAT on page 119 k gt 1 more than k Use NAT in combination with PAT 7 4 9 Combining PAT and NAT on page 126 at least k k 2 1 1 No translation needed Ifyou wanttranslation use NAT 1 Skip this section 2 7 4 7 Configuring NAT on page 124 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 119 User manual Configuring the router 7 4 3 Configuring PAT Use the following to configure PAT e Use the patAddress attri
81. remark Default Range structure see below If you set the configuration attribute telindus1031 laninterface mode to bridging then the settings of the config uration attribute telindus1031 laninterface ip are ignored As a result if you want to manage the Telindus 1031 Router via IP you have to configure an IP address in the bridgeGroup object instead telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup ip Refer to 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 58 for a detailed description of the ip structure Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 179 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1031 lanInterface arp Default Range structure see below Use this attribute to configure the Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache The arp structure contains the following elements timeOut Use this element to set the ageing time of the ARP Default 00000d 02h 00m 00s cache entries Refer to The ARP cache time out Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s 24855d 03h 14m 07s proxyArp Use this element to enable or disable the ARP cache pefault enabled mechanism Range enabled disabled What is the ARP cache The LAN interface has been allocated a fixed Ethernet address also called MAC Medium Access Con trol address This MAC address is not user configurable The IP address of the LAN interface on the other hand is user configurable This means that the user associates an IP address with the predefined
82. see below Use this attribute to activate or deactivate the Routing Information Protocol RIP Refer to 7 3 Configuring the Routing Information Protocol on page 107 for more information on RIP The routingProtocol attribute has the following values No routing protocol is used Only static routes are used The RIP routing protocol is active You can set the RIP version per interface Refer to the elements txVersion and rxVersion in the rip structure refer to 7 3 3 Explaining the rip structure on page 110 204 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes kal telindus1031 router alternativeRoutes Default backup R i ted bel Use this attribute to determine how the Telindus 1031 Router deals with sl ai aka identical routes If more than one route to a sub network is defined in the routing table and these routes have identical destination addresses masks preferences and metrics e a different gateway then you can use the alternativeRoutes attribute to determine which route the Telindus 1031 Router uses to reach the sub network The alternativeRoutes attribute has the following values backup The Telindus 1031 Router always uses the same route to reach the sub network Only when this route goes down it uses the alternative route roundRobin The Telindus 1031 Router alternately uses the two possible routes to reach the sub network However
83. service that was not present in the servicesAvailable table telindus1031 router defaultNat addressesAvailable This attribute displays the number of NAT addresses that are currently free telindus1031 router defaultNat tcpSocketsUsed This attribute displays the number of sockets currently in use by PAT and NAT for TCP applications telindus1031 router defaultNat udpSocketsUsed This attribute displays the number of sockets currently in use by PAT and NAT for UDP applications telindus1031 router defaultNat icmpSocketsUsed This attribute displays the number of sockets currently in use by PAT and NAT for ICMP applications 316 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 a Reference manual Performance attributes telindus1031 router defaultNat tcpAllocs This attribute indicates how many TCP sockets have been allocated since cold boot Together with the performance attributes natUdpAllocs and natlempAllocs it gives an indication of the type of traffic that is being routed telindus1031 router defaultNat udpAllocs This attribute indicates how many UDP sockets have been allocated since cold boot Together with the performance attributes natTcpAllocs and natlcmpAllocs it gives an indication of the type of traffic that is being routed telindus1031 router defaultNat icmpAllocs This attribute indicates how many ICMP sockets have been allocated since cold boot Together with the performance attributes natTcpAllocs and natUd
84. table Do this using the security attribute Refer to telindus1031 security on page 175 5 4 2 Correcting the security table If you forgot your password or you forgot to create one with write and security access then you can set the Load Default Configuration DIP switch As a result the Telindus 1031 Router reboots in its default configuration You can then retrieve the erroneous configuration and correct it To correct the security table proceed as follows Disconnect the power supply and open the housing as described in 3 3 Opening and closing the housing on page 32 Set DIP switch bank DS2 position 2 to off Refer to 3 1 The Telindus 1031 Router motherboard on page 30 to locate this DIP switch bank Replace the cover without fastening the screws and reconnect the power supply gt The Telindus 1031 Router reboots and loads the default configuration Retrieve the erroneous configuration Open a TMA session on the Telindus 1031 Router Refer to 4 1 Managing the Telindus 1031 Router with TMA on page 34 Execute the Load Saved Configuration action Change the password and or access rights in the security table Execute the Activate Configuration action Again disconnect the power supply and open the housing Reset DIP switch bank DS2 position 2 to on Properly replace the cover as described in 3 3 Opening and closing the housing on page 32 and reconnect the power supply 64
85. the client its subnet mask for Default 255 255 255 0 the specified IP address range Range up to 255 255 255 255 gateway Use this element to set the default gateway for the cli Default 0 0 0 0 ent its subnet Range up to 255 255 255 255 If no gateway is specified then the gateway of the LAN channel is used nameServer Use this element to set the IP address of the name Pefault 0 0 0 0 server that is available to the client Range up to 255 255 255 255 tftpServer Use this element to set the IP address of the TFTP _ Default 0 0 0 0 server that is available to the client It is the next Range up to 255 255 255 255 server to use in boottrap leaseTime Use this element to set the maximum time a client can Default 00000d 00h 00m 00s lease an IP address from the specified IP address Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s range 24855d 03h 14m 07s If 00000d 00h 00m 00s default is specified then the lease time is infinite holdTime Use this element to set the time between two consec Default 00000d 00h 00m 00s utive leases of an IP address l e if a client has just let go of its dynamically assigned IP address then this Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s 24855d 03h 14m 07s same IP address can not be reassigned before the holdTime has elapsed Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 213 cM a bootFile Use this element to set the location of the boot file Default lt empty gt Range max
86. the lowest speed So PVC 1 gets 4 8th 1024 kbps of the total available bandwidth PVC 2 gets 2 8th 512 kbps PVC 3 and 4 each get 1 8th 256 kbps Telindus 1031 Router User manual Scenario Configured PCR 1024 kbps Chapter 6 Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols Amount of data sent 2048 kbps Assigned bandwidth 1024 kbps 512 kbps 2048 kbps 512 kbps 448 kbps 2048 kbps 448 kbps 64 kbps 2048 kbps 64 kbps Because the sum of the PCRs equals the total available bandwidth 2 Mbps all the PVCs get the bandwidth that is specified in their PCRs Scenario Configured PCR 2048 kbps Amount of data sent 2048 kbps Assigned bandwidth 896 kbps 2048 kbps 2048 kbps 896 kbps 512 kbps 2048 kbps 192 kbps 1024 kbps 64 kbps 64 kbps gt In this case the PCRs of the PVCs are over dimensioned i e the sum of the PCRs exceeds the bandwidth of the physical connection towards the ATM network What is more the total amount of data that the PVCs try to send also exceeds the total amount of available bandwidth However one PVC PVC 4 does not use the bandwidth as specified in its PCR As a result the total available bandwidth 2 Mbps is divided proportionally over the PVCs The spare bandwidth that PVC 4 does not use is also proportionally divided over the three PVCs which can use this extra bandwidth PVC 1 2 and 3
87. the official IP address Possible values are free This official IP address is currently not in use fixed This address has a pre configured mapping between the official and private IP address allocated This official IP address is currently assigned to a private IP address but it is not fixed This indicates how many sessions are currently used by this official IP address If the attribute value becomes zero the assigned official IP address becomes free again and can be assigned to another private IP address Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 281 Reference manual Status attributes 11 5 3 L2TP tunnel status attributes ra telindus1031 router tunnels I2tpTunnels This attribute gives you status information on the L2TP tunnels The I2tpTunnels table contains the following elements ES peen name This is the name of the tunnel as you configured it ifOperStatus This displays the operational status of the tunnel Possible values are up The tunnel is up data transfer is possible down The tunnel is down data transfer is not possible dormant The tunnel is stand by As soon as data has to be sent over the tunnel control connect messages are exchanged and the operational status of the tunnel becomes up ifLastChange This is the system up time on the moment the tunnel entered its current opera tional state l e the moment the value of the ifOperStatus status element changes fr
88. to implement the TST algorithm Bridging loops The primary goal of this algorithm is to avoid that bridging loops arise A bridg ing loop occurs when two self learning bridges are placed in parallel This results in data that keeps circling around as each bridge forwards the same data The TST algorithm Using the TST algorithm bridges know of each others existence By communi cating with each other they establish one single path for reaching any particu lar network segment If necessary they may decide to disable some bridges in the network in order to establish this single path This is a continuous process So if a bridge fails the remaining bridges will reconfigure their bridging tables keeping each LAN segment reachable 142 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 8 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 3 The Spanning Tree root bridge What is the root bridge Spanning Tree defines a tree with a root bridge and a loop free path from the root to all bridges in the extended network The root bridge is the logical centre of the Spanning Tree topology Redundant data paths are forced into a stand by blocked state If a network segment in the spanning tree fails and a redundant path exists the spanning tree algorithm recalculates the spanning tree topol ogy and activates the stand by path How is a root bridge selected All bridges in the network participating in Spanning Tree gather information about other bridges in the
89. two networks through a tunnel This is an example of two networks being connected by two Telindus 1031 Routers through a tunnel over the Internet First a route between the WAN interface of Router A and B has to exist Then the tunnel can be set up Router A and B learn the routes of each others network through RIP However they must not learn the WAN and tunnel IP addresses Therefore a filter is created WAN interface WAN interface 207 46 197 101 a 198 182 196 56 ISP LAN interface 207 46 197 254 LAN interface 10 0 28 99 10 1 1 1 SP E e Router B 1 lt modem L2TP tunnel local tunnel S local tunnel 192 168 5 2 AA Internet Router A modem IP subnet 10 0 24 0 mask 255 255 248 0 IP subnet 10 1 1 0 mask 255 255 255 0 192 168 5 1 Telindus 1031 Router User manual Chapter 9 167 Configuration examples The configuration of Router A in CLI format is as follows action Load Default Configuration SET SELECT lanInterface LIST ip address 10 0 28 99 netMask 255 255 248 0 rip mode disabled mode routing SELECT 9703 1 SELECT channel g703 1 LIST encapsulation ppp SELECT ppp LIST ip address 207 46 197 101 remote 207 46 197 254 rip mode disabled SELECT router LIST defaultRoute gateway 207 46 197 254
90. 1 4 0 OAM F5 loopback support ITU T 1 610 Supports up to 8 ATM PVCs e Supports ATM Forum Traffic Management 4 0 service types CBR and UBR ATM AALS encapsulation RFC1483 RFC2684 PPPoA RFC2364 PPPoE RFC2516 17 6 Frame Relay encapsulation specifications Encapsulation compliant with RFC1490 RFC2427 Support of multiple DLCI s PVC e CIR Committed Information Rate configurable per DLCI Support of Reverse ARP over Frame Relay for automatic gateway configuration EIR Excess Information Rate configurable per DLCI Support of LMI revision 1 LMI ANSI T1 617 and ITU T 17 7 PPP encapsulation specifications e Encapsulation compliant with RFC1661 RFC1662 IPCP RFC1332 e BCP RFC2878 Support of CHAP authentication with MD5 hashing RFC1994 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 17 367 Reference manual Technical specifications 17 8 IP routing specifications e IP RFC791 e ARP RFC826 Static routing RIP1 RFC1058 RIP2 with MD5 hashing and authentication RFC2453 e Router requirements RFC1812 e Standard and extended access filtering on LAN and WAN interfaces e NAT Network Address Translation with dynamic or static IP address conversion and PAT Port Address Translation RFC3022 e BOOTP DHCP server relay agent RFC2131 RFC2132 BOOTP client RFC951 Numbered unnumbered WAN Interface DiffServ priority tagging and queuing RFC2474 RFC2475 e L2TP tunnelling RFC2661
91. 1 Router The following gives an overview of this chapter 12 1 Performance attributes overview on page 300 12 2 LAN interface performance attributes on page 302 12 3 WAN interface performance attributes on page 305 12 4 Router performance attributes on page 312 12 5 Bridge performance attributes on page 318 12 6 Management performance attributes on page 321 12 7 Operating system performance attributes on page 323 12 8 Proxy performance attributes on page 325 300 Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual 12 1 Performance attributes overview Chapter 12 Performance attributes gt telindus1031 gt gt lanInterface iflnOctets iflnUcastPkts iflnNUcastPkts iflnDiscards iflnErrors iflnUnknownProtos ifOutOctets ifOutUcastPkts ifOutNUcastPkts ifOutDiscards ifOutErrors ifOutQLen h2Performance h24Performance gt gt router routingTable pingResults Action startPing Action stopPing gt gt g703 1 errorCount gt gt gt defaultNat socketsFree allocFails discards addressesAvailable tcpSocketsUsed udpSocketsUsed icmpSocketsUsed tcpAllocs udpAllocs icmpAllocs Action resetNat gt gt gt channel g703 1 iflnOctets iflnUcastPkts iflnNUcastPkts iflnDiscards iflnErrors iflnUnknownProtos ifOutOctets ifOutUcastPkts ifOutNUcastPkts ifOutDiscards ifOutErrors ifOutQLen ifOutPQLen h2Performance h24Performance gt gt gt tunnels I2tpTunnels gt gt bridge
92. 1 Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes ra telindus1031 g703 channel frameRelay Imi This attribute gives a complete LMI status information overview The Imi structure contains the following elements Description This displays the Frame Relay mode Possible values are noLmi user network auto Refer to telindus1031 g703 J channel frameRelay Imi on page 191 for more information on these values This displays the LMI variant Possible values are ImiRev1 ansiT1 617 d q933 Annex A frf1 2 Refer to telindus1031 g703 channel J frameRelay Imi on page 191 for more information on these values status This displays the current state of LMI Possible values are LMI messages can and are exchanged No LMI messages can be exchanged lastStatusChange This is the system up time when the LMI status entered its current state l e the moment the value of the status element changes from up to down or vice versa the system up time value is written into the lastStatusChange element lastError This displays the last error condition reported by LMI Possible values are none protocol error unknown information element sequence error unknown report timer expired invalid report type unsolicited status netTxSeqNum This is the sequence number of the last LMI response frame sent towards the net work netRxSeqNum This is the sequence number of the last LMI comman
93. 1 Router Chapter 5 User manual Basic configuration 5 6 2 Activating the configuration WS telindus1031 Activate Configuration If you execute this action the editable non active configuration becomes the active configuration This action corresponds with the TMA button Send all attributes to device m El When use this action Use this action after you made all the necessary configuration settings and you want to activate these settings 5 6 3 Loading the saved configuration WS telindus1031 Load Saved Configuration If you execute this action the non active configuration is overwritten by the active configuration currently used by the Telindus 1031 Router After executing this action click on the TMA button Retrieve all attributes from device wap to see the new non active configuration B When use this action If you are in the progress of modifying the non active configuration but made some mistakes then use this action to revert to the active configuration 5 6 4 Loading the default configuration using the action WS telindus1031 Load Default Configuration If you execute this action the non active configuration is overwritten by the default configuration After executing this action click on the TMA button Retrieve all attributes from device wap to see the new non active configuration When use this action If you install the Telindus 1031 Router for the first time all configuration attributes
94. 1 bridge bridgeGroup arp Default Range structure see below Use this attribute to configure the Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache of the bridge Refer to telindus1031 lanInterface arp on page 179 for a detailed description of the arp structure 234 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes kal telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup spanningTree Default Range structure see below Use this attribute to configure the bridging related parameters Whereas the bridging attribute groups the bridging related parameters per interface the spanningTree attribute groups the bridging related parameters of the bridge as a whole The spanningTree structure contains the following elements SN TT protocol Use this element to select the bridging protocol Default none The protocol element has the following values Range enumerated see below The Telindus 1031 Router uses the self learning princi ple This means that the bridge itself learns which data ithas to forward and which data it has to block l e it builds its own bridging table p802 1D The Telindus 1031 Router uses the self learning princi ple in conjunction with the Spanning Tree protocol Because Spanning Tree bridging is somewhat more complicated than self learning bridging an introduction is given in 8 2 The self learning and Transparent Span ning Tree bridge on page 141 When using Fra
95. 1031 router defaultNat portTranslations on page 215 e Use the servicesAvailable attribute to define specific port number ranges for incoming Internet traffic that should not be translated Instead it is sent to the corresponding private IP address Refer to telindus1031 router defaultNat servicesAvailable on page 216 Example of a portTranslations table TMA is an example of an application that does not support port translation If you want to make TMA connections from your local network to protocol startPort endPort action the outside world you have to list TMA port gt 1 udp 1728 lt Opt gt no translation number 1728 in this table However keep in b 2 udp 2000 3000 deny mind that even then it is still not possible to have two simultaneous TMA sessions to the same outside world address portTranslations l l If you do not want that UDP packets with port numbers in the range 2000 up to 3000 are sent to the out side world then you also have to include those in the table Example of a servicesAvailable table In this example a web server with address Y lservices vailable 192 168 47 250 on the local network is acces sible from the Internet using the PAT address eetet ete instead of using the server address tep lt Opt gt 124 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 4 7 Configuring NAT Despite the workarounds offered by the previous two PAT configuration attributes to ov
96. 12 3 1 G703 interface performance attributes on page 306 e 12 3 2 G703 channel performance attributes on page 307 e 12 3 3 Frame Relay performance attributes on page 308 e 12 3 4 ATM performance attributes on page 311 306 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 3 1 G703 interface performance attributes telindus1031 g703 J errorCount In case CRC4 insertion is enabled this attribute displays the amount of CRC4 errors that were detected on the interface Refer to telindus1031 g703 J crc4lnsertion on page 183 for more information on CRC4 inser tion Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 307 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 3 2 G703 channel performance attributes Most performance attributes of the WAN interface are the same as on the LAN interface Therefore they are not explained here again Refer to 12 2 LAN interface performance attributes on page 302 fora complete description of these attributes However the attribute ifOutPQLen is only present on the WAN interface and therefore explained below ra telindus1031 g703 channel JifOutPALen In case an overload condition occurs and priority queuing is activated then this attribute displays how many packets the different gueues contain This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter 308 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 3 3 Frame Relay performance attributes ra telindus1031 g703
97. 2 how selected 142 what is 142 topology 143 specifications ATM encapsulation 366 auxiliary connector 365 bridging 367 control connector 364 dimensions 368 EMC compliance 368 environmental compliance 369 Frame Relay encapsulation 366 G703 interface 362 IP routing 367 LAN interface 363 over voltage and over cur rent protection compli ance 368 power requirements 368 PPP encapsulation 366 routing and bridging per formance 367 safety compliance 368 statements iii static routes basic configuration 100 101 examples 103 with IP address on the WAN 104 without IP address on the WAN 105 status attributes 245 ATM 270 bridge 287 default NAT 280 file system 294 Frame Relay 266 G703 channel 259 G703 interface 258 general 248 HDLC 272 L2TP tunnel 281 LAN interface 251 loop back 293 management 293 operating system 296 overview 246 PPP 261 proxy 297 router 273 router general 274 WAN interface 257 structured value what is 42 T technical specifications 361 Telindus 1030 Router series what is 4 Time To Live TTL what is 209 TMA connecting over an IP net work 38 connecting through the con trol connector 36 how to connect 35 managing the device with 34 what is 35 TMA attribute string reading a 54 TMA sub system picture 339 how to display 339 structure 339 traffic and priority policy introduction 131 traffic and priority policy on routed and bridged data 132
98. 2 to a higher priority lower numerical value than port 1 port 2 becomes the root port 148 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 8 User manual Configuring the bridge Example By changing the priority and or the pathCost you can create a preferred path path cost 10 path cost 10 root bridge Bridge C Bridge A Bridge B path cost 100 Bridge D By setting the path costs of Bridge A and B to a lower value than the path cost of Bridge D you can create a preferred path through Bridge A and B The path through Bridge D becomes the back up path Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 8 149 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 9 Configuring bridging This section lists the attributes you can use to configure bridging The following gives an overview of this section e 8 9 1 Configuring an IP address on page 150 e 8 9 2 Enabling bridging on the interfaces on page 150 e 8 9 3 Selecting the bridging protocol on page 150 e 8 9 4 Setting the bridge priority on page 150 e 8 9 5 Configuring the bridging parameters on the interfaces on page 151 e 8 9 6 Explaining the bridging structure on page 152 150 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 8 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 9 1 Configuring an IP address If you enable bridging on the LAN interface telindus1031 laninterface mode bridging then the settings of the configuration attribute telindus1031 laninterface ip are ignored As a result if y
99. 3 Once you choose a traffic policy method you can fine tune this method using the following attributes If you choose the method then use the following attribute to fine tune this method trafficShaping e telindus1031 router trafficPolicy JtrafficShaping on page 224 e telindus1031 router trafficPolicy dropLevels on page 226 only the maxLength1 element tosDiffServ telindus1031 router trafficPolicy dropLevels on page 226 tosMapped e telindus1031 routerftrafficPolicy tos2QueueMapping on page 227 e telindus1031 router trafficPolicy J dropLevels on page 226 only the maxLength1 element Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 135 User manual Configuring the router 7 6 5 Configuring a priority policy Refer to 7 6 1 Introducing traffic and priority policy on page 131 for an introduction This section shows you which configuration attributes you can use to configure a priority policy The priorityPolicy object is not present in the containment tree by default If you want to use priority pol icy then add this object first Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 45 Whereas configuring a traffic policy for routed data is different than for bridged data configuring a priority policy is the same for both In other words the mechanism to fill the queues is different for routed data than it is for bridged data but the mechanism to empty the queues is the same for both
100. 335 for more information on the alarms of the 9703 object 184 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 ED E Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 4 2 G703 channel configuration attributes telindus1031 g703 channel timeSlots Default all time slots disabled Range bit string see below Use this attribute to enable or disable the individual 64 kbps time slots in the framed data stream telindus1031 g703 J channel encapsulation Default atm Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to select the encapsulation protocol on the WAN interface The encapsulation attribute has the following values frameRelay ppp atm and hdlc Important remark You can only use ATM encapsulation on the G703 interface when you selected framed mode not when you selected unframed mode refer to telindus1031 9703 J framing on page 182 telindus1031 g703 channel priorityPolicy Default lt empty gt Range 0 24 characters Use this attribute to apply a priority policy on the interface Do this by entering the index name of the priority policy you want to use You can create the priority policy itself by adding a priorityPolicy object under the router object and by configuring the attributes in this object Example If you created a priorityPolicy object with index name my_priority_policy i e gt priorityPolicy imy_priorty_policyl priorityPolicy my_priority_policy and you w
101. 34001 00 at Cms2Serw ini java T TM exe at Uninst4 isu jat SDSL TT configuration ems 8 TMA ini Type contro in the Remote file 211400 peaga maT ftp exe field Click on Open Filename T211400300 Files of type ai files el Cancel Remote file CONTROL If you are currently connected to the Telindus 1031 Router without write access then you can enter a password in the Password tab which gives you write access Else leave the Password tab blank When the TMA Download window reappears click on OK Password Configuration Options A window opens and shows the download is The download list box specifies the files that will be sent to the device Use the Add and Remove progress buttons to edit the list 72114009 00 CONTROL Remove Cancel 356 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 16 Reference manual Downloading software 16 3 Downloading application software using TFTP When downloading with TMA over an IP connection you actually evoke TFTP Trivial File Transfer Pro tocol through TMA You can also use TFTP without opening TMA To download application software to the Telindus 1031 Router using TFTP proceed as follows Start a TFTP session on the Telindus 1031 Router For example by typing tftp 10 0 11 1 at the command prompt of your computer where 10 0 11 1 is the LAN IP address of the Telindus 1031 Router Set the following TFTP parameters Set the re
102. 47 8 9 Configuring bridging 4 3 ahha hace scart vakka ok ladle Anda aada hakk akadi kad 149 8 10 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the bridge mmnea 154 9 Configuration examples 2rnvansvieta smike akadeemia aata k 159 9 1 LAN extension over a PDH SDH network meererennnnnnanneeeeneneae 160 9 2 LAN extension over a Frame Relay network 0 mnnnnnrs 161 9 3 LAN extension over an ATM network meemnnenvtnannennennnnnnananananmannneaa 162 9 4 Connecting a LAN to the Internet using NAT and PAT naseer 163 9 5 Using PAT over PPP with a minimum of official IP addresses 164 9 6 Combining bridging and routing in a network nnnennens 165 9 7 Connecting two networks through a tunnel rennnrms 166 9 8 Connecting VLAN enabled switches over a WAN umnnrnnenena 168 Telindus 1031 Router Table of contents ix User and reference manual Reference manual scciiiieccctesesesiccetevaiersactcdeeustnneccasarrersee nnen va vi mada 169 10 Configuration attributes rnannnnnnnannnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnna 171 10 1 Configuration attribute overWISW ccs becc2iacnresugss tai Sa kalal valgusaasta jaa 172 10 2 General configuration attributes enneneenesenannnnnnanentetannannnanenena
103. 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 58 56 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 5 User manual Basic configuration 5 2 1 Automatically obtaining an IP address Obtaining an IP address on the LAN interface The Telindus 1031 Router supports the BootP protocol to automatically obtain an IP address on its LAN interface Refer to 15 Auto installing the Telindus 1031 Router on page 341 for more information on auto install Obtaining an IP address on the WAN interface Currently the Telindus 1031 Router does not support any protocols to automatically obtain an IP address on its WAN interface However if you do not configure an IP address on the WAN interface then the IP address of the LAN interface is used In other words the LAN interface shares its IP address with the WAN interface This is called unnumbered mode q An IP address that was obtained using a dynamic procedure is not displayed in the configuration window but can be found in the status window Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 5 57 User manual Basic configuration 5 2 2 Where to find the IP related parameters Each interface has a structured configuration attribute named ip In this structure you can configure the IP related parameters for that interface The following table shows where you can find the ip structure for the different interfaces For the you can find the ip structure in LAN interface the laninterface object telindus1031 laninterface ip 4
104. 5 255 0 The Telindus 1031 Router uses this received IP address as its LAN IP address It is stored in the Telindus 1031 Router its volatile memory This means that after a cold boot the Telindus 1031 Router has to request the LAN IP address again 344 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 15 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1031 Router 15 3 Getting the configuration with TFTP Once the Telindus 1031 Router has obtained an IP address itis reachable over its LAN interface Now you can start a TMA ora Telnet session on the Telindus 1031 Router and configure it Alternatively the Telindus 1031 Router can retrieve its complete configuration without any user interven tion As long as the previously obtained IP addresses are not stored in non volatile memory the Telindus 1031 Router tries to get a complete configuration file from a TFTP server The configuration file and TFTP The Trivial File Transfer Protocol is typically used in combination with BootP to obtain the configuration of a device from a TFTP server The configuration file on this TFTP can be ina binary or an ASCII format How to build such files is explained in 15 4 Creating configuration files on page 347 Getting the configuration file with TFTP The Telindus 1031 Router asks for its configuration file as follows me pea The Telindus 1031 Router sends a DNS reguest on the interface for which it received an IP address This reguest is a local broadcast messag
105. 55 255 255 255 tify a range of addresses Example filter This example shows a filter that only forwards RIP updates coming from subnet 192 168 48 0 network mask gt 1 192 168 48 0 255 255 255 0 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 223 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 5 5 Traffic policy configuration attributes The trafficPolicy object is not present in the containment tree by default If you want to use traffic policy then add this object first Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 45 telindus1031 router trafficPolicy method Default trafficShaping Use this attribute to choose on traffic overload conditions how and which Range enumerated see below gueues are filled with the excess data The method attribute has the following values trafficShaping The data is redirected to the queues based on the settings of the attribute telindus1031 router trafficPolicy J rafficShaping Note that the traffic shaping can be used for more than gueuing alone It can also be used to setup an extended access list tosDiffServ The data is redirected to the queues based on DiffServ refer to RFC2597 regard ing class and drop precedence This means that depending on their Type Of Service TOS field some packets are moved to other queues and or dropped sooner than other packets in case the queue is full The highest 3 bits of the TOS field a
106. 7 configuration attributes 218 performance attributes 317 status attributes 281 LAN extension over a Frame Relay network a configura tion example 161 LAN extension over a PDH SDH network a configura tion example 160 LAN extension over an ATM network a configuration ex ample 162 LAN interface alarms 334 configuration attributes 178 performance attributes 302 specifications 363 status attributes 251 LCP what is 74 LED indicators 24 G703 data LED 26 G703 link LED 26 introduction 25 LAN collision LED 27 LAN LED 26 power LED 26 states 25 link monitoring basic configu ration 75 LMI basic configuration 84 what is 78 loader software downloading using TML 357 what is 354 loading the default configura tion using the action 68 using the DIP switch 69 loading the saved configuration 68 loop back configuration attributes 243 status attributes 293 major features of the device basic configuration of the 65 management configuration attributes 240 performance attributes 321 status attributes 293 management terminology in troducing 40 management tools connection possibilities 12 introducing 10 managing the device 33 with TMA 34 motherboard position of the DIP switches 30 multi protocol over ATM basic configuration 94 what is 88 Index 381 NAT basic configuration 124 introduction 117 what is 117 when use 118 why use 117 NAT address table how works the 125 NAT a
107. 7 15EMG complant sr Aere en e eie E ate ka Kahala 368 17 16 Environmental compliance n rnnrnnennnennnenneennennnenaeneannenenennenaannannnnnneat 369 ANNEX a e riae a a D 371 Annex A common TCP and UDP numbers eennnnnnanennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnanne 373 Annex B product information rnnnnsnnnnanannannnannnnnnnnnnnennnnananana aaa nnnaa 375 Telindus 1031 Router 1 User manual User manual 2 Telindus 1031 Router User manual Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 1 3 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1031 Router 1 Introducing the Telindus 1031 Router This chapter gives an introduction to the Telindus 1031 Router The following gives an overview of this chapter 1 1 What is the Telindus 1031 Router on page 4 e 1 2 Telindus 1031 Router applications on page 5 e 1 3 Telindus 1030 Router family overview on page 6 e 1 4 Management tools on page 10 1 5 Management tools connection possibilities on page 12 4 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 1 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1031 Router 1 1 What is the Telindus 1031 Router The Telindus 1030 Router series is a set of IP access routers designed for high speed WAN access They offer high performance IP routing and bridging The versions with 2Mbps E1 interfaces are extremely well suited to transport LAN traffic over a PDH or SDH backbone network These G703 interfaces 1 or 2 depending on the model can be used
108. 9 5 Configuring the bridging parameters on the interfaces Use the bridging structure to configure the bridging parameters per interface The location of this structure depends on the interface Location of the bridging attribute LAN telindus1031 lanInterface bridging WAN Frame Relay telindus1031 wanInterface frameRelay diciTable bridging WAN PPP telindus1031 g703 channel ppp bridging WAN ATM telindus1031 waninterface atm pvcTable bridging tunnel telindus1031 router tunnels I2tpTunnels bridging Refer to 8 9 6 Explaining the bridging structure on page 152 for a detailed explanation of the bridging structure 152 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 8 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 9 6 Explaining the bridging structure Because the bridging structure occurs in several objects it is described here once and referenced where necessary Refer to 8 9 5 Configuring the bridging parameters on the interfaces on page 151 for the location of the bridging structure l A This section lists all the elements that can be present in the bridging structure However depending on the interface it is possible that not all of these elements are present The bridging structure contains the following elements E e accessList Use this element set up an access list on the inter Default lt empty gt face Range 0 24 characters Do this by entering the index name of the access list you want to use Y
109. 999 5 CE A Telindus declara que o Telindus 1031 Router cumpre os principais requisitos e outras disposi es da Directiva 1999 5 EC Col presente Telindus dichiara che questo Telindus 1031 Router in acquiescenza coi requisiti essen ziali e stipulazioni attinenti ed altre di Direttivo 1999 5 EC ME To napov n Telindus SHAMVEL OTL AVTO TO Telindus 1031 Router eivor OLVUUOPOOLUEVO ue til BorotxeC anoutnoerl kor ue TLS VnokomeC OxEeTIKEl StataEerl t o nyLaT 1999 5 EC iv Telindus 1031 Router Preface User and reference manual Organisation of this manual This manual contains the following main parts This part User manual shows you how to install and connect the Telindus 1031 Router It also gives a basic configuration of the Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual gives more detailed information on the Telindus 1031 Router It contains a com plete description of all the configuration status performance and alarm param eters for look up purposes gives additional information Refer to the Table of contents on page vii for a detailed overview of this manual Application software version This manual describes the features containment tree and attributes of the Telindus 1031 Router appli cation software version T2802 00200 Audience This manual is intended for computer literate people who have a working knowledge of computing and networking principles Your feedback Your satisfaction about th
110. A V 35 V 36 or X 21 interface by setting the correct straps and using the correct con version cables management concentrator capabilities These are limited because only the CTRL and AUX connec tors can be used to connect to other Telindus devices 10 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 1 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1031 Router 1 4 Management tools The Telindus 1031 Router is manageable in many different ways This section gives a quick overview of the various management tools Management Description and reference tool TMA TMA Telindus Management Application is a free Windows software package that enables you to manage the Telindus products completely l e to access their con figuration attributes and look at status performance and alarm information Refer to 4 Managing the Telindus 1031 Router on page 33 and the TMA manual for more information TMA for HP OpenView TMA for HP OpenView is the management application that runs on the widely spread network management platform HP OpenView It offers the combination of the easy to use graphical interface of the stand alone version of TMA together with the advantages and features of HP OpenView Refer to the TMA for HP OpenView manual for more information TMA CLI TMA CLI TMA Command Line Interface enables you to use its commands in scripts in order to automate management actions This is particularly useful in large networks TMA CLI is a comple
111. C down What are OAM F5 loop back cells The ATM protocol features OAM F5 loop back cells These are used to verify whether a PVC is truly up or down Refer to the operation element in the attribute telindus1031 g703 J channelf atm pvcTable atm oamF5Loopback 198 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes ra telindus1031 g703 channel J atm atmConfig Default Use this attribute to configure the general ATM parameters Range structure see below The atmConfig structure contains the following elements idleCellFormat scrambling Description Use this element to set the format of the ATM idle Defaultitu cells These cells are transmitted when no data is Range enumerated see below transmitted over the line l e the line is idle The idleCellFormat element has the following values itu Sets the cells according to the ITU T format In this case they are effectively called idle cells atmForum Sets the cells according to the ATM forum format In this case they are actually called unassigned cells Some devices use the ITU T format others the ATM forum format Should the per formance attribute telindus1031 g703 channel Jatm unknownCelis increase rapidly then try selecting a different format However the default value suffices in most cases Use this element to enable or disable scrambling Default enabled Scrambling
112. Configuration attributes k telindus1031 router defaultNat servicesAvailable Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to define specific port number ranges for incoming Internet 3 traffic that should not be translated Instead it is sent to the corresponding private IP address The servicesAvailable table makes it possible to have a server on the local network that can be accessed from the Internet although it has no official IP address The servicesAvailable table contains the following elements aS 12 TAISI protocol Use this element to select the protocol tcp or udp Default tcp Range tcp udp startPort Use this element to set the lowest value of the TCP or Default 0 UDP port range Range 0 65535 endPort Use this element to set the highest value of the TCP Default lt opt gt or UDP port range Range 0 65535 If no endPort value is defined lt opt gt then the port range is limited to the startPort value only serverAddress Use this element to set the private server address Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 If a packet is received with a source port number that falls within the specified port range then it is sent to the private server address ra telindus1031 router defaultNat addresses Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to enter all the official IP addresses that have
113. Control Connection A control connection operates in band over a tunnel to control the establish ment release and maintenance of sessions and of the tunnel itself Control Messages Control messages are exchanged between LAC and LNS pairs operating in band within the tunnel protocol Control messages govern aspects of the tunnel and sessions within the tunnel Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 129 User manual Configuring the router 7 5 2 How does L2TP work Suppose a packet coming from the LAN has a destination address for a network that is accessible through a tunnel The following happens DIDI The packet goes aaa ka routing decision process If IP from LAN the result of this decision is a route which uses the tunnel interface then the packet is encapsulated in PPP first then L2TP UDP and finally IP outer IP Then the packet goes through the routing decision process again This time using the outer IP header The packet is routed over the Internet using the outer IP header The packet is received in the tunnel s end point where it is then routed again using the original IP header 7 5 3 Configuring L2TP Use the 2tpTunnels attribute to set up and configure an L2TP tunnel Refer to telindus1031 router tunnels I2tpTunnels on page 218 130 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 6 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the router This section introduc
114. Crocus modem using a straight male male DB9 cable In this way the Telindus 1031 Router can manage the Crocus modem Refer to the Telindus 1030 Router Orchid function manual for more information on managing Telindus devices the G703 connector is connected to the G703 interface of a Crocus modem In this way the Telindus 1031 Router is connected to the WAN You can for example connect the Telindus 1031 Router to a Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 2 23 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1031 Router remote network over a leased line Refer to 1 2 Telindus 1031 Router applications on page 5 for some typical applications 24 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1031 Router 2 6 The front panel LED indicators This section gives an overview of the front panel LEDs and what they indicate The following gives an overview of this section 2 6 1 Introducing the front panel LEDs on page 25 2 6 2 The power LED PWR on page 26 2 6 3 The G703 link LED G703 LNK on page 26 2 6 4 The G703 data LED G703 ACT on page 26 2 6 5 The LAN LED LAN ACT on page 26 2 6 6 The LAN collision LED LAN COL on page 27 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 2 25 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1031 Router 2 6 1 Introducing the front panel LEDs When all the connections are made and the Telindus 1031 Router is powered the LEDs on the front panel reflect the actual s
115. DA VLL RS530 RS232 a 8 5 STS 1 5 CA V41 RS530 va 8 s E FI STS 195 CA V11 RS538 V18 RS232 cae 8 ST 108 CD vil RS530 V12 RS232 a c23 7022 LD3 STB 108 CD vit RS538 V10 6723 ACT B 2 g aes 15 2 3 PRL E 8 cat STS 104 8B V11 RS530 V1 RS232 i 1 7 7 ST1 114 08 V11 RS538 V1 RS232 F o E c LD4 ST11 115 00 Vi1 RSS3a V1 RS232 PRC 12223 37 6703 L2 B sti2 106 CB Vii RS530 ViA RS232 ESC 2V5 C36 m UP el c39 GE U ENTER ver 8 1011 1C13 ps1 1999 ED GN RIGHT AGEE LDS DOWN 1 SFiS ERIE RS53 ACT LEFT i T RNL RN2 a Ha ug IC16 1C17 C I LDG RS532 L2 F I ma C43 E Ic21 S u cyst GND RN3 RNY ORNS RNS TEE T 30 C LAN ACT g 9 E E a A LI Le H c g p N LD8 LAN COL 1622 1023 qcay 1025 1C33 ICH i eae GND 1Pa TPS a u u GND c67 23 css ar 8 enuzuovnosEKD EUSO 14 H H al a RNB mi C113 CIN C115 1047 RNS cst C122 JEE a C121 RNLD 1 ba C134 m c128 A DEBUG HARD RI A BE c139 LA LSL ESD Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 3 31 User manual DIP switches of the Telindus 1031 Router 3 2 DIP switches of the Telindus 1031 Router The following table gives an overview of the DIP switches on DIP switch bank DS2 DAR DIP switch name DS2 no Setting Function loader mode Normal operation
116. DTE device connection point in the Frame Relay WAN Two different connections can be assigned the same value within the same Frame Relay WAN one on each side of the virtual connection What is LMI A set of Frame Relay enhancements exists called the Local Management Interface LMI The LMI enhancements offer a number of features referred to as extensions for managing complex networks including global addressing e virtual circuit status messages e multicasting What is CIR The Committed Information Rate CIR is the specified amount of guaranteed bandwidth measured in bits per second on a Frame Relay service Typically when purchasing a Frame Relay service the cus tomer can specify the CIR level he wishes The Frame Relay network provider guarantees that traffic not exceeding this level will be delivered What is EIR The Excess Information Rate EIR is the specified amount of unguaranteed bandwidth measured in bits per second on a Frame Relay service It is the traffic in excess of the CIR This traffic may also be delivered but this is not guaranteed Obviously the maximum possible EIR is the physical speed of the customer s access circuit into the Frame Relay service provider Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 6 79 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols What is the Discard Eligible bit When the CIR is exceeded all subsequent frames get marked Discard Eligible by setting the DE bit in the Fram
117. Ethernet LAN interface connector transmit positive transmit negative receive positive 11111111 Te gi 8 not used not used receive negative not used not used 364 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 17 Reference manual Technical specifications 17 3 Control connector specifications The control connector sometimes also called NMS port is a 9 pins subD connector labelled CTRL The signals on these connector are V 24 V 28 signals The control connector has the following pin layout not used Receive Data Transmit Data not used GND not used not used not used 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 not used Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 17 365 Reference manual Technical specifications 17 4 Auxiliary connector specifications The auxiliary connector is a 9 pins subD connector labelled AUX The signals on these connector are V 24 V 28 signals The control connector has the following pin layout Data Carrier Detect Receive Data Transmit Data Data Terminal Ready signal ground Data Set Ready Request To Send Clear To Send 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Ring Indicator 366 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 17 Reference manual Technical specifications 17 5 ATM encapsulation specifications e ATM cell format ITU T 1 361 e ATM forum UNI 3 1 4 0 PVCs e ATM forum ILMI 3
118. GMP Default disabled protocol Range enumerated see below The igmp element has the following values disabled Multicasts are not forwarded on this interface proxy This is an upstream interface It always serves as a cli ent for the upstream router Multicasts are always forwarded on this interface router This is a downstream interface It serves as an IGMP querier or non querier depending on the IP address Multicasts are forwarded on this interface if they are present in the upstream interface multicast member list Refer to What is IGMP and IGMP topology on page 277 for more information on IGMP helperAddresses Use this element to enable broadcast forwarding Default lt empty gt Limited IP broadcasts address 255 255 255 255 Range table see below and sub network broadcasts for a directly connected network are normally not forwarded by the Telindus 1031 Router However client server applications often use these broadcasts during start up to discover the server on the network If the server is on a remote LAN then the detection may fail Therefore if you configure a helper IP address the received broadcasts address is replaced by this helper IP address and the packets are re routed using the des tination address Multiple helper IP addresses can be configured The Telindus 1031 Router only substitutes addresses for the protocols which are selected in the helperProtocols a
119. IGMP 2 IPinIP 4 TCP 6 EGP 8 IGP 9 UDP 17 RSVP 46 IGRP 88 OSPFIGP 89 TCPestablished 255 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 225 Reference manual Configuration attributes Fa TEINI sourcePortStart Use these elements to set the source port as specified Default any start optional end in the UDP TCP headers Range 0 65535 sourcePortEnd Packets that fall within the specified range are forwarded and queued if applicable You can specify the port by typing the protocol number For ease of use some common port numbers can be selected from a drop down box any or optional 0 echo 7 discard 9 ftp data 20 ftp 21 telnet 23 smtp 25 domain 53 www http 80 pop3 110 nntp 119 snmp 161 snmptrap 162 239 50 210 syslog 514 router 520 socks 1080 I2tp 1701 telindus 1728 destinationPortStart Use these elements to set the destination port as Default any start optional end specified in the UDP TCP headers Range 0 65535 destinationPortEnd Packets that fall within the specified range are forwarded and queued if applicable You can specify the port by typing the protocol number For ease of use some common port numbers can be selected from a drop down box see above newTosValue Use this element to set the new TOS field value Default unchanged Range 0 256 that matches an entry in the trafficShaping table
120. Index 383 traffic policy configuration attributes 223 configuring an extended ac cess list 138 configuring on the bridge 156 configuring on the router 134 how to configure on the bridge 155 how to configure on the router 133 what is 131 Transparent Spanning Tree bridge what is 141 U unpacking 15 using PAT over PPP with a minimum of official IP ad dresses a configuration ex ample 164 V value what is 42 VCI what is 87 VPI what is 87 W WAN encapsulation basic configuration 71 WAN interface configuration attributes 181 performance attributes 305 status attributes 257 warning EMC 17 ESD 17 important safety instruc tions 14 safety 14 selecting a site 16 384 Telindus 1031 Router Index Annex
121. Length1 100 maxLength2 200 and maxLength3 50 In this case the following applies Queue 1 contains data An incoming data packet with is packets drop level 1 drop level 2 drop level 3 less than 50 accepted accepted accepted more than 50 less than 100 accepted accepted dropped more than 100 less than 200 dropped accepted dropped more than 200 dropped dropped dropped 1 As defined in the TOS field kal telindus1031 router trafficPolicy tos2QueueMapping Default lt empty gt Range table see below In case you have set the telindus1031 router trafficPolicy method attribute to tosMapped then use the tos2QueueMapping table to specify which data has to be redirected to which queue The tos2QueueMapping table contains the following elements Fe TT a Use these elements to set the Type Of Service field Default 0 start 255 end value Range 0 255 Packets that have a Type Of Service field value within the specified range are redi rected to the targetQueue targetQueue Use this element to set the destination queue Default Oueue1 The targetQueue element has the following values Range enumerated see below Queue1 Queue2 Queue3 Queue4 Queued lowDelayQueue 228 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 5 6 Priority policy configuration attributes The priorityPolicy object is
122. MAC address The MAC address IP address pairs are kept in a table called the ARP cache Refer to telindus1031 laninterface arpCache on page 253 for an example of such a table How does the ARP cache work Before the Telindus 1031 Router sends an IP packet on the LAN interface it has to know the MAC address of the destination device If the address is not present in the ARP cache table yet the Telindus 1031 Router sends an ARP request on the Ethernet to learn the MAC address and associated IP address of the destination device This address pair is then written in the ARP cache Once the address pair is present the Telindus 1031 Router can reference to this pair if it has to send an IP packet to the same device later on The ARP cache time out Summarised all the MAC address IP address pairs from ARP requests and replies received on the LAN interface are kept in the ARP cache However if devices on the network are reconfigured then this MAC address IP address relation may change Therefore the ARP cache entries are automatically removed from the cache after a fixed time out This time out period can be set with the timeOut element 180 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 a EI EI Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1031 laninterface mode Default bridging Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to determine whether the packets are treated by the rout ing process the bridging process or both
123. MZ host then initiates sessions for these requests on the public network However the DMZ host is not able to initiate a session back into the private network It can only forward packets that have already been requested Users of the public network outside the company can access only the DMZ host The DMZ may typically also have the company s Web pages so these could be served to the outside world However the DMZ provides access to no other company data In the event that an outside user penetrated the DMZ host s security the Web pages might be corrupted but no other company information would be exposed 218 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 5 3 L2TP tunnel configuration attributes ra telindus1031 router tunnels I2tpTunnels Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to configure the Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol tunnels you want to set up The I2tpTunnels table contains the following elements ES pee o Use this element to assign an administrative name to Default lt empty gt the tunnel Range 0 24 characters adminStatus Use this element to activate up or deactivate the tun Pefault down nel down Range up down mode Use this element to determine whether for the corre Default routing sponding tunnel IP packets are treated by the routing Range enumerated see below process the bridging process or both
124. P route added MP rerouted incorrect route not added no name local for an interface routed added no name not local for an interface rerouted to gateway Exception e GW none 0 0 0 0 route not added e GW lies in configured net route not added work route 1 In the routingTable status the configured gateway will appear but for the routing itself the gate way is ignored Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 103 Configuring the router User manual 7 2 3 Configuring static routes examples This section presents the following examples Example of a default route on page 103 Example 1 Static IP route with an IP address on the WAN interface on page 104 Example 2 Static IP route without an IP address on the WAN interface on page 105 Example of a default route office ISP A Internet va IP address WAN interface 192 168 100 3 In this example an office is connected via a modem link over a network of an operator to an Internet Service Provider ISP The Telindus 1031 Router in the office does not need any static routes All traffic is sent to the ISP Hence the Telindus 1031 Router its default route is towards the Internet Router modem IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 defaultRoute gateway interface preference metric gt 192 168 100 3 wan 10 2 Chapter 7 104 Telindus 1031 Router User manual Configuring the router
125. Router The following table shows when a TCP session opens Session count Purpose 1 session When connecting with Telnet 1 session When connecting with the Web Interface Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 323 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 7 Operating system performance attributes telindus1031 operatingSystem currUsedProcPower This attribute displays the amount of processing power used during the last 650 milliseconds expressed as a percentage of the total available processing power telindus1031 operatingSystem usedProcPower This attribute lists the used processing power for the 11 most recent 30 seconds intervals The process ing power is expressed as a percentage of the total processing power The usedProcPower table contains the following elements een 2002 Sa sysUpTime This is the elapsed time since the last cold boot The next values are for the 30 seconds period before this relative time stamp This is the minimum percentage of processing power in use during the last 30 sec onds average This is the average percentage of processing power in use during the last 30 sec onds This is the maximum percentage of processing power in use during the last 30 sec onds telindus1031 operatingSystem freeDataBuffers The processor uses buffers for storing the packets during processing and or queuing Each buffer has a 256 byte size headers included This attribute is the numb
126. RxPackets This is the number of correct received answers on the transmitted pings minReplyTime This is the lowest reply time of all correct received answers maxReplyTime This is the highest reply time of all correct received answers avrgReplyTime This is the average reply time of all correct received answers WS telindus1031 router startPing Execute this actions to start transmitting pings to an IP address Several arguments can be set ipAddress This is the IP address you want to ping Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 iterations This is the number of pings Default 5 Range 0 If you enter 0 the IP address will be pinged an indefi nite number of times The only way to stop the ping session is by executing the stopPing action interval This is the interval in seconds between consecutive Default pings Range 0 100 dataLength This is the length of the data transmitted in a ping Default 31 Range 0 1300 timeOut If a ping is sent the system will wait for a certain Default 00000d 00h 00m 05s period on the answer l e the system expects the Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s answer within this period Use the timeOut argument to 24855d 03h 14m 07s set this period WS telindus1031 router stopPing Stops the pending pings Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 315 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 4 2 Default NAT performance attr
127. Start up in loader mode load default Normal operation configuration Load default configuration A Refer to 3 3 Opening and closing the housing on page 32 to find out how to open the housing in order to change the DIP switch settings 32 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 3 User manual DIP switches of the Telindus 1031 Router 3 3 Opening and closing the housing When you want to change the DIP switch settings you have to open and close the housing of the Telin dus 1031 Router This section explains how to do so Opening the housing To open the housing of the Telindus 1031 Router proceed as follows w po ooo S Disconnect the external power supply Unscrew the two screws located at the back of the housing Remove the cover as follows 1 Carefully lift the back of the cover a few centimetres Gently pull the cover backwards from witii under the nose of the housing A Closing the housing To close the housing of the Telindus 1031 Router proceed as follows Replace the cover as follows 1 Gently push the cover under the nose of the housing 2 Lower the back of the cover witii 3 Push on the back of the cover click i E ing cover and bottom together Fasten the two screws located at the back of the housing Reconnect the external power supply Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 4 33 User manual Managing the Telindus 1031 Router 4 Managing the Telindus 1031
128. Status Updates sent to the network netPollNotRcvd This is the number of times the expectedPolllnterval expired without an incoming sta tus enguiry userNoResponse This is the number of times a response was not received Revd userBadResponses This is the number of times an invalid response was received Revd Ta telindus1031 g703 channel frameRelay cllmInFrames This attribute displays the total number of received CLLM Consolidated Link Layer Management frames Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 311 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 3 4 ATM performance attributes ra telindus1031 g703 channel J atm pvcTable This attribute lists the complete performance information of all known PVCs The pvcTable table contains the following elements Ea 1 1 III name This is the name ofthe PVC as you configured it mibCounters This displays the SNMP MIB2 parameters ofthe PVC These are the same as the SNMP MIB2 parameters on the LAN interface Refer to 12 2 LAN interface performance attributes on page 302 priority ALengths In case an overload condition occurs and priority gueuing is activated then this elements displays how many packets the different gueues contain atm This displays the specific ATM related performance information of the PVC The atm structure contains the following elements ETS pe O This displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI of the PVC This displa
129. TEL NDUS Telindus 1031 Router Telindus 1031 Router User and reference manual Version 1 1 181341 Telindus Technical Publications Geldenaaksebaan 335 B 3001 Leuven Belgium Tel 32 16 382011 ii Telindus 1031 Router Copyright safety and statements User and reference manual Document properties Subject Telindus 1031 Router Manual type User and reference manual Version 1 1 Code 181341 Modification date 21 October 2002 Telindus Copyright notice The information and descriptions contained in this publication are the property of Telindus Such infor mation and descriptions must not be copied or reproduced by any means or disseminated or distributed without the express prior written permission of Telindus This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors for which Telindus never can or shall be held liable Changes are made periodically to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in new editions of this publication Telindus may make improvements and or changes in the product s described in this publication at any time without prior notice Safety requirements Carefully read the safety instructions at the beginning of 2 Installing and connecting the Telindus 1031 Router on page 13 The connectors of the Telindus 1031 Router should only be connected to the following circuit types Connector label Connector type Circuit type LAN connec
130. Telindus 1031 Router User manual Chapter 5 Basic configuration 5 4 3 Entering passwords in the different management tools Now that you created a list of password s in the Telindus 1031 Router you have to enter these pass words every time you want to access the Telindus 1031 Router with one of the management tools The following table explains how to enter passwords in the different management tools Management tool How to enter the password TMA Enter the password in the Connect window TMA CLI and TMA for HP OpenView Use the application TmaUserConf exe to create a TMA user and assign a password to this user The password should correspond with a password configured in the device Refer to the manual of TMA CLI or TMA for HP OpenView for more informa tion CLI You are prompted to enter the password when the session starts ATWIN You are prompted to enter the password when the CLI session starts Then you can start an ATWIN session Web Interface You are prompted to enter the password when the session starts SNMP Define the password as community string If no passwords are defined then you can use any string as community string TML Enter the password after the destination file name Separate password and file name by a 2 Example tml fsourcefile destinationfile pwd Enter the password after the destination file name Separate password and file name by a
131. Unit i e the maximum number of bytes that one packet can contain on this interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1031 management loopback ipAddress This attribute displays the IP address of the loop back interface as you configured it 294 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes 11 8 File system status attributes Ta telindus1031 fileSystem fileList Part of the flash memory of the Telindus 1031 Router is organised as a file system and a number of files are stored in it The fileList attribute shows all the files that are present on the file system Usually the following files are present e The configuration file of the Telindus 1031 Router file config1 db Up to two application software files of the Telindus 1031 Router files CONTROL1 and CONTROL 2 The fileList table contains the following elements een TT l This is the file name Maximum length of the file name is 24 characters All char acters are allowed including spaces The file name is case sensitive This is the length of the file in bytes ra telindus1031 fileSystem freeSpace This attribute displays the number of free bytes on the file system ra telindus1031 fileSystem status This attribute displays the status of the file system Possible values are ready Normal situation formatting The file system is being formatted This can be triggered when the file system is found to be corrup
132. a messages is enabled dataChannelSequen ceNumbering on then this displays the transmit data sequence numbers receivingSeqNum In case sequence numbering on the data messages is enabled dataChannelSequen goeq q g g q ceNumbering on then this displays the receive data sequence numbers I2tpType This displays which L2TP server type the Telindus 1031 Router currently is LAC or LNS If you set the configuration attribute I2tpMode to auto then the status attribute I2tpType displays the auto value until the Telindus 1031 Routers have mutually decided who will be the LAC and who the LNS controlState This displays the states associated with the LNS or LAC control connection estab lishment Refer to L2TP status control states on page 283 for more information callState This displays the states associated with the LNS or LAC incoming or outgoing calls Refer to L2TP status call states on page 284 for more information deliveryState This displays the states associated with the LNS or LAC packet delivery Refer to L2TP status delivery states on page 285 for more information authenState This displays the states associated with the LNS or LAC authentication Refer to L2TP status authentication states on page 286 for more information Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 283 Reference manual Status attributes L2TP status control states The states associated with the LNS or LAC for control connection establ
133. a range is received PAT replaces only the source IP address provided it is the first device using this port number When other devices using the same application hence the same port number try to send traffic to the same Internet destination address PAT discards this traffic It is also possible to define port ranges that PAT should always discard The port translation range PAT uses goes from 60928 up to 65535 The portTranslations table contains the following elements Fe A ic protocol Use this element to select the protocol tcp or udp Default tcp Range tcp udp startPort Use this element to set the lowest value of the TCP or Default 0 UDP port range Range 0 65535 endPort Use this element to set the highest value of the TCP Defauit lt opt gt or UDP port range Range 0 65535 If no endPort value is defined lt opt gt then the port range is limited to the startPort value only action Use this element to set the action in case a packet is Default noTranslation received with a source port number that falls within Range enumerated see below the specified port range The action element has the following values noTranslation The port numbers that fall within the specified port range are not translated deny Packets with port numbers that fall within the specified port range are discarded 216 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual
134. allows you to set up virtual PPP connections In other words an L2TP tunnel simulates an additional PPP interface which directly connects two routers with each other Concrete using the Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol you can connect several private and physically dis persed local networks with each other over public lines such as the Internet in order to create one big virtual local network This without the need for address translation Example In the following example network A is virtually connected to network B through a tunnel in the public network network A network B uses private uses private addresses addresses LAC L2TP Access L2TP Network Concentrator Server L2TP terminology The following table gives some specific L2TP terminology L2TP Access Con Anode that acts as one side of an L2TP tunnel It is a peer to the L2TP Network centrator LAC Server LNS Packets sent from the LAC to the LNS require tunnelling with the L2TP protocol L2TP Network A node that acts as one side of an L2TP tunnel It is a peer to the L2TP Access Server LNS Concentrator LAC The LNS is the logical termination point of a PPP session that is being tunnelled from the remote system by the LAC Tunnel A tunnel exists between a LAC LNS pair The tunnel consists of a Control Con nection and zero or more L2TP sessions The tunnel carries encapsulated PPP datagrams and Control Messages between the LAC and the LNS
135. alue in its header Each device that sends an IP packet sets this parameter at some fixed or predefined value When the packet enters a router the router decre ments the TTL value If a router finds a value 0 after decrementing the TTL it discards the packet This because a value 0 means the packet has passed too many routers Probably the packet is looping between a number of routers This mechanism avoids that routers with configuration errors bring down a complete network The ICMP message TTL exceeded If a router discards a packet because its TTL is exceeded it normally sends an ICMP TTL exceeded message to the originator of the packet With the sendTtlExceeded attribute you can define whether you want the Telindus 1031 Router to send such ICMP messages or not The sendTtlExceeded attribute has the following values enabled The Telindus 1031 Router sends ICMP TTL exceeded messages disabled The Telindus 1031 Router does not send ICMP TTL exceeded messages This also implies that the router is not recognised by the UNIX or Windows trace route feature 210 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes kal telindus1031 router sendPortUnreachable Default enabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to enable or disable the sending of ICMP Destination unreachable Port unreachable messages The ICMP message port unreachable The Telindus
136. ample the following parameters are visible Txxxx is the application software code for this device e xxxxx is the application software version e 01 01 00 is the application software release date e 12 00 is the application software release time ra telindus1031 flash2Version This attribute displays the code and version of the application software stored as CONTROL2 ra telindus1031 activeFlash This attribute displays which application software is currently active Possible values are The application software CONTROL1 is active The application software CONTROL2 is active ra telindus1031 flashVersions This attribute displays how many application software versions can be stored in the file system ra telindus1031 bootVersion This attribute displays the code version release date and time of the boot software currently used in the Telindus 1031 Router ra telindus1031 loaderVersion This attribute displays the code version release date and time of the loader software currently used in the Telindus 1031 Router 250 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 rj Reference manual Status attributes telindus1031 messages This attribute displays informative and error messages e g Reconfigured Cold Boot The messages table displays maximum 20 messages If you open a TMA session on the Telindus 1031 Router over IP i e not through the control port then the messages are also sent to the con
137. ant to apply this priority policy here then enter the index name as value for the priorityPolicy attribute Refer to e 7 6 5 Configuring a priority policy on page 135 for more information on priority policies 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 45 for more information on adding objects telindus1031 g703 channel maxFifoQLen Default lt empty gt Range 0 24 characters Use this attribute to set the maximum length number of packets of the First In First Out queue Refer to telindus1031 router priorityPolicy Jalgorithm on page 228 for more information on this queue telindus1031 g703 channel alarmMask telindus1031 g703 J channel alarmLevel Refer to e 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 329 for more information on the configuration attributes alarmMask and alarmLevel and on the alarms in general e 13 6 G703 channel alarms on page 336 for more information on the alarms of the g703 channel object Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 185 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 4 3 PPP configuration attributes ra telindus1031 g703 channel ppp ip Default lt empty gt Range structure see below Use this attribute to configure the IP related parameters of the PPP link Refer to 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 58 for a detailed description of the ip structure ra telindus1031 g703 channel ppp
138. apter 16 353 Reference manual Downloading software 16 Downloading software This chapter explains how to download loader software in the memory and application software to the file system of the Telindus 1031 Router It also shows how to download any other file to the file system of the Telindus 1031 Router But first it explains the difference between boot loader and application soft ware The following gives an overview of this chapter 16 1 What is boot loader and application software on page 354 16 2 Downloading application software using TMA on page 355 16 3 Downloading application software using TFTP on page 356 16 4 Downloading application or loader software using TML on page 357 16 5 Downloading application or loader software in loader mode on page 358 16 6 Downloading files to the file system on page 359 354 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 16 Reference manual Downloading software 16 1 What is boot loader and application software What is boot software The boot software takes care of the initial phase in the start up sequence of the Telindus 1031 Router It is located on the lowest software level What is loader software The boot software takes care of the second phase in the start up sequence of the Telindus 1031 Router It is located on the middle software level As opposed to boot mode you can force the Telindus 1031 Router to run in loader mode In this mode you can then download new loader or
139. at combines the benefits of circuit switching guar anteed capacity and constant transmission delay with those of packet switching flexibility and efficiency for intermittent traffic It provides scalable bandwidth Because of its asynchronous nature ATM is more efficient than synchronous technologies such as time division multiplexing TDM With TDM each user is assigned to a time slot and no other station can send in that time slot Ifa station has much data to send it can send only when its time slot comes up even if all other time slots are empty However if a station has nothing to transmit when its time slot comes up the time slot is sent empty and is wasted Because ATM is asynchronous time slots are available on demand with informa tion identifying the source of the transmission contained in the header of each ATM cell What is VPI and VCI ATM networks are fundamentally connection oriented which means that a virtual channel must be set up across the ATM network prior to any data transfer A virtual channel is roughly equivalent to a Per manent Virtual Circuit or PVC Two types of ATM connections exist e virtual paths which are identified by Virtual Path Identifiers VPIs e virtual channels which are identified by the combination of a VPI and a Virtual Channel Identifier VCI A virtual path is a bundle of virtual channels all of which are switched transparently across the ATM net work based on the common VPI
140. ate Configuration com mand As a result the configuration is immediately activated when downloaded with TFTP Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 15 349 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1031 Router 15 6 Creating an ASCII configuration file To create a configuration file in ASCII format you can use the CLI syntax as explained in the Mainte nance Tools manual However for the first time user it is easier to retrieve the configuration in the CLI format from the Telindus 1031 Router There are two possible ways to create a configuration file in ASCII cli format e 15 6 1 Creating an ASCII file using the TFTP get command on page 350 e 15 6 2 Creating an ASCII file using the CLI get command on page 351 l q Do not use the TMA export utility for creating an ASCII type configuration file not even when saving it as a TXT file The resulting format is not compatible with the CLI format 350 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 15 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1031 Router 15 6 1 Creating an ASCII file using the TFTP get command To create a configuration file in ASCII cli format using the TFTP get command proceed as follows KE pooo S Start a TFTP session on the Telindus 1031 Router For example by typing tftp 10 0 11 1 at the command prompt of your UNIX station where 10 0 11 1 is the LAN IP address of the Telindus 1031 Router Get the configuration file of the Telindus 1031 Router Exampl
141. ate this special state Refer to 16 1 What is boot loader and application software on page 354 for more information on boot mode 2 6 3 The G703 link LED G703 LNK This LED reflects the status of the link on the G703 interface continuously off Loss Of Synchronisation LOS Loss of Frame Alignment LFA or Alarm Indica tion Signal AIS also called all ones is received on the interface LFA and AIS is only relevant in case of G 704 framing continuously on Layer 1 G 704 framing is up 2 6 4 The G703 data LED G703 ACT This LED reflects the status of the user data on the G703 interface continuously off Layer 2 is down monitoring Layer 2 is up and user data is present both transmit and receive data continuously on Layer 2 is up but no user data is present 1 If the G703 interface has multiple logical interfaces channelised E1 it indicates only the status for the first logical interface on this physical interface 2 6 5 The LAN LED LAN ACT This LED reflects the status of the link and monitors the user data on the LAN interface continuously off Nothing is connected to the LAN interface monitoring The Ethernet link is up and there is network activity on the LAN continuously on The Ethernet link is up but there is no network activity on the LAN Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 2 27 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1031 Router
142. ation BPDUs Time indicating a topology change after it detected this topology change The topologyChangeTime element value is equal to the sum of the root bridge its bridgeMaxAge element value and bridgeForwardDelay element value Refer to telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup spanningTree on page 234 for more information on the latter two elements 292 Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual Chapter 11 Status attributes WS telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup clearArpCache If you execute this action the ARP cache table is cleared NS telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup clearBridgeCache If you execute this action the bridge cache table is cleared a m Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 293 Reference manual Status attributes 11 7 Management status attributes telindus1031 management cms2Address This attribute displays the absolute device address as you configured it Loop back status attributes telindus1031 management loopback ifDescr This attribute displays the interface description This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1031 management loopback ifType This attribute displays the interface type This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1031 management loopback ifOperStatus This attribute displays the current operational status of the loop back interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1031 management loopback ifMtu This attribute displays the interface its Maximum Transfer
143. ation file formats used by TFTP are File type Extension How to create the configuration file Use the TMA export utility and choose the CMS file type This is the most compact format Refer to 15 5 Creating a binary configuration file on page 348 Use the CLI user interface Refer to 15 6 Creating an ASCII configuration file on page 349 When you download an ASCII cli configuration file to the Telindus 1031 Router make sure that each line in this file con tains no more than 500 characters 348 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 15 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1031 Router 15 5 Creating a binary configuration file To create a configuration file in binary cms format proceed as follows w poo ooo Start a TMA session on the Telindus 1031 Router Make changes to its configuration if necessary in order to obtain the desired configura tion You do not have to send these configuration changes to the Telindus 1031 Router Click on the Export data to file button cy In the Export configuration parameters window select the following Choose a directory where to save the file Enter a name for the file e Make sure the file type is CMS e Make sure the Full configuration option is selected Click on the Save button The edited configuration of the Telindus 1031 Router is stored on the PC in binary format The file contains the complete configuration including the Activ
144. ations on page 367 e 17 10 Routing and bridging performance specifications on page 367 17 11 Power requirements on page 368 17 12 Dimensions on page 368 e 17 13 Safety compliance on page 368 17 14 Over voltage and over current protection compliance on page 368 17 15 EMC compliance on page 368 17 16 Environmental compliance on page 369 362 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 17 Reference manual Technical specifications 17 1 G703 interface specifications e Connector RJ45 Compliance ITU T G 703 e Coding AMI or HDB3 configurable Speed 2 Mbps e Framing framed or unframed configurable framing compliant to G 704 Time slots N x 64 kbps N 1 32 e CRC4 insertion enabled disabled or automatic detection configurable e Performance monitoring compliant to G 826 e Jitter and wander compliant to G 823 The following table shows the connector layout of the RJ45 G703 interface connector Figure receive A receive B MN 1 8 shielding ground transmit A transmit B shielding ground not connected not connected Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 17 363 Reference manual Technical specifications 17 2 LAN interface specifications Applicable standards IEEE 802 3 10Mbps Ethernet IEEE 802 3u 100Mbps Ethernet e 10 100Mbps auto sense e Connector RJ45 Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP The following table shows the connector layout of the RJ45
145. ault 100 Range 1 3000 e trafficShaping or tosMapped then only this drop level is relevant tosDiffServ then this drop level corresponds with the drop level bits value 00 and 01 maxLength2 This is the maximum length drop level 2 In case you set the attribute telindus1031 router trafficPol icy method to Default 100 Range 1 3000 e trafficShaping or tosMapped then this drop level is not relevant tosDiffServ then this drop level corresponds with the drop level bits value 10 maxLength3 This is the maximum length drop level 3 In case you set the attribute telindus1031 router trafficPol icy method to Default 100 Range 1 3000 trafficShaping or tosMapped then this drop level is not relevant tosDiffServ then this drop level corresponds with the drop level bits value 11 Examples Suppose e telindus1031 router trafficPolicy method is set to trafficShaping or tosMapped e for queue 1 you set maxLength1 1000 for queue 2 to 500 for queue 3 to 3000 for queue 4 to 1000 and for queue 5 to 200 In this case packets are dropped when the amount of packets in the queue exceeds the amount as specified with the maxLength1 element Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 227 Reference manual Configuration attributes Suppose e telindus1031 router trafficPolicy method is set to tosDiffServ e for queue 1 you set max
146. automatically to the new topology This means that Bridge B stops loop ing by blocking the path to segment 3 segment 3 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 8 147 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 8 The Spanning Tree priority and cost Consider the following Spanning Tree Topology E DP RP DP RP E RP Root Port DP Designated Port What is bridge priority In the example above Bridge A is selected as the root bridge This because the bridge priority of all the bridges is set to the default value 32768 and Bridge A has the lowest MAC address However due to traffic patterns or link types Bridge A might not be the ideal root bridge By increasing the bridge priority lowering the numerical priority value of the ideal bridge so that it becomes the root bridge you force a Spanning Tree recalculation to form a new spanning tree topology with the ideal bridge as the root What is port priority and path cost When the spanning tree topology is calculated based on default parameters the path between source and destination stations in a bridged network might not be ideal The goal is to make the fastest link the root port For example assume on Bridge B that port 1 currently the root port is an unshielded twisted pair link e port 2 is a fibre optic link Network traffic might be more efficient over the high speed fibre optic link By changing the spanning tree port priority or path cost for port
147. be sent without first build ing a session Examples of such applications are SNMP and TFTP Although TFTP is ses sion oriented it builds the session at a higher level and uses UDP for its simplicity as transport protocol The UDP header contains a port field indi cating the higher layer protocol Action The Source Port Number is replaced by a specific port number All traffic from this source IP address port number pair is assigned this specific port number If there is no traffic for 5 to 10 minutes the specific port number is freed Description This is a connection less protocol user data can be sent without first build ing a session An example of such an application is ping These protocols do not have port numbers Action Each ICMP packet is forwarded towards the Internet Each ICMP packet is considered as a new session If there is no traffic for 5 to 10 minutes the session is closed The fact that itis possible to open a total of 2048 simultaneous sessions and that each ICMP packet is considered as a new session implies that for instance a continuous series of ping reguests at a rate of one per second will allocate between 300 and 600 sessions Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 121 User manual Configuring the router Incoming traffic from the Internet Suppose the WAN IP network depicted in 7 4 3 Configuring PAT on page 119 works in numbered mode The incoming traffic from the Intern
148. bject somewhere else in the containment tree Adding an object in TMA Action vaga Retrieve F5 Right click on the parent object e g router oC Feoad A pop up menu appears aoe Add module x In the pop up menu select Add Child and select the nS child object you want to add e g routingFilter x a a ith name my filte gt A pop up W indow a ppears The syntax description for the index can be found on the statusbar In the pop up window type the instance value i e the index name for the child object e g my_filter and click on OK OK Cancel aN The new child object is created e g routingFil ter my filter Adding an object in TMA CLI Enter the parent object e g select router Type the following command set select childobjectName instanceValue where instanceValue is a string of your choice e g set select routingFilter my filter gt The new child object is created Adding an object in ATWIN KESK Enter the parent object e g go to the router object and press the enter key The ATWIN window shows the sub objects and attributes of the parent object Go to the line displaying the string lt CREATE INSTANCE gt and the name of the object you want to add e g routingFilter lt CREATE INSTANCE gt and press the enter key gt A new window appears displaying the string Give the instanceValue Press the e
149. bute of the top object telindus1031 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 13 331 Reference manual Alarm attributes 13 2 2 General alarm attributes ra telindus1031 totalAlarmLevel This attribute is only present in the top object of the containment tree of the Telindus 1031 Router being telindus1031 It displays the priority level of an unmasked active alarm When several alarms are generated at the same time the highest priority level is shown If the alarm levels are set in a structured manner one look at the totalAlarmLevel attribute enables the operator to make a quick estimation of the problem The value of the totalAlarmLevel attribute is also communicated to the central management system e g HP OpenView where it determines the colour of the icon This colour is an indication of the severity of the alarm ra telindus1031 alarmInfo This attribute contains the actual alarm information of the corresponding object The alarminfo structure contains the following elements Element This element displays for the corresponding object discriminator the total alarm count since the last cold boot currentAlarms the current alarms previousAlarms the second most recent alarms alarmMask the alarmMask as you configured it alarmLevel the alarmLevel as you configured it 332 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 13 Reference manual Alarm attributes 13 3 General alarms Refer to 13 2 Introducing t
150. bute to enter official IP address that has to be used for Port Address Transla tion Refer to telindus1031 router defaultNat patAddress on page 215 e Use the gateway attribute to define the gateway addresses from routes on which NAT or PAT should be applied Refer to telindus1031 router defaultNat gateway on page 216 Example of a network topology for Internet connection Consider the following network topology A Telindus 1031 Router is installed at your site The Internet Service Provider has an IP router with a high speed Frame Relay interface or one or more G 704 framed E1 interfaces running PPP You received only one single official IP address from you ISP being 195 7 12 22 IP address WAN interface IP address WAN interface 195 7 12 22 195 7 12 254 Frame Relay or PDH SDH network i ISP A Internet MIA Router modem IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 Set IP address 195 7 12 22 to be the PAT address In this case it is the same address as on your WAN interface The gateway attribute should contain the gateway address 195 7 12 254 However if you already defined your defaultRoute to be 195 7 12 254 then you can leave the gateway attribute empty This because if the gateway attribute is empty then the defaultRoute is taken as only gateway addresses 120 Telindus 1031 Router User manual Chapter 7 Configuring the router 7 4 4 How does PAT work Again consider t
151. c Ii aa filter Use this element to apply a filter on the RIP updates Default lt empty gt on the interface Range 0 24 characters Do this by entering the index name of the filter you want to use You can create the filter itself by adding a routingFilter object under the router object and by configuring the attributes in this object Example If you created a routingFilter object with index name my_filter i e filter routingFilter my_filter and you want to apply this filter here then enter the my_filted index name as value for the filter element N Refer to 10 5 4 Routing filter configuration attributes on page 222 for more information on RIP filtering 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 45 for more information on adding objects Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 115 User manual Configuring the router 7 3 4 Configuring RIP authentication Refer to 7 1 Introducing routing on page 98 for an introduction on routing e 7 3 1 Introducing RIP on page 108 for an introduction on RIP Routers exchange information between each other for management purposes They do this using the Router Information Protocol RIP For security reasons you can enable RIP authentication You can do this per interface Use the following to configure RIP authentication e Use the authentication element in the rip structure to enable RIP authentication per interface You can also select the
152. ce attributes 12 8 Proxy performance attributes Refer to the Telindus 1030 Router Orchid function manual for more information on the performance attributes of the proxy function also called Orchid function 326 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 13 327 Reference manual Alarm attributes 13 Alarm attributes This chapter discusses the alarm attributes of the Telindus 1031 Router The following gives an overview of this chapter e 13 1 Alarm attributes overview on page 328 e 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 329 e 13 3 General alarms on page 332 e 13 4 LAN interface alarms on page 334 e 13 5 G703 interface alarms on page 335 e 13 6 G703 channel alarms on page 336 e 13 7 Router alarms on page 337 328 Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual 13 1 Alarm attributes overview gt telindus1031 totalAlarmLevel alarminfo notResponding alarmSyncLoss configChanged access unknownStatus coldBoot warmBoot codeConsistencyFail configConsistencyFail gt gt lanInterface alarminfo linkDown gt gt g703 1 alarminfo linkDown Ifa ais sevErroredSec gt gt gt channel g703 1 alarminfo linkDown gt gt router alarminfo pingActive Chapter 13 Alarm attributes Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 13 329 Reference manual Alarm attributes 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes Before discussin
153. cifically to a router s physical i e Media Access Control or MAC address this time with the protocol i e network address of the des tination host As it examines the packet s destination protocol address the router determines that it either knows or does not know how to forward the packet to the next hop If the router does not know how to forward the packet it typically drops the packet If the router knows how to forward the packet however it changes the destination physical address to that of the next hop and transmits the packet The next hop may be the ultimate destination host If not the next hop is usually another router which executes the same switching decision process As the packet moves through the internetwork its phys ical address changes but its protocol address remains constant Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 99 User manual Configuring the router Static versus dynamic routing The following table states the differences between static and dynamic routing Routing algo Description rithm Static routing algorithms are hardly algorithms at all but are table mappings estab lished by the network administrator before the beginning of routing These map pings do not change unless the network administrator alters them Static routing algorithms work well in environments where network traffic is relatively predictable and where network design is relatively simple dynamic Because static routing systems canno
154. concerned with bridging First it describes the general bridging performance attributes Then it explains the performance attributes of the extra features as there are access listing etc The following gives an overview of this section e 12 5 1 Bridge group performance attributes on page 319 e 12 5 2 Bridge access list performance attributes on page 320 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 319 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 5 1 Bridge group performance attributes ra telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup bridgeCache When a port of the bridge enters the learning state it stores the MAC addresses of the stations situated on the network that is connected to this port The MAC addresses are stored in a MAC address database or bridge cache The bridgeCache attribute visualises this address database Refer to What is the bridge cache on page 232 for more information The bridgeCache table contains the following elements eow peoo interface This is the interface through which the station can be reached macAddress This is the MAC address of the station situated on the network connected to the interface rxCount This is the number of frames received from the corresponding MAC address txCount This is the number of frames forwarded to the corresponding MAC address ra telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup bridgeDiscards This attribute displays the number of times a frame was discarded because it was rece
155. ct on the network device itself or a device thereafter if so specify its address e If previously a password has been configured Jon device in the Telindus 1031 Router then also fill in C After device the password field NMG addre Security You might specify a password to connect to the device If not the network password will be used if any Password Cancel Click on the Finish button After a couple of seconds the attributes of the Telindus 1031 Router appear in the TMA window 37 38 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1031 Router 4 1 4 Connecting over an IP network To established a connection between TMA and the Telindus 1031 Router over an IP network proceed as follows Connect the IP network to the network port of your HITT PC the LAN connector ofthe Telindus 1031 Router Start TMA In the TMA window either select from the menu bar Connect j des Device Please specify how to reach the device you wish to connect to or press the short cut key Ctrl N C seid om z or press on the Connect to device button 6 Ne Cp aa E The Connect to a device window is being dis WPaddess 10 0 11 100 played as in the following figure I AssigntoMae Subnet mast ean Security Specify a password for connecting to this device This field may be left open Password Carcel In the Connect to a device win
156. cy element in the bridging structure under the ppp object telindus1031 g703 channel J ppp bridgingftraf ficPolicy You can find the trafficPolicy element in the bridging structure within the pvcTable attribute under the atm object telindus1031 g703 J channel J atm pvcTable bridging trafficPolicy This means that you can specify a traffic policy per PVC tunnels in the bridging structure within the I2tpTunnels attribute under the tunnels object telindus1031 router tunnels I2tpTunnels bridging trafficPolicy 1 The interface can be a physical interface such as the LAN interface but can also be a DLCI a PVC a tunnel etc 158 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 8 User manual Configuring the bridge Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 9 159 User manual Configuration examples 9 Configuration examples This chapter shows some configuration examples for the Telindus 1031 Router The following gives an overview of this chapter 9 1 LAN extension over a PDH SDH network on page 160 9 2 LAN extension over a Frame Relay network on page 161 9 3 LAN extension over an ATM network on page 162 9 4 Connecting a LAN to the Internet using NAT and PAT on page 163 9 5 Using PAT over PPP with a minimum of official IP addresses on page 164 9 6 Combining bridging and routing in a network on page 165 9 7 Connecting two networks through a tunnel on page 166 9 8 Connecting VLAN enabled switches over a WAN on page 168
157. d frame received from the network netErrors This is the number of errors on LMI commands issued by the network during the last monitoredEvents period userTxSeqNum This is the sequence number of the last LMI command frame sent towards the router userRxSeqNum This is the sequence number of the last LMI response frame received from the router Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 269 Reference manual Status attributes Benet pe O userErrors This is the number of errors on LMI commands issued by the router during the last monitoredEvents period userWaitFullEnquiry This is the number of LMI frames still to be sent before a Full Status Enquiry will be requested userLastReport This displays the type of the most recent report that was sent Possible values are TypeSent full status The last report contained the full status link integrity The last report only contained the link integrity informa tion telindus1031 g703 channel frameRelay cllmLastCongestionCause This attribute indicates the last reason which was received from the network for congestion on any of the DLCls Possible values are none e short term excessive traffic long term excessive traffic e short term equipment failure long term equipment failure short term maintenance action long term maintenance action e short term unknown cause long term unknown cause
158. d with the ATM layer the AAL is roughly analogous to the data link layer Layer AAL of the OSI model The AAL is responsible for isolating higher layer protocols from the details of the ATM processes The adaptation layer prepares user data for con version into cells and segments the data into 48 byte cell payloads higher layers Finally the higher layers residing above the AAL accept user data arrange it into packets and hand it to the AAL What is multi protocol over ATM As its name implies multi protocol encapsulation over ATM provides mechanisms for carrying traffic other than just IP There are two ways to do this Logical Link Control In this method multiple protocol types can be carried across a single con LLC encapsulation nection with the type of encapsulated packet identified by a standard LLC SNAP header Virtual connection mul In this method only a single protocol is carried across an ATM connection tiplexing with the type of protocol implicitly identified at connection setup LLC encapsulation is provided to support routed and bridged protocols In this encapsulation format PDUs from multiple protocols can be carried over the same virtual connection The type of protocol is indicated in the packet s SNAP header By contrast the virtual connection multiplexing method allows for transport of just one protocol per virtual connection Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 6 89 User manual Configuring the WAN
159. dded trafficPolicy object lip as value of the trafficPolicy element In E E ip gt trafficPolicy this case my_traffic_policy b 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 lt Struct gt my traffic policd Set the configuration attribute telindus1031 router trafficPolicy method to trafficShaping Configure the configuration attribute telindus1031 router trafficPolicy J rafficShaping to your needs Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 8 139 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 Configuring the bridge This chapter introduces bridging on the Telindus 1031 Router and lists the attributes you can use to con figure bridging The following gives an overview of this chapter 8 1 Introducing bridging on page 140 8 2 The self learning and Transparent Spanning Tree bridge on page 141 8 3 The Spanning Tree root bridge on page 142 8 4 The Spanning Tree topology on page 143 8 5 The Spanning Tree bridge port states on page 144 8 6 The Spanning Tree Bridge Protocol Data Unit on page 145 8 7 The Spanning Tree behaviour on page 146 8 8 The Spanning Tree priority and cost on page 147 8 9 Configuring bridging on page 149 8 10 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the bridge on page 154 q Refer to the Reference manual on page 169 for a complete overview of the attributes of the Telindus 1031 Router 140 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 8 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 1 Introducing bridging What is bridging
160. ddress the router does not accept incoming traffic on the address 172 31 74 1 The solution is to add the WAN IP address to the addresses table as private address telindus1031 router addresses officialAddress 172 31 74 1 privateAddress 2 2 2 2 In that case the manage ment tool service runs on the WAN IP address This means however that the WAN has to be up Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 125 User manual Configuring the router 7 4 8 How does the NAT address table work If a local station sends data to the Internet for the first time NAT looks for an unused official IP address It assigns this official IP address to the local station The amount of local stations that can have simulta neous Internet access equals the amount of NAT addresses you defined If all sessions between a local station and the Internet have been closed by the application in case of TCP or because of time outs then the previously assigned official IP address is freed for another local station Optionally the NAT address entry may contain a corresponding private IP address This allows to per manently assign an official IP address to a local station This is useful for stations or servers that should have Internet access at all times Another example of permanently assigned official IP addresses is a network where only a limited number of users has Internet access NAT only converts IP addresses and thus allows traffic in both directions Howev
161. doing so the function associated with this object is applied there Example Suppose you create a routingFilter object with the instance value my filter The containment tree then looks as follows naps tunnels defaultNat routingFilter my filter Now you want to use this filter on the LAN interface In that case in the ip rip structure in the laninterface object enter the instance value of the routingFilter object under the element filter This looks as follows ip rip metric splitHorizon authentication filter b 1 active poisonedReverse disabled my_filted 50 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1031 Router 4 5 Telindus 1031 Router attribute overview The reference part of this manual explains all the attributes of the Telindus 1031 Router One chapter describes one group of attributes e chapter 10 Configuration attributes on page 171 e chapter 11 Status attributes on page 245 e chapter 12 Performance attributes on page 299 e chapter 13 Alarm attributes on page 327 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 5 51 User manual Basic configuration 5 Basic configuration This chapter shows you how to configure the very basics of the Telindus 1031 Router This will allow you to access the Telindus 1031 Router over an IP connection with for example TMA First this chapter explains how DIP switch configuration tables and TMA attribute strings should be interpreted
162. dow specify the following e Select the option P address and enter the IP address of the Telindus 1031 Router If a password has previously been configured in the Telindus 1031 Router then also fill in the password field Before you are able to establish a connection over an IP network you have to configure an IP address and a default gateway in the Telindus 1031 Router You can do this by first connecting TMA to the Telindus 1031 Router through the control connector and then configuring an IP address and a default gateway Refer to the 5 2 Configuring IP addresses on page 55 Click on the Next gt button The second Connect window is displayed Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 4 39 User manual Managing the Telindus 1031 Router In the Connect select a device window select the option On device Address Choose whether to connect on the network device itself or a device thereafter if so specify its address Dn device C After device NMS addre Security You might specify a password to connect to the device If not the network password will be used if any Password Cancel Click on the Finish button After a couple of seconds the attributes of the Telindus 1031 Router appear in the TMA window 40 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1031 Router 4 2 Introducing the management terminology This section briefly introduces the term
163. dow size for transmit Default 4 ting control messages Range 1 30 receiveWindowSize Use this element to set the window size for receiving Default 4 control messages Range 1 30 udpChecksum Use this element to enable on or disable off the Default off UDP checksum Range on off It is recommended to enable the UDP checksum on lower guality links 222 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 5 4 Routing filter configuration attributes The routingFilter object is not present in the containment tree by default If you want to use a routing filter then add this object first Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 45 ra telindus1031 router routingFilter J filter Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to set up a RIP update filter RIP updates coming from a network that is specified in the filter table are forwarded All other RIP updates are blocked If the filter table is empty then all RIP updates are forwarded The filter table contains the following elements ln E network This is the IP source address of the RIP update The TDefault 0 0 0 0 address may be a sub network address Range up to 255 255 255 255 mask This is the IP subnet mask for the network By combin pefault 255 255 255 0 ing an IP address with a mask you can uniquely iden Range up to 2
164. dropLevels gt gt gt priorityPolicy 1 algorithm countingPolicy queueConfigurations lowdelayQuotum gt gt bridge gt gt gt bridgeGroup bridgeCache bridgeTimeOut name ip arp spanningTree vlan gt gt gt accessList 1 macAddress gt gt gt trafficPolicy 1 vlanPriorityMap 1 Not present by default has to be added gt gt snmp trapDestinations mib2Traps gt gt management cms2Address accessList snmp telnet tftp consoleNoTrafficTimeOut ctriPortProtocol alarmFilter gt gt gt loopback ipAddress gt gt proxy Refer to the Telindus 1030 Router Orchid function manual for more information on the configuration attributes of the proxy function also called Orchid function 174 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 2 General configuration attributes kal telindus1031 sysName Default lt empty gt Range 0 64 characters Use this attribute to assign a name to the Telindus 1031 Router The sysName attribute is an SNMP MIB2 parameter kal telindus1031 sysContact Default lt empty gt Range 0 64 characters Use this attribute to add contact information You could for instance enter the name and telephone number of the person to contact in case problem occur The sysContact attribute is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1031 sysLocation Default lt empty gt
165. dus1031 router trafficPolicy object routing and bridging e the routed data is queued as specified in the traffic policy settings as defined in the telindus1031 router trafficPolicy object the bridged data is gueued as specified in the traffic policy settings as defined in the telindus1031 bridge trafficPolicy object only bridging the bridged data is gueued as specified in the traffic policy settings as defined in the telindus1031 bridge trafficPolicy object To empty the gueues the priority policy settings as defined in the telindus1031 router priorityPolicy object are used for both routed and bridged data Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 133 User manual Configuring the router 7 6 3 Howto configure a traffic and priority policy on the router Refer to 7 6 1 Introducing traffic and priority policy on page 131 for an introduction The following table explains you step by step how to configure a traffic and priority policy on the router To configure a traffic and priority policy for the routed data of a certain interface proceed as follows Add a trafficPolicy object under the router object and give it a certain index name e g trafficPolicy my_traffic_policy Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 45 Configure the traffic policy related parameters Refer to 7 6 4 Configuring a traffic policy on the router on page 134 Add a priorityPolicy object under the rout
166. e If it sent over the WAN link the peer router should have an IP helper address for the DNS server If no reply is received within 10 seconds this phase is repeated once more Ifa DNS reply is received it contains the domain name The Telindus 1031 Router only uses the hostname part of the domain name hostname domain toplevel_domain Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 15 345 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1031 Router pees a E Now there are two possibilities is the router requests the file hostname cms as a limited broad cast hostname cms is the router its configuration file in binary format If this request is sent over the WAN link the peer router should have an IP helper address for the TFTP server If no reply is received within 5 seconds the router requests the file hostname cli as a local broadcast hostname cli is the router its configuration file in ASCII format Again there is a reply time out of 5 seconds If still no valid answer is received the router alternatively repeats both reguests up to four times not known the procedure described above is executed with the file name hostname replaced by the concatenation of the decimal repre sentation for each byte in the IP address with leading zeroes and without dots in between the bytes Example a router with IP address 192 168 100 1 requests the file 192168100001 cms or 192168100001 cli If the Telindus 1031 Router recei
167. e tftp gt get CONFIG CLI dest file cli Where get is the TFTP command to retrieve a file e CONFIG CLI is the Telindus 1031 Router configuration file e dest _file cli is the destination file When the file transfer is finished close the TFTP session Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 15 351 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1031 Router 15 6 2 Creating an ASCII file using the CLI get command To create a configuration file in ASCII cli format using the CLI get command and Telnet logging pro ceed as follows Start a Telnet session on the Telindus 1031 Router You are automatically in CLI mode Redirect the CLI output or log it to a file Make sure you are in the top object telindus1031 and in the Edit Configuration group Execute the get r command Stop output redirection or logging In the redirected or logged file you now obtained remove all input and output logging before the get r command Also remove the get r command itself Now modify the configuration file ep Change the string GET now located at the beginning of the file into SET Type the string Load Default Configuration at the beginning of the file Type the string Activate Configuration at the end of the file Save this file to a file with an extension cli 352 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 15 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1031 Router Telindus 1031 Router Ch
168. e 1 queue 1 gt queue 2 queue 1 queue 1 queue 2 etc kal telindus1031 router priorityPolicy lowdelayQuotum Default 1500 Range 1 25000 Use this attribute to set the number of bytes packets that is dequeued from the low delay queue when the queue is addressed The unit of the quotum bytes or packets can be set with the telindus1031 router priorityPolicy JcountingPolicy attribute Refer to 7 6 1 Introducing traffic and priority policy on page 131 for more information on queues Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 231 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 6 Bridge configuration attributes This section discusses the configuration attributes concerned with bridging First it describes the general bridging configuration attributes Then it explains the configuration attributes of the extra features as there are access listing user priority mapping etc The following gives an overview of this section e 10 6 1 Bridge group configuration attributes on page 232 e 10 6 2 Bridge access list configuration attributes on page 236 e 10 6 3 Bridge traffic policy configuration attributes on page 237 232 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 6 1 Bridge group configuration attributes telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup bridgeCache Default learning Range learning disabled Use this attribute to enable or disable the
169. e 110 for a detailed explanation of the rip structure 110 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 3 3 Explaining the rip structure Because the rip structure occurs in several objects it is described here once and referenced where nec essary The rip structure is located within the ip structure Refer to 5 2 2 Where to find the IP related parameters on page 57 for the location of the ip structure The rip structure contains the following elements KA DK metric Use this element to determine with how much the Tel Defauit 1 indus 1031 Router increments the metric parameter Range 1 15 of a route Routing information includes a metric parameter Every time a router is passed this parameter is incremented Also the Telindus 1031 Router increments the met ric parameter default by 1 before it writes the route in the routing table Hence the metric parameter indicates for each route how many routers have to be passed before reaching the network When several routes to a single network exist and they all have the same preference then the route with the smallest metric param eter is chosen However using the metric element you can increment the metric parameter by more than 1 up to a maximum of 15 You could do this for instance to indicate that a certain interface is less desirable to route through As a result the Telindus 1031 Router adds this value to the metric parameter of e
170. e 174 10 3 LAN interface configuration attributes trrremnrrs 178 10 4 WAN interface configuration attributes wnrrnmrr 181 10 5 Router configuration attributes meennnnananenentenantananennnnnaaenn nan nneee 200 10 6 Bridge configuration AHriDUtSS 45 ateka celcd nels vaetadsbosrieneebendaadeedgreewberdyes hakake 231 10 7 SNMP configuration attributes wwwennmmnensnnnanannnnanannnnnnenananaaaenea 238 10 8 Management configuration attributes 0 wrrrnmrrr 240 10 9 Proxy configuration attributes ilmast 244 11 Status attrib teS 1 ae aaa ot See a ee a orc ae he te ee ce a 245 11 1 Status attribute overview 2072 ie i lite ck cece eae eae cee al wht eas 246 11 2 General status attributes tiit riiva incttet civnset vate eveilceedgonan antweduadeccaennsanle 248 11 3 LAN interface status attributes 20 tos ccd neat dt ced ot ahodee nee uee latina lane 251 11 4 WAN interface status attributes wtrrnrrrnrrra 257 11 5 Roller st tus attributes takse ad Saeed Snosage 273 11 6 Bridge status ALEIDUASS sic 0 fracas aa tu Aa lS ath aS ye 287 11 7 Management status attributes mrseeseranannennenenenennnnnananantnnaaananaaanenae 293 11 8 File system status attributes atc kartmata katat eal aal lt jalal 294 11 9 Operating system status attributes wwnnnnnnnene
171. e AE Eie ESEE 336 1327 o EIE E EET EE TAAT t t 337 x Telindus 1031 Router Table of contents User and reference manual 14 TMA sub system picture cao aco eee see seine daa Aava ede eee 339 15 Auto installing the Telindus 1031 Router ccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 341 15 1 What is BootP and DHCP cc ait aitas alemaade tai Madala mad na 342 15 2 Getting the LAN IP address is iii hades heaks ehk ekk hensdweksh detede peadgvdandh kaka jaha daa 343 15 3 Getting the configuration with TR TP rscctecweestayene 4 reeeiny Hvgadavakitaka kakao ka aada a 344 15 4 Creating configuration files asco less leah krt aaa aa a lai 347 15 5 Creating a binary configuration file mereunnnnannantneteennanananenneeanetannaneee 348 15 6 Creating an ASCII configuration file uannmenennuvnannannanannnveaaa anne 349 16 Downloading software 22 senati ace oa ee ee 353 16 1 What is boot loader and application software wrrmre 354 16 2 Downloading application software using TMA mrtmaaa 355 16 3 Downloading application software using TFTP errmrr 356 16 4 Downloading application or loader software using TML wws 357 16 5 Downloading application or loader software in loader mode 358 16 6 Downloading files to the file system nmmeenennennnan
172. e Internet only IP address WAN interface 195 7 12 22 IP address WAN interface 195 7 12 254 ISP 6 A A Internet ww IP subnet 192 168 48 0 mask 255 255 255 0 Frame Relay or PDH SDH network modem IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 IP address WAN interface 195 7 12 23 Suppose PAT is only used for the traffic destined for the Internet In that case the configuration of the most relevant attributes of the Telindus 1031 Router is as follows e telindus1031 router defaultRoute gateway 195 7 12 254 interface wan telindus1031 router routingTable network 192 168 48 0 gateway 195 7 12 23 e telindus1031 router defaultNat patAddress 195 7 12 22 As you can see the gateway attribute is not configured since the Internet traffic uses the default route Limitations As seen from the previous Port Address Translation has some limitations e Only outgoing sessions are supported This implies that you can not access servers on your local net work over the Internet Some TCP or UDP applications do not support port translation Limited ICMP support Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 123 User manual Configuring the router 7 4 6 PAT limitations workaround Use the following to partly overcome the PAT limitations Use the portTranslations attribute to define specific port number ranges that should not be translated Refer to telindus
173. e Relay header This is performed at the local Frame Relay switch If congestion occurs at a node in the Frame Relay network packets marked DE are the first to be dropped Upon detecting con gestion a Frame Relay switch will send a Backward Explicit Congestion Notifier BECN message back to the source If the source e g the router has sufficient intelligence to process this message it may throttle back to the CIR 80 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 3 2 Configuring IP addresses on the Frame Relay WAN When you use Frame Relay encapsulation on the WAN interface you can configure the IP related parameters on two levels Using the ip structure in the Use this structure to configure the IP related parameters of frameRelay object all the DLCis for which e in the diciTable no IP address is defined for that specific DLCI and the mode element is set to routing or routingAndBridgning In other words use this attribute to globally configure the IP param eters of the DLCls Refer to Example DLCI global IP dlciTable attribute one specific DLCI Refer to Example DLCI specific IP Refer to 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 58 for a detailed description of the ip structure Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 6 81 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols Example DLCI global IP Suppose you have the following set up Network Y
174. e attributes you can use to con figure routing It also introduces the most important features of the router besides routing and lists the attributes you can use to configure these features The following gives an overview of this chapter 7 1 Introducing routing on page 98 e 7 2 Configuring static routes on page 100 e 7 3 Configuring the Routing Information Protocol on page 107 7 4 Configuring address translation on page 116 7 5 Configuring L2TP tunnelling on page 127 e 7 6 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the router on page 130 7 7 Configuring an extended access list on page 138 i Refer to the Reference manual on page 169 for a complete overview of the attributes of the Telindus 1031 Router 98 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 1 Introducing routing What is routing Routing is the act of moving information across an internetwork from a source to a destination Routing versus bridging Routing is often contrasted with bridging At first sight bridging might seem to do the same as routing The primary difference between the two is that bridging occurs at layer 2 the link layer of the OSI ref erence model whereas routing occurs at Layer 3 the network layer In other words bridging occurs at a lower level and is therefore more of a hardware function whereas routing occurs at a higher level where the software component is more important And because routing
175. e elements higherLayerProtocol and mul tiProtocolMech on page 195 For a detailed description of the elements in the ppp structure refer to e telindus1031 g703 channel ppp linkMonitoring on page 186 e telindus1031 9703 channel J ppp authentication on page 187 telindus1031 g703 J channel ppp authenPeriod on page 187 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 195 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1031 g703 channel J atm pvcTable atm Default Range structure see below Use the atm structure in the pvcTable to configure the ATM related parame ters of the corresponding PVC Refer to 6 4 3 Configuring the PVCs on page 90 for more information on PVCs The atm structure contains the following elements aa 75 TEESE Use this element to set the Virtual Path Identifier Default 0 VPI Range 0 255 Use this element to set the Virtual Channel Identifier Dafault 32 VCI Range 32 65535 The VPI in conjunction with the VCI identifies the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on the way to its destination higherLayerProtocol Use this element to define which protocol has to be Default rfc2684 mapped onto the ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AALS Range enumerated see below The higherLayerProtocol element has the following values rfc2684 Select this value in case you want to encapsulate r
176. eachable from network 192 168 47 0 and vice versa you have to define one static route in router A left and one static route in router B right as follows Router A V routingTable network interface preference metric b 1 192 168 48 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 498 254 wan 10 2 Router B V routingT able network interface preference metric gt 1 192 168 47 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 47 254 wan 10 2 106 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 2 4 The rerouting principle What is the rerouting principle If the gateway of a route does not belong to the subnet of an interface then the Telindus 1031 Router adds a special route Then a second route look up occurs this time using the gateway field of the route This can be used as a back up functionality as shown below Example Suppose you have the following set up 172 31 76 0 255 255 255 0 172 31 77 6 255 255 255 252 172 31 77 2 DLCI 16 255 255 255 252 gt Frame Relay 172 31 255 255 255 2 1 77 10 255 255 248 172 31 75 0 255 255 255 0 In the routing table the following routes are defined e network 172 31 75 0 is reachable via 172 31 77 10 e 172 31 77 10 is reachable via DLCI 16 172 31 77 2 e 172 31 77 10 is also reachable via DLCI 17 172 31 77 6 routingTable network interface b1 17231 750 255 255 2550 172 31 77 10 10 2 p 2 172 31 77 10 255 255 255 248 172 31 77 2 wan 10
177. ed before sending it to the interface The CRC is used to check the data integrity on the G 703 connection The crc4lnsertion attribute has the following values In auto mode CRC 4 insertion is e disabled if the speed matches 2 Mbps e enabled if the speed differs from 2 Mbps disabled CRC 4 insertion is disabled enabled CRC 4 insertion is enabled r telindus1031 g703 J longHaul Default disabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to enable or disable the long haul driver When you enable the driver you can cover long distances The distances are in the order of 2 5 km when using a cable with a diameter of 0 6 mm 1 25 km when using a cable with a diameter of 0 4 mm ra telindus1031 g703 J jitterAttenuation Default 32Bits Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to set the buffer depth of the jitter attenuator The jitter attenuator of the Telindus 1031 Router attenuates the clock and data jitter The values of the jitterAttenuation attribute are 32Bits and 128Bits You may wish to limit the buffer size to 32 bits in applications where throughput delay is critical telindus1031 g703 J alarmMask kal telindus1031 g703 JJalarmLevel Refer to e 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 329 for more information on the configuration attributes alarmMask and alarmLevel and on the alarms in general e 13 5 G703 interface alarms on page
178. el of the Telindus 1031 Router HS OOO bus CTRL DCE AUX DTE RS530 DTE KOT Is Wye oo 2 G703 The specific features of the Telindus 1031 Router are one G703 interface This interface can be used as channelised E1 interface offering multiple logical interfaces on one physical port management concentrator capabilities These are limited because only the CTRL and AUX connec tors can be used to connect to other Telindus devices 1 3 4 Telindus 1032 Router features The following displays the back panel of the Telindus 1032 Router HS OOO bus 2 G703 CTRL DCE AUX DTE RS530 DTE md es Us We oo The specific features of the Telindus 1032 Router are e two G703 interfaces These interfaces can be used as channelised E1 interfaces offering multiple logical interfaces on one physical port management concentrator capabilities These are limited because only the CTRL and AUX connec tors can be used to connect to other Telindus devices Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 1 9 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1031 Router 1 3 5 Telindus 1033 Router features The following displays the back panel of the Telindus 1033 Router HS OSO bus 2 G703 CTRL DCE AUX DTE RS530 DTE 1 MAX 9VDC The specific features of the Telindus 1033 Router are e one RS530 interface This serial interface allows speeds up to 10 Mbps The interface can also be used as RS530
179. ement concentrator has completed a first successful polling session coldBoot each time the Telindus 1031 Router performs a cold disabled boot Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual The alarm warmBoot is generated each time the Telindus 1031 Router performs a warm boot Chapter 13 333 Alarm attributes Default value alarmMask disabled alarmLevel codeConsistency Fail when the software consistency imposed by the manage ment concentrator on the Telindus 1031 Router fails For example because of a loss of contact Check the status attribute 01003 nmsgroup softConsisten cyStatus to determine the problem disabled configConsistency Fail when the configuration consistency imposed by the management concentrator on the Telindus 1031 Router fails For example because of a loss of contact Check the status attributes 01003 nmsgroup objectTable con figState and configDiag to determine the problem disabled 334 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 13 Reference manual Alarm attributes 13 4 LAN interface alarms Refer to 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 329 for general information on the alarm attributes Ta telindus1031 lanInterface alarminfo The alarm related to the laninterface object together with its explanation and default alarmMask and alarmLevel value is given in the following table The alarm is generated Default value a
180. encapsulation protocols 6 4 2 Configuring IP addresses on the ATM WAN When you use ATM encapsulation on the WAN interface you can configure the IP related parameters per PVC using the ip attribute in the pvcTable Refer to 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 58 for a detailed description of the ip structure 90 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 4 3 Configuring the PVCs Refer to 6 4 1 Introducing ATM on page 87 for an introduction on PVC VPI and VCI Somewhat similar to the DLCls in a Frame Relay network refer to 6 3 3 Configuring the DLCls on page 83 you can set up PVCs in the ATM network A PVC allows direct connectivity between sites In this way a PVC is similar to a leased line A PVC guarantees availability of a connection and does not require call setup procedures between switches Use the pvcTable to set up a PVC s Refer to telindus1031 g703 J channel J atm pvcTable on page 193 Example The following figure gives an example of a local Ethernet segment connected to three different networks through three different PVCs 192 168 100 2 VPI 102 VCI 102 e router modem A VPI 103 VCI 103 VPI 104 192 168 100 4 VCI 104 The following screenshot shows part of the pvcTable of the set up depicted in the figure above V pvoTable name adminStatus mode priorityPolicy ip gt bridging gt atm_ ppp
181. eneneenaaaaananannnaa 45 4 5 Telindus 1031 Router attribute overview 50 5 Basic configuration sr secrete Sen tcc tena aaa aaa aaa 51 5 1 Reading DIP switch tables and TMA attribute strings rmmaea 52 5 2 Configuring IP addresses riia maa maa Sieg Desa avar eee nes 55 5 3 Configuring the G703 interface eenananenenanannnanaanenennnnnnannnaaananennantanaa 61 9 4 Configufing PASSWOPAS 11itii rtint tati va gl aaa eve 62 5 5 Configuring the major features of the Telindus 1031 Router 65 5 6 Executing Configuration AGtONS 4 i0 44 juhus cesdegaceia de vtl tm ke ai a kaa Heta k 66 viii Telindus 1031 Router Table of contents User and reference manual 6 Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols ssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 71 6 1 Selecting a WAN encapsulation protocol cccccccccecceccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeetees 72 6 2 Configuring PPP enc aps lali ons 4 v ttev ekat have v lde alia caver ad ket cake 73 6 3 Configuring Frame Relay encapsulation eveerrnnnnnennennnnennenae 77 6 4 Configuring ATM encapsulation 6m mneeneenenenenenannnnennnnnannnnnnnennanae 86 6 5 Configuring HDLC encapsulation iaaaannaenennenenavvannaaennneenenaananaaaannnna name 95 7 Configuring the TFOULEP 5 aadi aka kaaneta kaduda vaala aaastaks taani 97 kel Introducin
182. ent application software version described in this iv conventions graphical vi typographical v copyright notice ii intended audience iv organisation iv properties ii statements iii your feedback iv downloading application soft ware in loader mode 358 using TFTP 356 using TMA 355 using TML 357 downloading loader software in loader mode 358 using TML 357 downloading software 353 E EIR what is 78 element what is 43 EMC compliance 368 environmental compliance 369 examples 159 combining bridging and routing in a network 165 connecting a LAN to the In ternet using NAT and PAT 163 connecting two networks through a tunnel 166 connecting VLAN enabled switches over a WAN 168 LAN extension over a Frame Relay network 161 LAN extension over a PDH SDH network 160 LAN extension over an ATM network 162 using PAT over PPP with a minimum of official IP addresses 164 executing configuration actions 66 extended access list basic configuration 138 F feedback iv file system status attributes 294 Frame Relay basic configuration 77 configuration attributes 188 introduction 78 performance attributes 308 specifications 366 status attributes 266 what is 78 G G703 channel alarms 336 configuration attributes 184 performance attributes 307 status attributes 259 G703 interface alarms 335 basic configuration 61 configuration attributes 182 Index performance attributes 306 specification
183. eply packet In this reply the IP address that is linked with the MAC address in question as defined in the dhcpStatic table is returned e Ifthe source MAC address does not correspond with a MAC address in the dhcpStatic table then the DHCP server returns no response on that frame Releasing IP addresses DHCP versus BootP On DHCP level it is regularly checked whether the device that has an IP address in lease is still con nected to the network If it is not the IP address is returned to the pool of free IP addresses On BootP level however such a check or refresh does not exist What is more a statistic IP address lease is for an infinite time Consequently if the device that requested the IP address is no longer con nected to the network this is not detected by the server In that case the statistical information will still indicate that the IP address is leased although it is not 214 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes ra telindus1031 router dhcpCheckAddress Default disabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to allow that the assigned IP address is probed with an ICMP Echo Request This checks and prevents the double use of IP addresses The dhcpCheckAddress attribute has the following values enabled No ICMP Echo Request is sent when an IP address is leased by a client disabled An ICMP Echo Request is sent when an IP address is leased by a clie
184. er incoming traffic on one of the official IP addresses can only be forwarded to the local network if a corresponding private IP address has been configured Example of a NAT address table In this example the first address is continuously assigned to a server with IP address 192 168 47 250 The others are WW natAddresses assigned dynamically ad officialAddress b 1 19571221 192 168 47 250 b 2 1957 12 22 lt Opt gt gt 3 1957 12 23 lt Opt gt b 4 1957 12 24 lt Opt gt 126 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 4 9 Combining PAT and NAT It is possible to use a combination of PAT and NAT In that case the router first assigns NAT addresses until they are all used Then it uses PAT addresses for further translations Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 127 User manual Configuring the router 7 5 Configuring L2TP tunnelling This section introduces the Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol L2TP and gives a short description of the attributes you can use to configure L2TP The following gives an overview of this section 7 5 1 Introducing L2TP on page 128 7 5 2 How does L2TP work on page 129 e 7 5 3 Configuring L2TP on page 129 128 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 5 1 Introducing L2TP What is L2TP The Layer 2 Tunnelling Protocol L2TP is a protocol used for connecting VPNs Virtual Private Net works over public lines More specific it
185. er object and give it a certain index name e g priorityPolicy my_priority_policy Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 45 Configure the priority policy related parameters Refer to 7 6 5 Configuring a priority pol icy on page 135 Apply the traffic policy to a certain interface Do this by typing the index name of the added trafficPolicy object in the appropriate element Refer to 7 6 6 Applying a routing traf fic policy on a certain interface on page 136 Apply the priority policy to a certain interface Do this by typing the index name of the added priorityPolicy object in the appropriate element Refer to 7 6 7 Applying a priority policy on a certain interface on page 137 134 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 6 4 Configuring a traffic policy on the router Refer to 7 6 1 Introducing traffic and priority policy on page 131 for an introduction This section shows you which configuration attributes you can use to configure a traffic policy on the router 4 The trafficPolicy object is not present in the containment tree by default If you want to use traffic policy then add this object first Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 45 First you have to choose a method you want to use to fill the queues when a traffic overload condition occurs Do this using the attribute telindus1031 router trafficPolicy J method on page 22
186. er of data buffers currently not in use and available for e g incoming data telindus1031 operatingSystem totalDataBuffers This attribute displays the total number of available data buffers telindus1031 operatingSystem largestFreeBlockSize The processor uses RAM memory for storing internal information and buffering The different tasks allo cate RAM memory on request Tasks may also free memory again In this way the total RAM memory becomes fragmented This attribute gives the size of the largest contiguous free memory block expressed in bytes telindus1031 operatingSystem freeBlockCount This attribute displays the number of free contiguous memory blocks 324 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes kal telindus1031 operatingSystem freeMemory This attribute displays the total free memory expressed in bytes telindus1031 operatingSystem totalMemory This attribute displays the total RAM memory expressed in bytes kal telindus1031 operatingSystem taskinfo This attribute contains status information concerning the different tasks running on the processor Itis a table grouping up to 31 task slots which is the maximum number of parallel tasks running on the proc essor s operating system This attribute contains the same elements as the status attribute telindus1031 operatingSystem taskinfo on page 296 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 325 Reference manual Performan
187. er will always respond to ICMP echo requests sent to this address In every other respect the loop back address behaves the same as an IP address of a physical interface If the loop back address is used and RIP is active then a host route to the loop back address is included in the RIP updates 244 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 9 Proxy configuration attributes Refer to the Telindus 1030 Router Orchid function manual for more information on the configuration attributes of the proxy function also called Orchid function Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 245 Reference manual Status attributes 11 Status attributes This chapter discusses the status attributes of the Telindus 1031 Router The following gives an over view of this chapter e 11 1 Status attribute overview on page 246 e 11 2 General status attributes on page 248 e 11 3 LAN interface status attributes on page 251 e 11 4 WAN interface status attributes on page 257 e 11 5 Router status attributes on page 273 e 11 6 Bridge status attributes on page 287 e 11 7 Management status attributes on page 293 e 11 8 File system status attributes on page 294 e 11 9 Operating system status attributes on page 296 e 11 10 Proxy status attributes on page 297 246 Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual 11 1 Status attribute overview Chapter 11 Status attributes gt telindus1031 sysDescr sy
188. ercome the lim itations of PAT there are situations where PAT is inadequate For example it is not possible to have several web servers on your local network It is also impossible to run an application with fixed source port numbers on several local devices that are connected simultaneously to a single Internet device This can only be solved by using several official IP addresses Network Address Translation Use the following to configure NAT Use the addresses attribute to enter all the official IP addresses that have to be used for Network Address Translation Refer to telindus1031 router defaultNat addresses on page 216 e Use the gateway attribute to define the gateway addresses from routes on which NAT or PAT should be applied Refer to telindus1031 router defaultNat gateway on page 216 Important remark using NAT on the LAN interface Consider the following configuration e telindus1031 laninterface ip address 172 31 74 1 e telindus1031 router defaultNat addresses officialAddress 172 31 74 1 privateAddress lt opt gt e telindus1031 wanlnterface ppp ip address 2 2 2 2 The above means that NAT is used on the LAN interface and the router uses the address 172 31 74 1 as Official IP address The problem that arises here is that the router can no longer be managed via the LAN interface using the management tool TMA Telnet etc This because the NAT route has priority over the LAN route and because it is a NAT a
189. ers for which broad cast forwarding is required Use this attribute if you specified helper IP addresses using the helperAddresses element in the ip structure of the LAN interface Refer to 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 58 If the helperProtocols table is empty default then address substitution is applied for the following proto cols Time Server IEN 116 Host Name Server Domain Name Server TACACS database service Boot Protocol BootP DHCP server NetBIOS Name Server NetBIOS Datagram Server Important remark Specifying at least one value in the helperProtocols table clears the default helper list automatically In that case if you want that for instance NetBios Datagram Server broadcast is forwarded you have to specify port number 138 again For BootP DHCP broadcast packets the Telindus 1031 Router is also a BootP DHCP Relay Agent If the protocol is selected then the Telindus 1031 Router will write the IP address of its Ethernet interface in the BootP or DHCP gateway field and increment the hops field in addition to the address substitution Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 209 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1031 router sendTtlExceeded Default enabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to enable or disable the sending of ICMP TTL exceeded messages What is Time To Live TTL Each IP packet has a Time To Live TTL v
190. ervals the DTE sends Status Enquiry messages In that case the DCE only answers with DLCI status changes You can select the Local Management Interface LMI protocol and fine tune the LMI operation using the Imi attribute Refer to telindus1031 g703 J channel frameRelay Imi on page 191 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 6 85 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 3 5 Configuring CIR and EIR Refer to 6 3 1 Introducing Frame Relay on page 78 for an introduction on CIR and EIR As said before CIR is the data rate which the user expects to pass into the Frame Relay network with few problems Note that the CIR is unrelated to the actual bit rate of the physical connection A user could have a physical connection operating at 2 Mbps but a CIR across this physical connection of only 64 kbps This would mean that the user s average data rate would be 64 kbps but data bursts up to 2 Mbps would be possible EIR You can configure the CIR and EIR using the cir and eir elements of the frameRelay structure within the dlciTable Refer to telindus1031 g703 J channelf frameRelay diciTable frameRelay on page 190 Important remarks e Be careful not to over dimension the CIR l e do not let the sum of the CIRs of the DLCls exceed the bandwidth of the physical connection When you do exceed the total bandwidth of the physical connection then the Telindus 1031 Router first buffers the data However when the buffers of the
191. es a high pulse density There fore data links using the HDB3 code can carry data patterns with a low 1 density Most of the G703 applications use HDB3 encoding Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to select between unframed or framed mode The framing attribute has the following values unframed In unframed transparent mode a 2 Mbps data stream is sent transparently over the line In this mode the attributes telindus1031 g703 J crc4lnsertion and telindus1031 g703 chan nel J timeSlots are of no use and may be ignored framed In framed G 704 framing mode up to 32 time slots each containing a 64 kbps data stream can be sent over the line Each 64 kbps time slot can be enabled or disabled individually Refer to telindus1031 g703 channel JtimeSlots on page 184 4 telindus1031 g703 clocking Default slaveReceive Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to select a clocking mode The clocking attribute has the following values slaveReceive The transmit data is clocked out with the clock retrieved from the receive data internal The transmit data is clocked out at an internal clock rate Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 183 Reference manual Configuration attributes ra telindus1031 g703 J crc4lnsertion Default auto Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to determine whether the CRC 4 Cyclic Redundancy Check is recalculat
192. es traffic and priority policy and gives a short description of the attributes you can use to configure these features on the router It also shows you the difference with the traffic policy on the bridge The following gives an overview of this section 7 6 1 Introducing traffic and priority policy on page 131 7 6 2 Traffic and priority policy on routed and bridged data on page 132 7 6 3 How to configure a traffic and priority policy on the router on page 133 7 6 4 Configuring a traffic policy on the router on page 134 7 6 5 Configuring a priority policy on page 135 7 6 6 Applying a routing traffic policy on a certain interface on page 136 7 6 7 Applying a priority policy on a certain interface on page 137 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 131 User manual Configuring the router 7 6 1 Introducing traffic and priority policy What is traffic and priority policy Because of the bursty nature of voice video data traffic sometimes the amount of traffic exceeds the speed of a link At this point the Telindus 1031 Router has to decide what to do with this excess of traffic Buffer the traffic in a single queue and let the first packet in be the first packet out Or put packets into different queues and service certain queues more often also known as priority queuing These questions are dealt with by the traffic and priority policy mechanisms The traffic policy determines on traffic overload conditi
193. ess is configured for the DLCls The characteristics of a set up with a specific IP address for each DLCI are e Each DLCI is an IP interface e Pinging 10 1 0 1 results in a reply when the DLCI is up e Routes learned over one DLCI are passed to other DLCls E g a route learned over DLCI 16 is passed to DLCI 17 This means that split horizon is not applicable Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 6 83 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 3 3 Configuring the DLCis Refer to 6 3 1 Introducing Frame Relay on page 78 for an introduction on DLCls Learning the DLCls If the Frame Relay network supports LMI then the Telindus 1031 Router can learn its active and inactive DLCls If the Frame Relay network also supports the RARP Reverse Address Resolution Protocol pro tocol the Telindus 1031 Router can learn the IP address of the corresponding router for each DLCI Configuring the DLCls If neither LMI nor RARP is supported by the Frame Relay network you can configure the DLCls yourself using the dlciTable Refer to telindus1031 g703 channel J frameRelay dlciTable on page 189 Example The follow 192 168 100 2 ing figure gives an example of a local Ethernet segment connected ee ea a oa router modem Frame Relay r if a gt DLCI 20 ferent net works through three differ ent DLCls 192 168 100 3 a Internet o DLCI 19 92 168 100 4 DLCI 21 The follo
194. et for each object of the Telindus 1031 Router e the alarms that you want to send using the attribute alarmMask e the importance of each alarm using the attribute alarmLevel By default only the most important alarms are enabled 240 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 8 Management configuration attributes gl telindus1031 management cms2Address Default 0 Range 0 65535 Use this attribute to assign an absolute address to the Telindus 1031 Router What is relative and absolute addressing If you want to connect with TMA to a Telindus device you have to specify the address of the device in the Connect window Refer to 4 Managing the Telindus 1031 Router on page 33 There are two different address types relative and absolute The following table explains the difference between these address types relative This type of addressing is meant for a network topology where the Telindus devices are connected in line on management level l e with extended manage ment connections between two Telindus devices An extended management con nection is realised with a crossed cable between the control connectors of two Telindus devices Lan PC running relative 0 relative 1 relative 2 relative 3 TMA extended management connection To enable relative addressing no address has to be specified in the Telindus device absolute This type of addressing is mea
195. et may be destined either for the local network or for the Tel indus 1031 Router itself The router treats incoming traffic on the PAT address as follows The route replies on this request Transport protocol Echo request Search corresponding request and send to TCP UDP originator Send to originator that caused the error Router error message Destination IP address PAT address AND The router forwards the port number previously packet after IP address port allocated port number for number replacement on the outgoing traffic local network Does the PAT address match the IP address of the WAN interface and is this port number known by the router its protocol stack TMA Telnet SNMP TFTP The router treats the packet as a packet destined for him Discard the packet 1 Numbered mode means that each WAN interface has an IP address In that case you need the single official IP address for your WAN interface 122 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 4 5 PAT limitations Example of PAT and multiple remote networks over Frame Relay Suppose your network is connected to the Internet via a Frame Relay network and to another site that does not have official IP addresses either Now you have to choose whether to apply PAT to e all traffic towards the Frame Relay network or e the traffic destined for th
196. et with the bridgeTimeOut attribute This in case no topology change is detected otherwise the time out is equal to the value of the bridgeForwardDelay ele ment of the spanningTree attribute When checking the bridgeCache it may appear that some entries are present for a longer time than is con figured with the bridgeTimeOut attribute This because the entries in the bridgeCache are not monitored con tinuously but once per minute As a result some entries may appear to be overtime However this should be no more than 75 seconds rj Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 233 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup name Default bridge Range 1 24 characters Use this attribute to assign an administrative name to the bridge telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup ip Default lt empty gt Range structure see below Use this attribute to configure the IP related parameters of the bridge Important remark If you set the configuration attribute telindus1031 laninterface mode to bridging then the settings of the config uration attribute telindus1031 laninterface ip are ignored As a result if you want to manage the Telindus 1031 Router via IP you have to configure an IP address in the bridgeGroup object instead telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup ip Refer to 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 58 for a detailed description of the ip structure telindus103
197. ferent states when the bridge is powered Power on initialisation When you enable Spanning Tree every bridge in the net work goes through the transitory states of listening and learning at power up If properly configured each port sta bilises to the forwarding or blocking state Blocking sette state When the spanning tree algorithm places a port in the for warding state the following process occurs Listeni Disabl 1 The port is put into the listening state while it waits for eae alt protocol information that suggests it should go to the blocking state Forward delay 2 The port waits for the expiration of the forward delay timer moves the port to the learning state and resets the forward delay timer Learning state 3 Inthe learning state the port continues to block frame Forward delay forwarding as it learns station location information for the forwarding database Forwarding state 4 The port waits for the expiration of the forward delay timer and then moves the port to the forwarding state where both learning and forwarding are ena bled Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 8 145 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 6 The Spanning Tree Bridge Protocol Data Unit What is a BPDU To establish a stable path each bridge sends Configuration Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs to its neighbouring bridges These Configuration BPDU messages contain information about the spannin
198. filter functionality of the bridge The bridgeCache attribute has the following values learning The bridge acts as a fil ter Data coming from net work 1 will only be let through by the bridge if network networks this data has a destina tion outside network 1 or if it has a broadcast or multicast address This means the bridge filters the data and decreases the amount of data traffic on the separated LAN segments Bridge disabled The bridge acts as a repeater All the data which originates from network 1 will be let through to network 2 Even if the data is not destined for that network What is the bridge cache Whereas the ARP cache keeps MAC address IP address pairs the bridge cache also called address database keeps MAC address interface pairs This allows the bridge to know which device is reacha ble through which interface Refer to telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup bridgeCache on page 289 for an example of such a table telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup bridgeTimeOut Default 00000d 00h 05m 00s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s Use this attribute to set the ageing time of the bridge cache entries ae 24855d 03h es a The bridge cache time out If devices on the network are re moved then the MAC address interface relation changes refer to What is the bridge cache Therefore the bridge cache entries are automatically removed from the cache after a fixed time out This time out period can be s
199. for more information on the interpretation of the LEDs interfaces This reflects the status of the interfaces The possible indications are There is no alarm active in the corresponding interface object An alarm is active in the corresponding interface object The colours of the interfaces only change if the alarms related to the interface object are set to enabled in the alarmMask Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 15 341 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1031 Router 15 Auto installing the Telindus 1031 Router Auto install includes a number of features that allow you to partially or completely configure the Telindus 1031 Router without on site intervention The following gives an overview of this chapter 15 1 What is BootP and DHCP on page 342 15 2 Getting the LAN IP address on page 343 15 3 Getting the configuration with TFTP on page 344 15 4 Creating configuration files on page 347 15 5 Creating a binary configuration file on page 348 15 6 Creating an ASCII configuration file on page 349 342 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 15 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1031 Router 15 1 Whatis BootP and DHCP BootP and DHCP are very similar protocols IP devices without IP address use them to obtain an IP address Compliance BootP complies with RFC951 DHCP complies with RFC2131 and RFC2132 In both protocols the client IP device sends a limited broadcast request on its i
200. g tree topology The contents of these frames only changes when the bridged network topology changes or has not been established Each Configuration BPDU contains the following minimal information The unique bridge identifier of the bridge that the transmitting bridge believes to be the root bridge The cost of the path to the root from the transmitting port The unique port identifier of the transmitting port When a bridge transmits a BPDU frame all bridges connected to the LAN on which the frame is trans mitted receive the BPDU When a bridge receives a BPDU it does not forward the frame Instead it uses the information in the frame to e calculate a BPDU e initiate a BPDU transmission if the topology changes The propagation of Configuration BDPUs When a bridged network is in a stable condition switches continue to send Configuration BPDUs to its neighbouring bridges at regular intervals Configuration BPDUs are transmitted down the spanning tree from designated ports to root ports If a Configuration BPDU is not received by the root port of a bridge within a predefined time interval for example because a bridge along the path has dropped out the port enters the listening state to re determine a stable path 146 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 8 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 7 The Spanning Tree behaviour The following are some examples of how Spanning Tree behaves when certain events occur in your net work
201. g TOUUNGE 2 oina Moana aa eae elie ote Gals nant aE Ah Aaa OANA Saaai 98 7 2 Configuring static TOUES wesc ter khk ikka huis onda dada davagetestaieeahh nenateeesdeaantaeagiied 100 7 3 Configuring the Routing Information Protocol x mnnrnes 107 7 4 Configuring address translation nnnenrrnnannrs 116 7 5 Configuring L2TP tunnelling siscccdscg otevevcascecaseeeavapncedancuseqeevane MUSU tavale ces 127 7 6 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the router urrrs 130 7 7 Configuring an extended access list ernrennnnnennennnnnnnt 138 8 Configuring the BrIAGE eea aimakk Sa Side A 139 8 1 1Atroduting BIIAGINGS si susi i au kaema ui t t ot E tip dentnces 140 8 2 The self learning and Transparent Spanning Tree bridge 1 141 8 3 The Spanning Tree root bridge eaeennneennananenananaeenennnnenananaanannenannaa 142 8 4 The Spanning Tree topology 5 141544 000 reetis beeen eines 143 8 5 The Spanning Tree bridge port states nnnnenneannnnanannnnennneaa 144 8 6 The Spanning Tree Bridge Protocol Data Unit mennrns 145 8 7 The Spanning Tree behaviour ss 00cc tembu m t costs Aven lakata emamaa deltad a 146 8 8 The Spanning Tree priority and cost nnennnneeneenennnnenennnaaaena 1
202. g the alarm attributes of the Telindus 1031 Router in detail some general information on the alarm attributes of the Telindus 1031 Router is given The following gives an overview of this chapter e 13 2 1 Configuration alarm attributes on page 330 e 13 2 2 General alarm attributes on page 331 330 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 13 Reference manual Alarm attributes 13 2 1 Configuration alarm attributes telindus1031 alarmMask Use this attribute to enable unmasked or disable masked for each alarm of the corresponding object whether it is communicated to the central management system e g HP OpenView or not Alarms are always seen in the alarminfo alarm attribute of an object regardless of the masking of the alarm l e even if an alarm is set to disabled in the alarmMask of an object if the alarm condition is fulfilled then the alarm will be set to on in the alarminfo of that object However because this alarm is disabled it will not be sent to the central management system e g HP OpenView Only the most important alarms are unmasked i e enabled by default All other alarms are masked i e disabled telindus1031 alarmLevel Use this attribute to assign a priority level to each alarm of the corresponding object The alarm level range goes from 0 to 254 where 0 is the lowest and 254 is the highest priority level The alarmLevel of an unmasked active alarm is sent to the totalAlarmLevel alarm attri
203. gure the L2TP related parameters of the tunnel The I2tp structure contains the following elements Benet oeseepton O locallpAddress Use this element to set the official IP address that Default lt opt gt serves as start point of the L2TP connection Range up to 255 255 255 255 remotelpAddress Use this element to set the official IP address that Default lt opt gt serves as end point of the L2TP connection Range up to 255 255 255 255 Both locallpAddress and remotelpAddress together with the well known port number for L2TP i e 1701 make up the socket used for the L2TP session At the moment only one L2TP session can exist between one locallpAddress and remotelpAddress combination pppAuthentication Use this element to enable or disable CHAP authenti Default disabled cation on the PPP connection in the tunnel Range enabled disabled Refer to telindus1031 g703 J channel ppp authentication on page 187 for more informa tion Use this element to specify the tunnel type Default outgoingDial Range enumerated see below The type element has the following values outgoingDial The outgoing tunnel is not continuously open It is opened whenever data has to be sent through the tun nel and closed when no data is detected for a certain time outgoingLeasedLine The outgoing tunnel is opened as soon as the Telindus 1031 Router is up and it stays open incom
204. gured it If you did not configure a name then this element displays lt WAN interface name gt dlci lt dlci number gt E g wan dici 16 ifOperStatus This is the current operational status of the DLCI ifLastChange This is the system up time on the moment the DLCI entered its current operational state l e the moment the value of the ifOperStatus element changes from up to down or vice versa the system up time value is written into the ifLastChange element This displays the IP information of the DLCI Refer to telindus1031 g703 J channel frameRelay dlciTable ip on page 267 for a detailed description of the ip structure bridging This displays the bridging information of the DLCI Refer to telindus1031 laninterface bridging on page 254 for a detailed description of the bridging structure frameRelay This displays the specific Frame Relay related status information of the DLCI Refer to telindus1031 g703 channel J frameRelay dlciTable frameRelay on page 267 for a detailed description of the frameRelay structure Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 267 Reference manual Status attributes telindus1031 g703 J channel frameRelay dliciTable ip The ip structure in the diciTable displays the IP information of the DLCI The ip structure contains the following elements a 1 TT address This is the IP address of the DLCI It is either configured or retrieved automatically ne
205. guring maintaining and terminating the point to point connection e A family of Network Control Protocols NCPs for establishing and configuring different network layer protocols such as the IP Control Protocol IPCP or the Bridge Control Protocol BCP What is CHAP The Telindus 1031 Router also features the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP This is a standardised authentication protocol in compliance with RFC1994 over PPP links The password is hashed before sending it over the link The used hashing algorithm is MD5 CHAP authentication over a link can be performed in one direction or in both directions The PPP handshake PPP makes a handshake in two phases CE The Link Control Protocol LCP builds the link layer The IP Control Protocol IPCP prepares the exchange of IP packets Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 6 75 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 2 2 Configuring an IP address on the PPP WAN When you use PPP encapsulation on the WAN interface you can configure the IP related parameters using the ip structure in the ppp object Refer to 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 58 for a detailed description of the ip structure 6 2 3 Configuring link monitoring Refer to 6 2 1 Introducing PPP on page 74 for an introduction on link monitoring The PPP protocol features link monitoring You can use this to verify whether the WAN link is up or down If link monito
206. guring the bridge 8 10 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the bridge This section introduces traffic and priority policy and gives a short description of the attributes you can use to configure these features on the bridge The following gives an overview of this section e 8 10 1 How to configure a traffic and priority policy on the bridge on page 155 e 8 10 2 Configuring a traffic policy on the bridge on page 156 e 8 10 3 Applying a bridging traffic policy on a certain interface on page 157 q Refer to e 7 6 1 Introducing traffic and priority policy on page 131 for an introduction on traffic and priority pol icy e 7 6 2 Traffic and priority policy on routed and bridged data on page 132 for the difference between traffic and priority policy on the bridge and the router Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 8 155 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 10 1 How to configure a traffic and priority policy on the bridge Refer to 7 6 1 Introducing traffic and priority policy on page 131 for an introduction The following table explains you step by step how to configure a traffic and priority policy on the bridge To configure a traffic and priority policy for the bridged data of a certain interface proceed as follows Add a trafficPolicy object under the bridge object and give it a certain index name e g trafficPolicy my_traffic_policy Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 45 Configu
207. h it goes down again This continues for a certain time In other words the route status toggles between up and down Every time the status of route X changes Router A sends a RIP update message to router B Also router B propagates these RIP update messages In other words the toggling of route X causes that a lot of RIP update messages are sent The ripHoldDownTime attribute tries to avoid situations as described above Suppose router B has a ripHoldDownTime attribute In that case the situation is as follows 1 Route X goes down Router A sends a RIP update message to router B declaring route X down Router B starts the RIP hold down timer 2 The status of route X starts toggling between up and down gt Router A sends several RIP update messages concerning route X to router B Router B holds the status of route X down as longs as the RIP hold down timer has not expired q When the RIP hold down timer expires and the route is down then the route status stays down up then the route status changes to up 206 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes kal telindus1031 router ripv2SecretTable Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to define the secrets used for the RIP authentication 9 Refer to 7 3 4 Configuring RIP authentication on page 115 for more information on RIP authentication The ripv2SecretTable table contains the following
208. hat only uses private addresses A PPP link connects your site to the Internet Service Provider At your site a Telindus 1031 Router is installed You only received 2 official IP addresses from the ISP one for all outgoing traffic using PAT 195 7 12 22 and one for accessing the local web server using NAT 195 7 12 21 with a dedicated pri vate address IP address WAN interface PAT address 195 7 12 22 IP address LAN interface 192 168 47 254 your site Router modem IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 serial intf IP address WAN interface 195 7 12 254 Frame Relay or PDH SDH network MD 6 bs ISP The configuration of the Telindus 1031 Router in CLI format is as follows action Load Default Configuration SET SELECT lanInterface LIST ip address 192 168 47 254 mode routing SELECT g703 1 SELECT channel g703 1 LIST encapsulation ppp SELECT ppp LIST ip address 195 7 12 22 nat default SELECT router LIST defaultRoute gateway 195 7 12 254 SELECT defaultNat LIST patAddress 195 7 12 22 addresses a officialAddress 195 7 12 21 privateAddress 192 168 47 250 action Activate Configuration Chapter 9 Configuration examples 164 Telindus 1031 Router User manual 9 5 Using PAT over PPP with a minimum of official IP addresse
209. he Telindus 1031 Router For example e model files in case you want to manage the network units that are connected to the Telindus 1031 Router with a management application that requires these e g ATWIN CLI Web Interface etc e configuration files of network units for the purpose of configuration consistency distribution application software of network units for the purpose of software consistency distribution etc In fact any file can be downloaded to the file system of the Telindus 1031 Router You can do this using the same tools you use to download application software These tools are e TMA refer to 16 2 Downloading application software using TMA on page 355 TFTP refer to 16 3 Downloading application software using TFTP on page 356 e TML refer to 16 4 Downloading application or loader software using TML on page 357 The major difference is that instead of specifying conTROL as target filename for the application software you now can specify any filename as target filename In the Remote filename window Fa ey sees ES do the following Lookin E Tma aj a i 2 ja T2114009 00 EI Tmath exe 1 Select the file you want to 5 Cms2Serv ini ja T2122009 00 E TmaTttp exi down load e d sdsitt mod i aa Cms2 erv ini java le T2752011 00 E tmi exe 9 aa models nms 7 Tdebug exe Mimi A Type the target filename in the m SDSL_TT_configuration cms T TMA exe a Uninst4 isu i E B 5 TMA ini
210. he alarm attributes on page 329 for general information on the alarm attributes Ta telindus1031 alarminfo The different alarms related to the telindus1031 object together with their explanation and default alarmMask and alarmLevel value are given in the following table The alarm is generated Default value alarmMask alarmLevel notResponding by the management concentrator when the Telindus enabled 1031 Router does not respond on its polling session alarmSyncLoss when the internal alarm buffer overflows enabled configChanged when the local configuration has been changed disabled access when a management session is started on the Telindus disabled 1031 Router itself This alarm is not activated when the management session is established through a manage ment concentrator Example The alarm is activated in case of a TMA TMA CLI terminal CLI or ATWIN or Easy Connect session via the control connector of the Tel indus 1031 Router a TMA TMA CLI TMA for HP OpenView Telnet CLI or ATWIN HTTP Web Interface or TFTP session using the LAN WAN IP address of the Telindus 1031 Router The alarm is not activated in case of any management session TMA terminal Telnet HTTP etc established through a management con centrator on the Telindus 1031 Router SNMP management unknownState each time a new Telindus 1031 Router is added to the disabled network and before the manag
211. he monitoring of protocol performance by the management sys tem forwardDelay This is the time out value to be used by all bridges in the bridged LAN for abridge port applies to move from listening state to learning state or from learn ing state to forwarding state time out or ageing for purging MAC addresses from the bridge cache in case a topology change is detected The forwardDelay element displays the value as it is set by the root bridge This infor mation is conveyed by the root bridge to ensure that each bridge in the bridged LAN has a consistent value for the forward delay timer topologyChange This is a Boolean value 0 or 1 to report e fora bridge that is not a root bridge whether or not the most recently accepted Configuration BPDU indicates a change in the active topology e for the root bridge whether or not a change in topology has been detected within the preceding topologyChangeTime period The topologyChange element is used to propagate the topology change indication in transmitted Configuration BPDUs e determine whether the short bridgeForwardDelay or long bridgeTimeOut time out or ageing value is used to purge dynamic MAC addresses from the bridge cache topologyChange This is a Boolean value 0 or 1 to report that a topology change has been detected Detection by or notified to the bridge topologyChange This displays the time during which the root bridge transmits Configur
212. he network topology as depicted in 7 4 3 Configuring PAT on page 119 The following two paragraphs explain how the Telindus 1031 Router treats the outgoing and incoming traffic when PAT is applied Outgoing traffic to the Internet The Telindus 1031 Router replaces the source address by its PAT address in all the traffic coming from the Ethernet and destined for the Internet Depending on the IP transport protocol and the number of simultaneous users accessing the Internet the Telindus 1031 Router takes different actions Protocol Description This is a connection oriented protocol two devices communicating with the TCP protocol build a session before exchanging user data When they have finished exchanging user data the session is closed Examples of such applications are Telnet HTTP and FTP The TCP header contains a port field indicating the higher layer protocol Action When a session is started a specific port number is assigned to this ses sion All traffic from this session is assigned this specific port number The specific port number is freed within 5 minutes after the TCP session is closed i e after TCP Reset or TCP Finish is seen If the session has not been properly closed the port number is freed 24 hours after the last ses sion traffic This time is configurable refer to telindus1031 router defaultNat tcp SocketTimeOut on page 217 Description This is a connection less protocol user data can
213. hich the root bridge can be reached Conseguently the root bridge itself does not have a root port All other bridges must have a root port designated This is the designated port for this virtual LAN All ports of the root bridge are designated ports alternate This port is not active Either because of a management action or through protocol intervention Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 255 Reference manual Status attributes ene e a designatedPriority Together these two elements form a unigue bridge identifier Depending whether the current port is a designated port or not these two elements display the unigue bridge identifier of designatedMac the bridge to which this port belongs in case of a designated port e the bridge believed to be the designated bridge for the LAN that is currently connected to this port in all other cases This bridge identifier is used e together with the designatedPortPriority and designatedPortld attributes to determine whether this port should be the designated port for the LAN that is currently connected to this port to test the value of the bridge identifier parameter conveyed in received Config uration BPDUs designatedPort Together these two elements form a unique port identifier They display the Priority unique port identifier of the bridge port through which the designated bridge trans designatedPortld mits the configuration message informatio
214. ibute can be found under the wanInterface object telindus1031 g703 channelf priorityPolicy This implies that in case of Frame Relay you can not specify a priority policy per DLCI In case of ATM however you can specify a priority policy per PVC To do so use the priorityPolicy element in the pvcTable under the ATM object telindus1031 g703 channel atm pvcTable priorityPolicy 1 The interface can be a physical interface such as the LAN interface but can also be a DLCI a PVC a tunnel etc 138 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 7 Configuring an extended access list In case you set the telindus1031 router trafficPolicy method attribute to trafficShaping default value then you can use the telindus1031 router trafficPolicy trafficShaping attribute to set up an extended access list The extended access list itself is activated by specifying the trafficPolicy object its index name ina trafficPolicy element of a certain interface Example Suppose you want to set up an extended access list on the LAN interface Then proceed as follows w pooo S Add a trafficPolicy object to the containment tree Refer i to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on Ga tunnete page 45 24 trafficPolicy my traffic policy Suppose you name itmy traffic policy Go to the ip attribute in the laninterface object In the ip attribute enter the index name of the a
215. ibutes telindus1031 router defaultNat socketsFree This attribute shows the remaining number of new connections i e sockets that can be initiated A socket is a set of source and destination IP addresses and port numbers Initially 2048 simultaneous sockets can be initiated Sockets are freed using a garbage mechanism This means that every five minutes all sockets are checked If a socket has been released by PAT or NAT then this socket is returned to the pool of free sockets ICMP and UDP sockets are released when they have no data traffic during five minutes TCP sockets are released after the TCP session has been closed or when the session has been idle for 24 hours telindus1031 router defaultNat allocFails If no sockets are available anymore but an attempt to set up a new connection is being made then the natAllocFails attribute value is incremented by 1 Because the sockets are distributed using a hashing function it is possible that natAllocFails increases even though natSocketsFree still indicates free sockets ICMP requires a new socket for each transmitted packet This implies that for instance a permanent ping or trace route command may eventually use all free sockets telindus1031 router defaultNat discards This attribute indicates how many times a packet has been discarded for reasons other than a lack of free sockets This could be for instance because an attempt was made to connect from the Internet to a
216. if the configuration element telindus1031 waninterface ppp linkMonitoring operation is set to disabled then it is possible that the wanInterface ifOperStatus value does not go down even if the link qual ity is too bad for a proper data link This because the link monitoring mechanism is the only PPP mechanism that will start a renegotiation of the LCP layer e Incase of ATM if the configuration element telindus1031 wanInterface atm pvcTable atm oamF5Loopback is set to disabled then the ifOperStatus of the PVC becomes up when the ATM is synchronised globally However this does not guarantee that the PVC is configured correctly on the remote side However the other conditions as stated in the table above remain Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 261 Reference manual Status attributes 11 4 3 PPP status attributes ra telindus1031 g703 channel ppp ip This attribute displays the IP information of the PPP link The ip structure contains the following elements mon pee O status This is the current operational status of the IP layer layer 3 of the PPP link address This is the IP address of the PPP link It is either configured or retrieved automat ically netMask This is the IP subnet mask of the PPP link It is either configured or retrieved auto matically remote This is the IP address of the remote end of the PPP link It is either configured or retrieved automatically ra telindus1031 g703 channe
217. ignal also called all ones is detected on the incoming data E g a device application in the network detected a problem and communicates this to the other devices in the network 4 telindus1031 g703 openCircuit This attribute displays on off whether the transmit side is connected or not Open circuit is on when e g the connection from the Telindus 1031 Router towards the WAN is interrupted ra telindus1031 g703 rxLevel This attribute displays the signal level in dB of the incoming data Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 259 Reference manual Status attributes 11 4 2 G703 channel status attributes i telindus1031 g703 J channel JifDescr This attribute displays the interface description This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter kal telindus1031 g703 J channel JifType This attribute displays the interface type This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1031 g703 channel JifLastChange This attribute shows the system up time on the moment the interface entered its current operational state l e the moment the value of the ifOperStatus status attribute changes from up to down or vice versa the system up time value is written into the ifLastChange status attribute This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1031 g703 channel JifSpeed This attribute displays the interface speed in bits per second bps This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter kal telindus1031 g703 J channel J ifMtu This att
218. ily features on page 7 1 3 3 Telindus 1031 Router features on page 8 1 3 4 Telindus 1032 Router features on page 8 1 3 5 Telindus 1033 Router features on page 9 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 1 7 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1031 Router 1 3 1 How to distinguish the different members of the Telindus 1030 Router family Every router of the Telindus 1030 Router family has the same front panel The only way to distinguish them from one another is by looking at the back panel These are displayed in the following sections 1 3 2 Common Telindus 1030 Router family features The major features that apply on all the members of the Telindus 1030 Router family are high performance routing and bridging e encapsulation of LAN traffic for transmission over a WAN network support of differentiated services based on VPNs controllable by a wide set of management tools e acontrol connector CTRL to connect various management tools to the 1030 Router locally e g TMA CLI EasyConnect etc or to connect Telindus devices that have to be managed by the 1030 Router i e the 1030 Router as management concentrator e an auxiliary connector AUX to connect Telindus devices that have to be managed by the 1030 Router i e the 1030 Router as management concentrator 8 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 1 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1031 Router 1 3 3 Telindus 1031 Router features The following displays the back pan
219. in both directions fullEnguiryinterval Use this element to set the number of Status Enquiry Default 6 intervals that have to elapse before sending a Full Range 1 255 Status Enquiry message Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 193 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 4 5 ATM configuration attributes Important remark You can only use ATM encapsulation on the G703 interface when you selected framed mode not when you selected unframed mode refer to telindus1031 9703 J framing on page 182 telindus1031 g703 J channel J atm pvcTable Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to configure the ATM Permanent Virtual Circuits PVCs Refer to 6 4 3 Configuring the PVCs on page 90 for more information on PVCs The pvcTable contains the following elements KES per O OO OO Use this element to assign an administrative name to Default lt empty gt the PVC Range 0 24 characters adminStatus Use this element to activate up or deactivate down Default up the PVC Range up down mode Use this element to determine whether for the corre Default routing sponding PVC the packets are treated by the routing Range enumerated see below process the bridging process or both The mode element has the following values bridging All packets received on the PVC are bridged routing All packets received on the PVC are routed
220. indus 1031 Router Chapter 13 Reference manual Alarm attributes Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 14 339 Reference manual TMA sub system picture 14 TMA sub system picture The sub system picture is a TMA tool that visualises the status information of the Telindus 1031 Router This chapter explains how to display the sub system picture and how to interpret the visual indications How to display the sub system picture To display the sub system picture of the Telindus 1031 Router click on the sub system picture button located in the TMA toolbar a Structure of the sub system picture This paragraph displays and labels the different elements of the sub system picture It also explains how the visual indications should be interpreted Below the Telindus 1031 Router sub system picture is dis played comirel0 OF x Cy Zoomin Zoom ut Options Ferg UN TELINDUS 1030 Router Series PWR mir ACT m Sa mr rt AGT ra A a B a C a E a E a SD Hs inti CTRL DCE AUX DTE R5538 DTE olk M ow ces er Om 340 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 14 Reference manual TMA sub system picture The following table gives an overview of the sub system picture elements and what they indicate These reflect the actual status of the device The LED indication on the sub system picture corresponds with the LED indication on the Telindus 1031 Router itself Refer to 2 6 The front panel LED indicators on page 24
221. indus1031 sysName sysContact sysLocation bootFromFlash security alarmMask alarmLevel Action Activate Configuration Action Load Saved Configuration Action Load Default Configuration Action Cold Boot gt gt laninterface name ip arp mode bridging adapter alarmMask alarmLevel gt gt g703 1 coding framing Clocking crc4insertion longHaul jitterAttenuation alarmMask alarmLevel gt gt gt channel g703 1 timeSlots encapsulation priorityPolicy maxFifoQLen alarmMask alarmLevel gt gt gt gt ppp ip mode bridging linkMonitoring authentication authenPeriod gt gt gt gt frameRelay ip dlciTable Imi gt gt gt gt atm pvcTable atmConfig gt gt gt gt hdlic bridging gt gt router defaultRoute routingTable routingProtocol alternativeRoutes ripUpdatelnterval ripHoldDownTime ripv2SecretTable sysSecret pppSecretTable helperProtocols sendTtlExceeded sendPortUnreachable sendAdminUnreachable dhcpStatic dhcpDynamic dhcpCheckAddress alarmMask alarmLevel Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual Chapter 10 173 Configuration attributes gt gt gt defaultNat patAddress portTranslations servicesAvailable addresses gateway tepSocketTimeOut udpSocketTimeOut tcpSockets udpSockets dmzHost gt gt gt tunnels I2tpTunnels gt gt gt routingFilter 1 filter gt gt gt trafficPolicy ih method trafficShaping tos2QueueMapping
222. indus1031 lanInterface ipAdEntBcastAddr This attribute displays the value of the least significant bit in the IP broadcast address This address is used for sending packets on the interface which is associated with the IP address of this entry The value applies to the general broadcast the subnet and network broadcasts This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1031 lanInterface ipAdEntReasmMaxSize This attribute displays the size of the largest IP packet which this entity can re assemble from incoming IP fragmented packets received on this interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter WS telindus1031 lanInterface clearArpCache If you execute this action the ARP cache table is cleared Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 257 Reference manual Status attributes 11 4 WAN interface status attributes This section discusses the status attributes of the WAN interface First it describes the status attributes of the physical interface Then it explains the status attributes of the encapsulation protocols that can be used on the interface The following gives an overview of this section e 11 4 1 G703 interface status attributes on page 258 e 11 4 2 G703 channel status attributes on page 259 e 11 4 3 PPP status attributes on page 261 e 11 4 4 Frame Relay status attributes on page 266 e 11 4 5 ATM status attributes on page 270 e 11 4 6 HDLC status attributes on page 272 258 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Reference
223. ing The tunnel is an incoming tunnel dataChannelSe Use this element to enable on or disable off Default off guenceNumbering sequence numbering on the data messages These _ Range on off seguence numbers are used to detect lost packets and or restore the original seguence of packets that may have been reordered dur ing transport On control messages seguence numbering is always enabled Itis recommended that for connections where reordering or packet loss may occur dataChannelSequenceNumbering is enabled 220 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes Ja a elaglalg keepAliveTimeOut Use this element to set the amount of time in sec Default 30 onds the tunnel waits before it sends a keep alive Range 1 3600 message in case it receives no data If the tunnel does not receive incoming data during a certain time it sends a keep alive message to the other side and waits for an acknowledgement I2tpMode Use this element to set the L2TP function of the Telindus 1031 Router The I2tpMode element has the following values The Telindus 1031 Router acts as an L2TP Access Con centrator The Telindus 1031 Router acts as an L2TP Network Server If both local and remote Telindus 1031 Router are set to auto they mutually decide who will be the LAC and who the LNS Select auto only if you use a Telindus router at both sides of the tunnel
224. inology concerning the management of a Telindus device It explains terms such as containment tree group object attribute value and action The following gives an overview of this section 4 2 1 Graphical representation of the containment tree on page 41 e 4 2 2 Containment tree terminology on page 42 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 4 41 User manual Managing the Telindus 1031 Router 4 2 1 Graphical representation of the containment tree The most comprehensible graphical representation of the containment tree is given in TMA The follow ing figure depicts the TMA window displaying a containment tree TMA com 1 olx Connect Edit View Tools Help Alel 218 ool ia xl Containment tree crocusShdslTt Configuration Status E Perfomance lt Alarms groups line containment tree linePail1 linePair 2 B 9703 sysLocation security forwardT maT oCtrlPort forwardT maT oLine objects attributes alarmMask A alarmLevel Struct gt MqoteAlarmMask 00000009 Action g fivate Configuration Load Saved Configuration Load Default Configuration err Se Ali te ls t ad actions Y alamMask Han E BitN falarmS yncLoss enabled configChanged disabled access disabled remoteAlarm disabled unknownState disabled coldBoot disabled warmBoot disabled codeConsistencyFail disabled sufigConsistencyFail disabled structured value
225. ion BPDUs as the value of the root path cost parameter in transmitted Configuration rootPort This is the port identifier of the port that offers the lowest cost path to the root If two or more ports offer equal least cost paths to the root bridge then the root port is selected to be that with the highest designatedPriority i e the lowest numerical value If two or more ports offer equal least cost paths to the root bridge and the same designatedPriority then the root port is selected to be that with the highest designatedPortPriority i e the lowest numerical value Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 291 Reference manual Status attributes Se bridgePriority Together these two attributes form the unique bridge identifier of this bridge bridgeMAC maxAge This is the time out value to be used by all bridges in the bridged LAN for discard ing bridging information The maxAge element displays the value as it is set by the root bridge This informa tion is conveyed by the root bridge to ensure that each bridge in the bridged LAN has a consistent value against which to test the age of stored configuration infor mation helloTime This is the interval between the generation of Configuration BPDUs by the root bridge The helloTime element displays the value as it is set by the root bridge This attribute is not directly used by the Spanning Tree algorithm but it is conveyed by the root bridge to facilitate t
226. irst served is applied l e the DLCI on which the burst occurred first its data is passed on to the Frame Relay network If however somewhere else on the network a congestion occurs it is still possible that some of the excess data is discarded e Suppose you assign to both DLCls a CIR of 2 Mbps and an EIR of 0 gt In that case you over dimensioned your CIR You can not guarantee 2 Mbps of bandwidth for both DLCls due to the bandwidth limit of 2 Mbps on the physical connection Also in this case the prin ciple of first come first served is applied 1 e the DLCI which sends data first gets its data onto the Frame Relay network 86 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 4 Configuring ATM encapsulation This section introduces the ATM encapsulation protocol and gives a short description of the attributes you can use to configure this encapsulation protocol The following gives an overview of this section 6 4 1 Introducing ATM on page 87 e 6 4 2 Configuring IP addresses on the ATM WAN on page 89 e 6 4 3 Configuring the PVCs on page 90 e 6 4 4 Configuring the PCR on page 91 e 6 4 5 Configuring multi protocol over ATM on page 94 e 6 4 6 Configuring Classical IP on page 94 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 6 87 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 4 1 Introducing ATM What is ATM ATM is a cell switching and multiplexing technology th
227. is purchase is an extremely important priority to all of us at Telindus Accord ingly all electronic functional and cosmetic aspects of this new unit have been carefully and thoroughly tested and inspected If any fault is found with this unit or should you have any other guality related com ment concerning this delivery please submit the Quality Comment Form on our web page at http www telindusproducts com quality Telindus 1031 Router Preface v User and reference manual Typographical conventions The following typographical conventions are used in this manual normal text new or emphasised words application windows buttons and fields E g In the File name field enter Computer text you have to enter at the DOS or CLI prompt computer output and code examples E g NOK 1 1 Invalid command Computer Bold text you have to enter at the DOS or CLI prompt when it is part of a mix of com puter input and output E g 01003 Edit Configuration gt get sysName sysName Orchid 1003 LAN 01003 Edit Configuration gt Narrow containment tree objects and attributes of a device when they are mentioned in the normal text l e when they are not a part of computer input or output E g Use the sysName attribute in order to references to other parts in the manual E g Refer to xx Title for more information Blue underline e a hyperlink to a web site E g http www telindus com
228. ishment are No control connection is present Both initiator and recipient start from this state An initiator transmits a Start Control Connection Request while a recipient remains in the idle state until receiving a Start Control Connection Request waitCtlReply This is the state where a Start Control Connection Reply is awaited waitCtIConn This is the state where a Start Control Connection Connected is awaited Upon receipt the challenge response is checked The tunnel either is established or is torn down if an authorisation failure is detected established The control connection is established An established connection may be terminated by either a local condition or the receipt of a Stop Control Connection Notification The session then returns to the idle state 284 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes L2TP status call states The states associated with the LNS or LAC incoming or outgoing calls are idle No data is exchanged over the tunnel waitTunnel This is the state in which is waited either for the control connection to be opened e or for verification that the tunnel is already open Once an indication is received that the tunnel has was opened session control messages may be exchanged The first of these is the Incoming Call Request waitReply This is the state where an Incoming or Outgoing Call Reply message is awaited If an Incoming or Ou
229. ived on the same interface as the one through which the destination address can be reached e it was received on an interface that is not in the forwarding state ra telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup bridgeFloods This attribute displays the number of times a frame was flooded on all interfaces because itwas a broadcast multicast the position of the station with the destination MAC address was not known yet 320 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 5 2 Bridge access list performance attributes ra telindus1031 bridge accessList bridgeAccessList This attribute shows information on the use of the bridge access list The bridgeAccessList table contains the following elements eon Bessie macAddress This is the MAC address as configured in the configuration attribute telindus1031 bridge accessList J bridgeAccessList This indicates the number of times a packet has been discarded for the corre sponding MAC address Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 321 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 6 Management performance attributes telindus1031 management cms2SessionCount This attribute displays the number of CMS2 sessions that are currently active on the Telindus 1031 Router There are always minimum two fixed sessions active Connecting with TMA TMA CLI Telnet etc opens additional sessions This is explained in the following table Session cou
230. k The IcpMyOptions table contains the following elements The Telindus 1031 Router supports the following LCP options This is the Authentication Protocol option This is the Magic Number option For more information on the LCP configuration options refer to RFC1661 This is the length of the option field This is the option value represented as an octet string hexadecimal ASCII repre sentation telindus1031 g703 J channel ppp IcpHisOptions This attribute lists the LCP options for the router at the other side remote side of the link The lepMyOptions table contains the same elements as the telindus1031 g703 channel ppp lepMyOptions table Other option values than the ones supported by the Telindus 1031 Router may be present Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 263 Reference manual Status attributes telindus1031 g703 channel ppp ipcpMyOptions During the IPCP handshake a number of options can be exchanged between the local and remote side of the link This attribute lists the IPCP options for the router at this side local side of the link The ipcpMyOptions table contains the following elements KN 1 TASE The Telindus 1031 Router supports the following IPCP option 3 the IP Address option For more information on the IPCP configuration options refer to RFC1332 This is the length of the option field This is the option value represented as an octet string hexadeci
231. l ppp lcpState This attribute reflects the status of the LCP Link Control Protocol protocol Possible values are Initial LCP handshake has not started yet Starting Closed These values correspond with the transient states in the LCP state diagram Stopped Closing Stopping Req Sent The local side of the PPP link has sent an LCP request The remote side did not answer yet Ack Revd The local side of the PPP link has received an LCP acknowledge from the remote side This is a transient state Ack Sent The local side of the PPP link has acknowledged the LCP request from the remote side Opened The LCP handshake succeeded ra telindus1031 g703 channel ppp ipcpState This attribute reflects the status of the IPCP Internet Protocol Control Protocol protocol The possible values are the same as those of telindus1031 g703 J channelf ppp IcpState ra telindus1031 g703 channel ppp bcpState This attribute reflects the status of the BCP Bridging Control Protocol protocol The possible values are the same as those of telindus1031 g703 J channel J ppp lepState 262 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes k telindus1031 g703 J channel ppp lepMyOptions During the LCP handshake a number of options can be exchanged between the local and remote side of the link This attribute lists the LCP options for the router at this side local side of the lin
232. larmMask alarmLevel linkDown when no valid LAN data is detected l e when the con enabled 3 nection between the interface and the LAN is down Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual 13 5 G703 interface alarms Chapter 13 335 Alarm attributes Refer to 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 329 for general information on the alarm attributes telindus1031 g703 J alarminfo The alarms related to the g703 object together with their explanation and default alarmMask and alarmLevel value are given in the following table The alarm linkDown is generated when the incoming data is no longer present E g the connection from the WAN towards the Telindus 1031 Router is interrupted Default value alarmMask disabled alarmLevel when the Frame Alignment Signal FAS which is present in time slot 0 of the G 704 framed data is not detected after a certain period This alarm is also generated when the crc4lnsertion attribute is set to enabled but no CRC is present in the incoming data This does not apply when crc4lnsertion is set to auto disabled when the AIS signal also called all ones is detected on the incoming data E g a device application in the net work detected a problem and communicates this to the other devices in the network disabled sevErroredSec when a severely erroneous second is detected disabled 336 Telindus 1031 Router
233. lation protocol you can fine tune it as described in this chapter Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 6 73 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 2 Configuring PPP encapsulation This section introduces the PPP encapsulation protocol and gives a short description of the attributes you can use to configure this encapsulation protocol The following gives an overview of this section 6 2 1 Introducing PPP on page 74 e 6 2 2 Configuring an IP address on the PPP WAN on page 75 6 2 3 Configuring link monitoring on page 75 e 6 2 4 Configuring PPP authentication on page 76 74 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 2 1 Introducing PPP What is PPP The Point to Point Protocol PPP originally emerged as an encapsulation protocol for transporting IP traffic over point to point links PPP also established a standard for assigning and managing IP addresses asynchronous and bit oriented synchronous encapsulation network protocol multiplexing link configuration link quality testing error detection and option negotiation for added networking capa bilities What is LCP IPCP and BCP PPP provides a method for transmitting datagrams over serial point to point links which include the fol lowing three components A method for encapsulating datagrams over serial links e An extensible Link Control Protocol LCP which provides a method of establishing confi
234. lements eM password Use this element to set the password You can then associate this password with a certain access level Default lt empty gt Range 0 10 characters accessRights Use this element to set the access level associated with the password It is a bit string of which each bit corresponds to an access level The different access levels are listed below Default 1111 Range bit string see below The following table shows for each access level what you can or can not do Read Change attributes attributes readAccess Read secu rity attributes Change security attributes Execute actions Access file system writeAccess securityAccess fileSystem Access 1 The Telindus 1031 Router has the following security attributes telindus1031 sysName telindus1031 security telindus1031 router sysSecret pppSecretTable and ripv2SecretTable telindus1031 router priorityPolicy and trafficPolicy telindus1031 wanlnterface ppp authentication and authenPeriod telindus1031 management accessList snmp telnet and tftp 2 Actions are e g Cold Boot clearArpCache clearBridgeCache etc Important remarks e Ifyou create no passwords everybody has complete access e If you define at least one password it is impossible to access the Telindus 1031 Router with one of the management systems without entering the correct password e Ifyou
235. links When connecting the control connector of the Telindus 1031 Router to a COM port of your computer you can still open a TMA session on the Telindus 1031 Router You can however not open a CLI or ATWIN session console Select this value if you want to connect the control connector of the Telindus 1031 Router to a COM port of your computer in order to manage the Telindus 1031 Router using TMA CLI ATWIN etc Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 243 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1031 management alarmFilter Default 0 Range 0 50000 Use this attribute to selectively ignore drop alarms in TMA for HP Open View if these alarms are below a certain level The filter number that you define using the alarmFilter attribute has to correspond with a filter that you have to define in the Alarm Manager of TMA for HP OpenView In the Alarm Manager it is possible to specify a minimum alarm level that is needed before alarms are logged in HP OpenView This can be specified for each filter number Loop back configuration attributes telindus1031 management loopback ipAddress Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 Use this attribute to assign an IP address to the loop back interface The loop back interface is a software interface which can be used for management purposes This inter face is always up regardless of the state of the physical interfaces This means the rout
236. mal ASCII repre sentation telindus1031 g703 channel ppp ipcpHisOptions This attribute lists the IPCP options for the router at the other side remote side of the link The ipcpHisOptions table contains the same elements as the telindus1031 9703 channel ppp ipcpMyOptions table Other option values than the ones supported by the Telindus 1031 Router may be present 264 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes telindus1031 g703 channel ppp bcpMyOptions During the BCP handshake a number of options can be exchanged between the local and remote side of the link This attribute lists the BCP options for the router at this side local side of the link The bcpMyOptions table contains the following elements JJ a The Telindus 1031 Router supports the following LCP options This is the Bridge Identification option This is the Line Identification option This is the MAC Support option This is the Tinygram Compression option This is the LAN Identification option This is the MAC Address option This is the Spanning Tree Protocol option For more information on the LCP configuration options refer to RFC2878 This is the length of the option field This is the option value represented as an octet string hexadecimal ASCII repre sentation kal telindus1031 g703 J channel ppp bcpHisOptions This attribute lists the BCP op
237. manual Status attributes 11 4 1 G703 interface status attributes ra telindus1031 g703 JifDescr This attribute displays the interface description This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter kal telindus1031 g703 JifType This attribute displays the interface type This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1031 g703 JifOperStatus This attribute displays the current operational status of the interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1031 g703 J ifSpeed This attribute displays the interface speed in bits per second bps This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1031 g703 coding This attribute displays which G 703 encoding mode is currently in use ami or hdb3 Refer to telindus1031 g703 coding on page 182 for more information on the encoding modes ra telindus1031 g703 los This attribute displays on off whether a Loss Of Signal has been detected LOS is on when the incom ing data is no longer present E g the connection from the WAN towards the Telindus 1031 Router is interrupted Ta telindus1031 g703 lfa This attribute displays on off whether a Loss of Frame Alignment has been detected LFA is on when the Frame Alignment Signal FAS which is present in time slot 0 of the G 704 framed data is not detected after a certain period Ta telindus1031 g703 J ais This attribute displays on off whether an Alarm Indication Signal has been detected AIS is on when the AIS s
238. mation on the alarms of the laninterface object Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 181 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 4 WAN interface configuration attributes This section discusses the configuration attributes of the WAN interface First it describes the configura tion attributes of the physical interface Then it explains the configuration attributes of the encapsulation protocols that can be used on the interface The following gives an overview of this section e 10 4 1 G703 interface configuration attributes on page 182 e 10 4 2 G703 channel configuration attributes on page 184 e 10 4 3 PPP configuration attributes on page 185 e 10 4 4 Frame Relay configuration attributes on page 188 e 10 4 5 ATM configuration attributes on page 193 e 10 4 6 HDLC configuration attributes on page 199 182 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 4 1 G703 interface configuration attributes ra telindus1031 g703 coding Default hdb3 Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to set the G703 interface encoding mode The coding attribute has the following values Alternate Mark Inversion is selected This is a bipolar code with no zero substitu tion High Density Bipolar 3 is selected This is a modified bipolar code In case of HDB3 encoding if more than three consecutive zeroes occur in the data they are replaced by a substitution word This ensur
239. me Relay or ATM encapsulation on the WAN interface together with the Spanning Tree protocol every DLCI or PVC link is considered as a sepa rate bridge port Each link is than considered as a special kind of LAN with only both end points connected bridgePriority Use this element to set the priority of the bridge Default 32768 The bridge its MAC address together with the Range 0 65535 bridgePriority element form a unique bridge identifier This identifier is used to deter mine which bridge becomes the root bridge The bridge with the lowest bridgePriority value becomes the root bridge If two bridges have the same bridgePriority value then the bridge with the lowest MAC address becomes the root bridge bridgeMaxAge Use this element to set the time the bridge retains Default 00000d 00h 00m 20s bridging information before discarding it Range 00000d 00h 00m 06s 00000d 00h 00m 40s bridgeHelloTime Use this element to set the interval by which the root Default 00000d 00h 00m 02s bridge sends Configuration BPDUs also called Hello Range 00000d 00h 00m 01s messages 00000d 00h 00m 10s Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 235 Reference manual Configuration attributes a SNT bridgeForwardDelay Use this element to set Default 00000d 00h 00m 15s Range 00000d 00h 00m 04s 00000d 00h 00m 30s the delay a bridge port applies to move from listen ing state to learning state or fr
240. mentary product to TMA and TMA for HP OpenView Refer to the TMA CLI manual for more information ATWIN ATWIN is a menu driven user interface You can read and change all attributes as with TMA but in a more basic textual representation using a VT100 terminal Refer to the Maintenance Tools manual for more information CLI CLI is also a Command Line Interface although not so extensive as TMA CLI Experienced users who are familiar with the syntax can access the Telindus devices more quickly than with TMA or ATWIN Refer to the Maintenance Tools manual for more information Web Interface The Web Interface is an ATWIN alike menu driven user interface You can read and change all attributes as with TMA but in a more basic representation using a web browser Refer to the Maintenance Tools manual for more information EasyConnect terminal Connecting the Telindus EasyConnect hand held terminal through the control con nector to the Telindus 1031 Router allows you to manage the Telindus 1031 Router in a basic way using the LCD display and keyboard This is called keyboard management Refer to the EasyConnect manual for more information Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 1 11 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1031 Router Management Description and reference tool SNMP You can manage the Telindus 1031 Router through SNMP using any SNMP browser The Telindus 1031 Router supports MIB2 and a private MIB
241. merated see below The rxVersion element has the following values ripionly Only RIP version 1 received RIP updates are accepted rip2only Only RIP version 2 received RIP updates are accepted rip1 amp 2 Both RIP version 1 and 2 received RIP updates are accepted If you want to accept RIP 1 compatible updates on the interface then set the rxVersion attribute to rip1 amp 2 112 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router come eee Se splitHorizon Use this element to enable or disable split horizon Default poisonedReverse operation Range enumerated see below The splitHorizon element has the following values disabled Split horizon is disabled enabled Split horizon is enabled Split horizon operation prevents that routing information exits the interface through which the information was received in the first place This optimises communica tions among multiple routers particularly when links are broken It also prevents routing loops poisonedReverse Poisoned reverse split horizon is used Whereas simple split horizon simply omits the routes learned from one neighbour in updates sent to that neighbour poisoned reverse split horizon includes such routes in updates but sets their metrics to infinity Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 113 FM a authentication Use this element to enable or disable RIP
242. mode Default bridging Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to determine whether the packets are treated by the rout ing process the bridging process or both The mode attribute has the following values bridging All packets received on the PPP link are bridged BCP is set up routing All packets received on the PPP link are routed IPCP is set up routingAndBridging The SNAP header is checked to determine whether the packets have to be bridged or routed IPCP and BOP is set up ra telindus1031 g703 channel ppp bridging Default Range structure see below Use this attribute to configure the bridging related parameters of the PPP link Refer to e 8 Configuring the bridge on page 139 for more information on bridging e 8 9 6 Explaining the bridging structure on page 152 for a detailed description of the bridging structure 186 Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual Chapter 10 Configuration attributes ra telindus1031 g703 channel ppp linkMonitoring Use this attribute to enable or disable link monitoring and to fine tune it Default Range structure see below Refer to 6 2 3 Configuring link monitoring on page 75 for more information on link monitoring The linkMonitoring structure contains the following elements mon Bessie operation Use this element to enable or disable link monitoring Default disabled Range enabled
243. mples User manual twork ing inane d rout ing an ining bridg Comb 9 6 The following example shows a combination of bridging and routing in a network i Zdu 090 01q unno1 10 7N01 84 loip Aejayowey Buibpuq pow yOLIIIP eweu i QL loipyAejayouey Bunnos apow OL IIJP eweu alge lo p Aejayowes 91ge Lioip Aejoyourey 00L S9 LE ZZL sseuppe di dnosgabpu Z 8 91 ZZ sseuppe diykejoyowresy unno pow vey jujue L OS 9 FZL sseippe dieorpayujue 13 N0H yams Aejay ewes 39 LE 2ZL MO OL S9 LE CLI dl 09 9 241 MO 209 91 Z2I dl 9LID 10 bGOLeeZk MO 19 99 L8 Z1I dl E Gunnoy 0 09 9L 22L IN 9 AIS 6639 LE 2Z sseuppe diydnox926pug zdu 090 014 ugno1 121n01 0 59 LE ZLL ION 94 1ap Aejagawues Buynos spow 00 19 p aweu 7 4 3dIS 84 l ip Aejagaues Bupuq pow g0 19 P weu alge Llojp Aejayourey 18 91 ZZ sseuppe di Aejayouesy amoy UeM BOBLOIU g 00L 89L Z6 Aemayeb 9ynoyyinejap saynod zd 090 014Buno1 19 n01 ugno apow a9ey2jU UB 1 G9 LEZ sseuppe dyeoepajujue 49 n0Yy L 09 9 22L MD EGO LE SLI dl 0 39 LE Z2L 19N UMOYS v Adis ale s nquye jeljuasse ISO y AJUO 001 891 Z6L yous9 u 0 99C GG2 Ggc 218 SYSeW JOUNS y asi SYIBUIIH KA 166 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 9 User manual Configuration examples 9 7 Connecting
244. n Arbeiten am Ger t Installation Einstellungen Reparaturen etc sollten Sie den Netzstecker aus der Steckdose ziehen AN SAFETY WARNING To avoid damage to the unit please observe all procedures described in this chapter A SICHERHEITSBESTIMMUNGEN Um eine Besch digung des Ger tes zu verhindern beachten Sie bitte unbedingt die Sicherheitsbestim mungen die in diesem Abschnitt beschrieben werden Ensure that the unit and its connected equipment all use the same AC power and ground to reduce noise interference and possible safety hazards caused by differences in ground or earth potentials Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 2115 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1031 Router 2 2 Unpacking Checking the shipping carton Rough handling during shipping causes most early failures Before installation check the shipping car ton for signs of damage e If the carton box is damaged please place a claim with the carrier company immediately Ifthe carton box is undamaged do not dispose of it in case you need to store the unit or ship it in the future Package contents The box should contain the following items e Telindus 1031 Router e TMA CD ROM including this User and Reference manual in PDF format Optionally depending which sales item you ordered e external power supply with power cord 2 meter 16 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1031 Router
245. n page 271 for a detailed description of the atm structure Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 111271 Reference manual Status attributes telindus1031 g703 J channel J atm pvcTable atm The atm structure in the pvcTable displays the specific ATM related status information of the PVC The atm structure contains the following elements UO ee This displays the Virtual Path Identifier VPI of the PVC This displays the Virtual Channel Identifier VCI of the PVC The VPI in conjunction with the VCI identifies the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on the way to its destination This displays the PPP information of the PVC For a detailed description of the elements in the ppp structure refer to telindus1031 g703 J channel ppp icpState on page 261 telindus1031 g703 channell ppp ipcpState on page 261 telindus1031 g703 channel ppp bcpState on page 261 telindus1031 g703 channel ppp myAuthenstate on page 265 telindus1031 g703 J channel ppp hisAuthenstate on page 265 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Status attributes 272 Reference manual 11 4 6 HDLC status attributes kal telindus1031 g703 J channel hdlc bridging This attribute displays the bridging status of the HDLC link Refer to telindus1031 lanInterface bridging on page 254 for a detailed description of the bridging structure Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 273 Reference ma
246. n stored by this port This port identifier is used together with the designatedPriority and designatedMac attributes to determine whether this port should be the designated port for the LAN that is currently connected to this port by the management system to determine the topology of the bridged LAN topologyChangeAck This displays the value of the Topology Change Acknowledgement flag in the next Configuration BPDU that will be transmitted on this port This element is used to assess the need to set the Topology Change Acknowl edgement flag in response to a received Topology Change Notification BPDU configuration This is used to determine whether a Configuration BPDU should be transmitted on Pending this port after expiry of the hold timer This avoids that Configuration BPDUs are transmitted too often although ensuring that up to date information is transmitted 1 Only relevant when the bridge uses the Spanning Tree Protocol 256 i i Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes telindus1031 laninterface adapter This attribute displays the Ethernet mode of the LAN interface as set using the telindus1031 laninterface adapter attribute The adapter structure contains the following elements JJ EE e This is the Ethemet speed Possible values are 10 and 100 This is the Ethernet duplex mode Possible values are halfDuplex and fullDuplex tel
247. n using PPP encapsulation a DLCI PVC or tunnel you can omit the gateway element interface Use this element to specify the interface through Default lt empty gt which the gateway can be reached Range 0 24 characters Do this by typing the name of the interface as you assigned it using the configura tion attribute name e g telindus1031 laninterface name Note that this interface can also be a DLCI PVC tunnel etc If you do not specify a value for the interface element then it is deduced by checking all interfaces including DLCls PVCs and tunnels and finding an interface for which the gateway lies in the subnet defined by the IP address and net mask of that interface Typing the string discard discards all packets for the corresponding destination preference Use this element to set the level of importance of the Default 10 default route with respect to routes learnt via RIP Range 1 200 RIP routes always have a preference of 60 Routes with a lower preference value are chosen over routes with higher preference value metric Use this element to set with how much the metric Default 1 parameter of a route has to be incremented Range 1 15 If two routes exist with the same preference then the route with the lowest metric value is chosen This element is only important when combining static routes and RIP routes Refer to 7 3 3 Explaining
248. nd PAT combining 126 NAT on the LAN interface a re mark 124 O OAM F5 loop back cells what are 197 object 183 object what is 42 operating system performance attributes 323 status attributes 296 organisation of this manual iv overview alarm attributes 328 configuration attributes 172 performance attributes 300 status attributes 246 over voltage and over current protection compliance 368 P parent object what is 42 parts of the device 20 passwords basic configuration 62 correcting the security table 63 creating in the security table 63 entering in the different management tools 64 remarks on 175 PAT introduction 117 limitations 122 limitations workaround 123 what is 117 when use 118 why use 117 PAT and NAT combining 126 382 Telindus 1031 Router Annex PCR basic configuration 91 performance attributes 299 ATM 311 bridge 318 bridge access list 320 bridge group 319 default NAT 315 Frame Relay 308 G703 channel 307 G703 interface 306 L2TP tunnel 317 LAN interface 302 management 321 operating system 323 overview 300 proxy 325 router 312 router general 313 WAN interface 305 policies on the bridge basic configuration 154 policies on the router basic configuration 130 power requirements 368 PPP authentication basic config uration 76 basic configuration 73 configuration attributes 185 handshake 74 introducing 74 specifications 366 status attributes 261
249. nd address of an IP address range free For the corresponding IP address range this displays the number of IP addresses that are still free lease For the corresponding IP address range this displays the number of IP addresses that are leased hold For the corresponding IP address range this displays the number of IP addresses that are on hold l q During power down of the DHCP server some leased IP addresses can still be active Because the duration of the power down can not be known all timer information about lease and hold time becomes meaningless Therefore the DHCP server incorporated in the Telindus 1031 Router sends a ping to all leased addresses after a warm boot When the client responds to this ping the DHCP server resets all timers to their default value and keeps the lease with this client 280 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes 11 5 2 Default NAT status attributes ra telindus1031 router defaultNat addresses This attribute displays the status of each official IP address that is configured in the configuration attribute telindus1031 router defaultNat addresses The addresses table contains the following elements ES peen O officialAddress This is the official IP address as you entered it in the addresses configuration attribute privateAddress This is the private IP address that is currently linked with the official IP address status This is the status of
250. nennnnnnnnnnan nn nnaaaa 359 17 Technical specifications 1 0 ahnaanataem mendi ka sk kana dna nnele samma a mi 361 17 1 G703 interface specifications wrreeenne 362 17 2 LAN interface specifications cccceeceseececcaeeeaeeaeeececececeececeeceeeceeeceeeeeseeeeeeeess 363 17 3 Control connector specifications rrrrrrrrnmmmmme 364 17 4 Auxiliary connector Specifications nsnnenenenenenannnnnnnenenntenananaaannnme 365 17 5 ATM encapsulation Specifications c cccccscccecccscccecccecececcecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 366 17 6 Frame Relay encapsulation Specifications cccccsccceccceeececceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 366 17 7 PPP encapsulation Specifications rrrrnmnmm 366 17 8 IP routing specifications 11075 este edla aaa aknast ai ht ds adeecnreea hab eeatbe due 367 17 9 Bridging SpeeificatllonS striimi mamma ohne aeeneadert leaned vbeeah ee deeciaereeeeeaaae 367 17 10 Routing and bridging performance Specifications 0 mene 367 17 11 Power requirements 0cccceeeeeeeeecseeceeeeaaeeaeeeaecaaecaeceaeceaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseseaeeeeeeeeeseees 368 17 12 DIMENSIONS vyceseveieet Seeds Se bie tee ss Sae a tasa Ba taak aed a ka sea 368 T7313 Safety complan CE PHERS EAS a SSi 368 17 14 Over voltage and over current protection compliance we 368 1
251. ng the ip structure Because the ip structure occurs in several objects it is described here once and referenced where nec essary Refer to 5 2 2 Where to find the IP related parameters on page 57 for the location of the ip struc ture A This section lists all the elements that can be present in the ip structure However depending on the inter face it is possible that not all of these elements are present The ip structure contains the following elements C E address Use this element to assign an IP address to the inter Default 0 0 0 0 face The address should belong to the subnet the Range up to 255 255 255 255 interface is connected to netMask Use this element to assign an IP subnet mask to the Default 255 255 255 0 interface The subnet mask defines the number of IP Range up to 255 255 255 255 devices that may be present on the corresponding IP segment secondarylp Use this element to create additional virtual networks Default lt empty gt on the same Ethernet interface Range table see below The secondarylp table contains the elements address and netMask See above for an explanation of these elements remote This element is only present for a Frame Relay DLCI a PPP link an ATM PVC and an L2TP tunnel Use this element to assign an IP address to the Default 0 0 0 0 remote end of the Frame Relay DLCI PPP link ATM Range up to 255 255 255 255 PVC or L2TP tunnel
252. nnenentannnnnnneneeenenannaneee 296 1110 Proxy Status attribu Siorr reee E a aaa 297 12 Performance attributes nnsnnnnnnnnsssnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnne 299 12 1 Performance attributes OVErViOW ccccccceesseeenc cee eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseenneneeeeeeeeeenensnes 300 12 2 LAN interface performance attributes wwwws 302 12 3 WAN interface performance attributes wr 305 12 4 Router performance attributes wre 312 12 5 Bridge performance attributes mmenneantnnnntnnnntnntennannnaannnnaeanatantaneet 318 12 6 Management performance attributes immeenenenenannnnananenanvennaananannme 321 12 7 Operating system performance attributes mreeennnnnennnnnenaa 323 12 8 Proxy performance attributes scone timmitud ek Lae 325 13 Alarm ALIBULES itta sae ce cca we deetcs pence cece ipaaaa gaase juhatas gi aa 327 13 1 Alarm attributes overview jae munu asaalii ausal luhta aeta ue ee 328 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes meeeeenaneneneenentennnnnnnanenntenaananaaannnne 329 13 3 G neralala iM Siin ein Ska nec a net San aka aa 332 13 4 EAN Imtemaee Alamsaksa hanlah le death aa a a aaa aka EA dod ANAREN iS 334 13 5 G703 interface alarms cdsseecdenecdvaphsag dened manada kaka k tkeva 335 13 6 G703 Channel alarm S 4 inie teste aa ad aa
253. not closed 24855d 03h 14m 075 by the application Such sessions whether PAT or NAT is in use remain active for 3 minutes by default Only decrease this attribute if some UDP applications do not close properly filling up the available translation sessions telindus1031 router defaultNat tcpSockets Default 1024 Range 500 4500 Use this attribute to set the maximum number of TCP session that may be used simultaneously for address translation telindus1031 router defaultNat udpSockets Default 1024 Range 500 4500 Use this attribute to set the maximum number of UDP session that may be used simultaneously for address translation telindus1031 router defaultNat dmzHost Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 Use this attribute to set the address of the DMZ demilitarised zone host What is a DMZ host In computer networks a DMZ demilitarised zone is a computer host or small network inserted as a neutral zone between a company s private network and the outside public network It prevents outside users from getting direct access to a server that has company data A DMZ is an optional and more secure approach to a firewall and effectively acts as a proxy server as well In a typical DMZ configuration for a small company a separate computer receives requests from users within the private network for access to Web sites or other companies accessible on the public network The D
254. not present in the containment tree by default If you want to use priority policy then add this object first Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 45 kal telindus1031 router priorityPolicy algorithm Default fifo Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to determine how and which queues are emptied The algorithm attribute has the following values fifo This is a First In First Out queue The data that enters the queue first also leaves the queue first This is the fastest but most superficial queuing mechanism roundRobin This is a priority queuing mechanism In this case all user configurable queues containing data have an equal weight In other words if all the user configurable queues contain data they are addressed in turns However the low delay queue and system queue still have priority over the user configurable queues ew po ooo 1 5 user config These queues are addressed in turns urable queue low delay queue This queue is addressed between every user config urable queue 7 system queue This queue has priority over all other queues As soon as it contains data it is emptied Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 229 Reference manual Configuration attributes absolutePriority This is a priority queuing mechanism In this case queues with a high priority have absolute priority over queues with a low priority In other words no lower priority queue i
255. nt If an ICMP Echo Reply is received it means the IP address is already in use Therefore another IP address is assigned kal telindus1031 router alarmMask kal telindus1031 router alarmLevel Refer to e 13 2 Introducing the alarm attributes on page 329 for more information on the configuration attributes alarmMask and alarmLevel and on the alarms in general e 13 7 Router alarms on page 337 for more information on the alarms of the router object Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 215 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 5 2 Default NAT configuration attributes ra telindus1031 router defaultNat patAddress Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 Use this attribute to enter the official IP address that has to be used for the Port Address Translation Entering an address different from the default value 0 0 0 0 automatically ena bles PAT Refer to 7 4 Configuring address translation on page 116 for more information on PAT kal telindus1031 router defaultNat portTranslations Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to define specific port number ranges that should not be translated Some TCP or UDP applications do not allow port translations these applications require a dedicated source port number In the portTranslations table you can define UDP and TCP port ranges that should not be translated If a packet with a source port number in such
256. nt Purpose 1 fixed session A fixed session for SNMP 1 fixed session A fixed session for 010 2 sessions When connecting with TMA 1 session When connecting with TMA for HP OpenView or the Alarm Manager 1 session When connecting with TMA CLI 2 sessions When downloading a config cli or config cms file 1 session When connecting with Telnet 1 session When downloading software 1 session When connecting with the Web Interface telindus1031 management tftpSessionCount This attribute displays the number of TFTP sessions that are currently active on the Telindus 1031 Router telindus1031 management cliSessionCount This attribute displays the number of CLI sessions that are currently active on the Telindus 1031 Router There are always minimum two fixed sessions active Connecting with TMA CLI the Web Interface etc opens additional sessions This is explained in the following table Session count Purpose 1 fixed session A fixed session for the control port 1 fixed session A fixed session for Web Interface 1 session When connecting with TMA CLI or starting a CLI session 1 session When connecting with the Web Interface 322 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes kal telindus1031 management tcpSessionCount This attribute displays the number of TCP sessions that are currently active on the Telindus 1031
257. nt for a network topology where the Telindus devices are not connected in line on management level l e when there is a digital multipoint device present a fe ASIL Cl absolute 11 absolute 22 PC running absolute 10 absolute 20 en Lf TMA digital multipoint absolute 33 absolute 44 To enable absolute addressing an address has to be specified in the Telindus device Do this with the cms2Address attribute Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual Chapter 10 241 Configuration attributes k telindus1031 management accessList Use this attribute to control the access from certain hosts or networks Default lt empty gt Range table see below The access list filters incoming traffic based on the source IP address You can specify multiple entries within the access list When more than one entry applies to the same packet then only the most specific one is taken in consideration 1 e the entry covering the smallest range If not one entry matches then the packet is dropped If the access list is empty then all packets are forwarded The accessList table contains the following elements a E sourceAddress Use this element to set the IP source address of the packet The address may be a sub network address Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 mask Use this element to set the IP subnet mask for the sourceAddress By combining an IP address with a mask you can uniguely iden
258. nter key and type the instance value i e the index name for the child object e g my_filter and press the enter key again The new child object is created e g gt routingFilter name my filter Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1031 Router 48 Adding an object in the Web Interface Enter the parent object e g select the router object and double click it or click on Open The Web Interface window shows the sub objects and attributes of the parent object Select the line displaying the string lt CREATE INSTANCE gt and the name of the object you want to add e g routingFilter lt CREATE INSTANCE gt and double click it or click on Open gt A new window appears displaying the string Give the instanceValue Type the instance value i e the index name for the child object e g my_filter and click on exit The new child object is created e g gt routingFilter name my filter Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 4 49 User manual Managing the Telindus 1031 Router 4 4 3 Referring to an added object What is referring to an added object If at a certain place in the containment tree you want to apply the function associated with an object you added then you have to refer to this object How to refer to an added object Some attributes allow you to enter the instance value i e the index name you assigned to the object of an added object By
259. nterface and delivered to a higher layer protocol Non unicast packets are all the multicast and broadcast packets This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter Ta telindus1031 lanInterface iflnDiscards This attribute displays the number of incoming packets that were discarded to prevent their deliverance to a higher layer protocol This even though no errors were detected in these packets This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter H telindus1031 lanlnterface iflnErrors This attribute displays the number of incoming packets that could not be delivered to a higher layer pro tocol because they contained errors This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter Ta telindus1031 laninterface ifInUnknownProtos This attribute displays the number of incoming packets that were discarded because they contained an unknown or unsupported protocol This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1031 lanInterface ifOutOctets This attribute displays the total number of octets bytes transmitted by the interface including framing characters This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1031 lanInterface ifOutUcastPkts This attribute displays the total number of packets that higher level protocols requested to be transmitted to a unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 303 Reference manual Performance attributes ra telindus1031 lanInterface ifOutNUcastPkts This at
260. nterfaces requesting an IP address The request contains the client its MAC address which is a unique identifier refer to What is the ARP cache on page 179 for more information BootP A workstation with a BootP server interprets incoming BootP requests You can configure a file on the server with MAC address and IP address subnet mask pairs for all devices in the network you want to service If the MAC address in the BootP request matches a MAC address in this file the BootP server replies with the corresponding IP address and subnet mask Assigning an IP address in this way is done through a simple request response handshake A workstation with a DHCP server works in a similar way as with a BootP server The difference with BootP is that you can additionally configure a list of IP addresses on the server These IP addresses are dynamically assigned to the IP devices requesting an IP address independently of their MAC address Those address assignments are limited in time Assigning an IP address in this way is done through a 4 way handshake and with regular renewals The Telindus 1031 Router as relay agent Being broadcast packets BootP and DHCP requests can cross a router using IP helper addresses The Telindus 1031 Router is a BootP and DHCP relay agent This means it adds additional information to the request packets allowing servers on distant networks to send back the answer This feature is not used in the auto install procedure
261. nual 177486 USER AND REFERENCE MANUAL User and Reference manual for the Orchid functionality on TELINDUS 1030 SERIES ORCHID the Telindus 1030 router series This includes the specific Orchid functionality on the whole series when it is activated as well as the specific features on the 1035 model 171304 PWR PLUG 48VDC gt 7 5VDC 48VDC wall plug power module for Desktop units delivered without external power plug 175592 PWR PLUG UK VERSION 230VAC gt 9VDC Wall plug power module for Desktop units delivered without external power plug UK version 175590 PWR PLUG EUR VERSION 230VAC Wall plug power module for Desktop units delivered gt 9VDC without external power plug EUR version 376 Telindus 1031 Router Annex B Annex product information Telindus 1031 Router Annex Index A absolute and relative address ing 240 action what is 43 activating the configuration 68 adding an object to the contain ment tree 45 how 47 in TMA CLI 47 in ATWIN 47 in the Web Interface 48 in TMA 47 referring to the added object 49 when 46 which objects 46 why 46 address translation basic configuration 116 addressing relative and abso lute 240 alarm attributes 327 configuration 330 general 331 introduction 329 overview 328 alarms G703 channel 336 G703 interface 335 general 332 LAN interface 334 router 337 application software downloading using TFTP 356 using TMA 355 using TML 357 versi
262. nual Managing the Telindus 1031 Router 4 1 1 What is TMA TMA is the acronym for Telindus Maintenance Application TMA is a free Windows software package that enables you to maintain the Telindus 1031 Router i e to access its configuration attributes and look at status performance and alarm information using a user friendly graphical user interface TMA is an excellent tool for complete management of the Telindus access devices When using TMA in combination with a network management system such as HP OpenView complete networks can be managed from one central site Consult the TMA manual how to install TMA and to get acquainted with the user interface You will need a new version of the model file distribution if changes have been made to the attributes of the Telindus 1031 Router The most recent model files and TMA engine can always be downloaded from the Telindus web site at http www telindusproducts com TMA 4 1 2 How to connect TMA There are two ways to establish a connection between the computer running TMA and the Telindus 1031 Router e through a serial connection i e through the control connector of the Telindus 1031 Router Refer to 4 1 3 Connecting through the control connector on page 36 through an IP connection i e through the LAN connector of the Telindus 1031 Router Refer to 4 1 4 Connecting over an IP network on page 38 36 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1031 Rou
263. nual Status attributes 11 5 Router status attributes This section discusses the status attributes concerned with routing First it describes the general routing status attributes Then it explains the status attributes of the extra features as there are default NAT L2TP tunnelling etc The following gives an overview of this section e 11 5 1 General router status attributes on page 274 e 11 5 2 Default NAT status attributes on page 280 e 11 5 3 L2TP tunnel status attributes on page 281 274 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes 11 5 1 General router status attributes ra telindus1031 router routingTable This attribute lists all known routes with their operating status The routingTable contains the following elements mon peen network This is the IP address of the destination network mask This is the network mask of the destination network gateway This is the IP address of the next router on the path to the destination network interface This is the interface through which the destination network can be reached Pos sible values are internal The own protocol stack is used lt name gt The destination network can be reached through this particular interface The lt name gt of the interface is the name as you configured it Note that the interface can also be a DLCI an ATM PVC a tunnel etc discard Packets for this destination are discarded
264. o set the community string which is included in the SNMP traps that are sent to the man agement station It is used as a password in the SNMP communication Give it the same value as on your SNMP management sta tion Default public Range 0 20 characters Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 239 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1031 snmp mib2Traps Default off Range on off Use this attribute to enable on or disable off the sending of SNMP traps as MIB2 traps If you want to send the SNMP traps as MIB2 traps proceed as follows Select the trapDestinations attribute Add an entry to this table for each network manage ment station that should receive SNMP traps In the trapDestinations table define the IP address of the management stations that should receive the SNMP traps In the trapDestinations table configure the community element associated with each trap des tination Configure the mib2Traps attribute Select this value if the management station is any SNMP sta tion without the TMA for HP OpenView application In that case the Telindus 1031 Router sends the alarms coldBoot warmBoot and linkDown as MIB2 traps instead of enterprise spe cific private MIB traps Select this value if the management system is the TMA for HP OpenView application In that case the Telindus 1031 Router sends all alarms as enterprise specific private MIB traps S
265. oamF5Loopback structure in the atm structure in the pvcTable to con figure the transmission of OAM F5 loop back cells The oamF5Loopback structure contains the following elements ss ANNUS operation Use this element to enable or disable OAM F5 loop Pefault disabled back operation Range enabled disabled The operation element has the following values disabled OAM F5 loop back operation is disabled i e the OAM F5 loop back are not sent This means that the ifOperStatus of the PVC becomes up when the ATM is syn chronised globally However this does not guarantee that the PVC is configured correctly on the remote side enabled OAM F5 loop back operation is enabled i e the Telin dus 1031 Router sends OAM F5 loop back cells at reg ular intervals If consecutive cells are not returned by the remote side then the ifOperStatus of the PVC becomes down interval Use this element to set the time interval between the Default 00000d 00h 00m 10s sending of two consecutive OAM F5 loop back cells Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s 24855d 03h 14m 07s failsPermitted Use this element to set the number of non returned Defauita OAM F5 loop back cells after which the Telindus 1031 Range 1 30 Router declares the PVC down Example Suppose failsPermitted is set to 10 If 10 consecutive OAM F5 loop back cells are not returned by the remote side then the Telindus 1031 Router declares the PV
266. ol IGMP is defined in RFC1112 as the standard for IP multicasting in the Internet It is used to establish host memberships in particular multicast groups on a single network The mecha nisms of the protocol allow a host to inform its local router using Host Membership Reports that it wants to receive messages addressed to a specific multicast group All hosts conforming to level 2 of the IP multicasting specification require IGMP IGMP topology Consider the following multicasting topology LAN 1 Client 1 or Server 2 igmp por AS igmp Router 2 Router 1 Switch In this topology e Client 1 and Client 2 are multicast clients e Router 1 2 and 3 are multicast enabled routers e Server 1 is a multicast server e Switch is a Frame Relay or ATM switch 278 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes The following are some characteristics of an IGMP topology An IGMP router queries an IGMP proxy Only 1 IGMP proxy can be defined per device The TTL of an IGMP frame is always 1 IGMP messages are never forwarded An IGMP frame contains an IP router alert option IGMPv1 routers may be present in the network The multicasting IGMP protocol can be configured on every IP interface Refer to the igmp element in 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 58 A client can leave or join a multicast group by erasing or adding a multicast address from a table defined in
267. ols 208 ip 178 185 188 233 ipAddress loopback 243 jitterAttenuation 183 I2tpTunnels 218 linkMonitoring 186 Imi 191 longHaul 183 lowdelayQuotum 230 macAddress 236 maxFifoQLen 184 method 223 mib2Traps 239 mode 180 185 name 178 233 patAddress 215 portTranslations 215 pppSecretTable 207 priorityPolicy 184 pvcTable 193 queueConfigurations 230 ripHoldDownTime 205 ripupdatelnterval 204 ripv2SecretTable 206 routingProtocol 203 routingTable 202 security 175 sendAdminUnreachable 210 sendPortUnreachable 210 sendTtlExceeded 209 servicesAvailable 216 snmp 242 spanningTree 234 sysContact 174 sysLocation 174 sysName 174 sysSecret 207 tcpSockets 217 tcpSocketTimeOut 217 telnet 242 tftp 242 timeSlots 184 tos2QueueMapping 227 trafficShaping 224 trapDestinations 238 udpSockets 217 378 Telindus 1031 Router Annex udpSocketTimeOut 217 vlan 235 vlanPriorityMap 237 attribute performance addressesAvailable 315 allocFails 315 bridgeAccessList 320 bridgeCache 319 bridgeDiscards 319 bridgeFloods 319 cliSessionCount 321 cllminFrames 310 cms2SessionCount 321 currUsedProcPower 323 discards 315 diciTable 308 errorCount 306 freeBlockCount 323 freeDataBuffers 323 freeMemory 324 h24Performance 304 h2Performance 304 icmpAllocs 316 icmpSocketsUsed 315 ifInDiscards 302 iflnErrors 302 iflnNUcastPkts 302 iflnOctets 302 iflnUcastPkts 302 ifinUnknownProtos 302 ifOutDiscards 303 ifOutErrors 303 ifOutNUcastPkts 303 ifOu
268. om learning state to forwarding state Refer to 8 5 The Spanning Tree bridge port states on page 144 for more information on the possible states of a bridge port the time out or ageing for purging MAC addresses from the bridge cache in case a topology change is detected kal telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup vlan Default Range structure see below Use this attribute to configure some VLAN parameters Although the Telindus 1031 Router bridges IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames when connected to a VLAN aware switch the Telindus 1031 Router itself can only be managed via IP if some VLAN parameters are configured The vian structure contains the following elements mm pen OOOO dotQTagging Use this element to enable or disable Default disabled Range enabled disabled the 802 1Q tagging of Ethernet frames sent by the Telindus 1031 Router the recognition of 802 1Q tagged frames received by the Telindus 1031 Router Use this element to set the ID of the VLAN over which pefault 1 the Telindus 1031 Router can be managed Range 1 4094 userPriority Use this element to set the priority used in the 802 1p Default 0 part of the 802 1Q header and this for all frames sent Range 0 7 by the Telindus 1031 Router 1 If dotQTagging is enabled then the Telindus 1031 Router does not interpret spanning tree frames but just forwards them In that case the spanning tree
269. om up to down or vice versa the system up time value is written into the ifLastChange status element This displays the IP information of the tunnel Refer to telindus1031 g703 channel frameRelay diciTable ip on page 267 for a detailed description of the ip structure bridging This displays the bridging information of the tunnel Refer to telindus1031 laninterface bridging on page 254 for a detailed description of the bridging structure This displays the specific L2TP related status information of the tunnel Refer to the telindus1031 router tunneis I2tpTunnels I2tp on page 282 for a detailed description of the I2tp structure This displays the PPP information of the tunnel For a detailed description of the elements in the ppp structure refer to telindus1031 g703 J channel J ppp lcpState on page 261 telindus1031 g703 J channel Jppp ipcpState on page 261 telindus1031 g703 J channel J ppp bcpState on page 261 telindus1031 g703 J channel J ppp myAuthenstate on page 265 telindus1031 g703 J channel ppp hisAuthenstate on page 265 282 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes telindus1031 router tunnels I2tpTunnels I2tp The I2tp structure in the I2tpTunnels table displays the specific L2TP related status information of the tun nel The I2tp structure contains the following elements om oeseepton O sendingSeqNum In case sequence numbering on the dat
270. on LMI The Imi structure contains the following elements E IN mode Use this element to set the Frame Relay mode The mode element has the following values Default auto Range enumerated see below No LMI is used The Telindus 1031 Router is defined as Frame Relay user l e Frame Relay access device or DTE network The Telindus 1031 Router is defined as Frame Relay network l e Frame Relay node or DCE auto When you have two Telindus 1031 Routers in your net work and they are both set to auto they mutually decide who will be user or network type Use this element to set the LMI variant There are sev Defauit q933 Annex A eral standards for the LMI protocol with small varia Range enumerated see below tions between them Therefore you should configure the Telindus 1031 Router according to the standard that is used by your service provider The type element has the following values ImiRev1 Set this value only for compatibility with older eguip ment ansiT1 617 d Set this value for ANSI LMI compliance q933 Annex A Set this value for ITU T LMI compliance frf1 2 Set this value for FRF 1 amp 2 compliance pollinginterval Use this element to set the time between successive Default 00000d 00h 00m 10s Status Enguiry messages Range 00000d 00h 00m 05s 00000d 00h 00m 30s errorThreshold Use this element to set the maximum
271. on iv what is 354 ARP cache how works the 179 time out 179 what is 179 ATM basic configuration 86 configuration attributes 193 introducing 87 performance attributes 311 specifications 366 status attributes 270 what is 87 ATM layers what are 88 ATM switching how works 87 attribute overview 50 what is 42 attribute action Activate Configuration 68 176 clearArpCache 256 292 clearBridgeCache 292 Cold Boot 177 Delete File 295 Load Default Configuration 68 176 Load Saved Configuration 68 176 Rename File 295 resetNat 316 startPing 314 stopPing 314 attribute alarm alarmInfo 331 alarmLevel 330 alarmMask 330 totalAlarmLevel 331 attribute configuration accessList 241 adapter 180 addresses 216 alarmFilter 243 alarmLevel laninterface object 180 router object 214 top object 176 wanInterface object 184 alarmMask laninterface object 180 router object 214 top object 176 waninterface object 184 algorithm 228 alternativeRoutes 204 arp 179 233 atmConfig 198 authenPeriod 187 authentication 187 bootFromFlash 174 bridgeCache 232 bridgeTimeOut 232 bridging 180 185 199 clocking 182 cms2Address 240 coding 182 consoleNoTrafficTimeOut 242 countingPolicy 230 crc4Insertion 183 Index 377 ctriPortProtocol 242 defaultRoute 201 dhcpCheckAddress 214 dhcpDynamic 212 dhcpStatic 211 diciTable 189 dmzHost 217 dropLevels 226 encapsulation 184 filter 222 framing 182 gateway 216 helperProtoc
272. on possibilities 00x meneennnemnna 12 2 Installing and connecting the Telindus 1031 Router 13 2 1 Safety INSUUCUONS 1444 akjtea eakamad kaka asiaate aataid anel aata 14 2 2 NINPACKIAG eter dearest KU aaa paigast MUl ahelaid 15 23 Selecting a Siten neari a duane a ties cise s 16 2 4 Installation and connection precautions rwrrrmrrmnt 17 2 5 Connecting the Telindus 1031 Router iccecstes cadtoned kvantitatiivsed 18 2 6 The front panel LED indicators cccecceeeseceeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeeesaeeaaeeaeeaaeeaaeeaeeeaeeeaeeees 24 3 DIP switches of the Telindus 1031 Router 10nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsa 29 3 1 The Telindus 1031 Router motherboard ccccccccecceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 30 3 2 DIP switches of the Telindus 1031 Router ccccccccccccccccececeeceeceeeeeeeeteeeteeeeeess 31 3 3 Opening and closing the NOUSING c cceeseeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeseteeseeeeneeneeeeees 32 4 Managing the Telindus 1031 Router rnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnans 33 4 1 Managing the Telindus 1031 Router with TMA mmt 34 4 2 Introducing the management terminology 40 4 3 The objects in the Telindus 1031 Router containment tree et 44 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree 0eeeeennnnann
273. once a certain route is used to reach a specific address this same route is always used to reach this specific address telindus1031 router ripUpdatelnterval Default 00000d 00h 00m 30s Range 00000d 00h 00m 05s Use this attribute to set the interval the Telindus 1031 Router transmits RIP 00000d 00h 10m 00s update messages Normally RIP update messages are transmitted every 30 seconds It is possible to change this interval However changing this interval will also change the lifetime of routes learnt through RIP If a RIP route is received for the last time it is declared down after 6 times the ripUpdatelnterval After the route is down it is deleted after 4 times the ripUpdatelnterval Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 205 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1031 router ripHoldDownTime Default 00000d 00h 03m 00s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s Use this attribute to set the time the Telindus 1031 Router has to hold a 9 00000d 00h 10m 00s route down in case it receives a RIP update message declaring this route down What is the RIP hold down time Suppose you have a situation as depicted in the fig ure alongside j router AA Now suppose the following happens oy Si a ED router B 1 Route X goes down Router A sends a RIP update message to E router B declaring route X down sherk 2 Only a few moments later route X goes up fora while after whic
274. ons how and which queues are filled with the excess data The priority policy determines how and which queues are emptied What is a priority queuing Using the traffic and priority policy features you can perform priority queuing This allows you to define how traffic is prioritised in the network E g to ensure that voice video or other streaming media is serv iced before or after other traffic types to ensure that web response traffic is routed before normal web browsing traffic etc There are 7 queues Queue Queue type Description user configurable queue The user can decide which data goes into which queue low delay queue The user can decide which data goes into this queue This queue usually is addressed more often then the user con figurable queues system queue This queue is filled with mission critical data e g link moni toring messages etc and has priority over all other queues 132 Telindus 1031 Router User manual Chapter 7 Configuring the router 7 6 2 Traffic and priority policy on routed and bridged data Refer to 7 6 1 Introducing traffic and priority policy on page 131 for an introduction The following table shows which traffic policy is used to fill the queues with routed data and which is used to fill the queues with bridged data In case is enabled only routing the routed data is queued as specified in the traffic policy settings as defined in the telin
275. ons mean the following DS1 no 1 DIP switch bank number 1 switch position number 1 the possible settings of the DIP switch on and off The default setting is printed in bold the function associated with the corresponding DIP switch setting 54 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 5 User manual Basic configuration 5 1 2 Reading a TMA attribute string A TMA attribute string has the following ae r O top Object Nametobject NamevattributeName default defaultValue 1 2 3 The following table explains the TMA attribute string layout LE This position displays the TMA attribute icon It indicates that the string which follows is a TMA attribute string Refer to Graphical conventions on page vi for more information the attribute name and its position in the containment tree the default value of a configuration attribute Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 5 55 User manual Basic configuration 5 2 Configuring IP addresses The first thing you have to configure are the IP addresses of the Telindus 1031 Router First this section lists which mechanisms there are to obtain an IP address automatically Then it shows you for each interface where you can find the IP related parameters Finally this section explains these IP related parameters The following gives an overview of this section e 5 2 1 Automatically obtaining an IP address on page 56 5 2 2 Where to find the IP related parameters on page 57 e
276. ot be modified It is a 6 byte code repre sented in hexadecimal format Each byte in the code is separated by a colon Refer to What is the ARP cache on page 179 for more information on the MAC addresses Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 253 Reference manual Status attributes telindus1031 laninterface arpCache This attribute displays all the MAC address IP address pairs from ARP reguests and replies received on the LAN interface Refer to What is the ARP cache on page 179 for more information The arpCache table contains the following elements C pp macAddress This is the MAC address ipAddress This is the associated IP address type This is the ARP cache entry type Possible values are dynamic The MAC IP address pair is retrieved from an ARP request or reply message static The MAC IP address pair is configured There is only one static entry i e the Telindus 1031 Router its own IP and MAC address timeOut This is the time the entry will remain in the ARP cache For the static entry this value is 0 Example The following figure shows part of an ARP cache table as an example V arpCache b1 00 20 AF BD 47 9B 194 7 48 84 dynamic 00000d Olh 12m 17s gt 2 00 00 0C 40 29 B1 194 7 48 37 dynamic 00000d 01h 59m 55s b3 00 50 8B 2E 3B 94 194 7 48 163 dynamic 00000d 01h 59m 56s gt 4 00 10 4B B1 34 1C 10 0 8 128 dynamic 00000d 01h 58m 195 b5 00 50 04 40 8B C2 194 7 48 148
277. ou can cre ate the access list itself by adding an accessList object under the bridge object and by configuring the attributes in this object Example If you created a accessList object with index name my_access_list i e accessit accessList accessList my_access_list and you want to apply this access list my access list here then enter the index name as value for the accessList ele N ment Refer to e 10 6 2 Bridge access list configuration attributes on page 236 for more infor mation on access lists 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 45 for more information on adding objects Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 8 User manual 153 Configuring the bridge mom pe O trafficPolicy VI Use this element to apply a traffic policy on the Default lt empty gt bridged data on the interface Range 0 24 characters Do this by entering the index name of the traffic policy you want to use You can create the traffic policy itself by adding a trafficPolicy object under the bridge object and by configuring the attributes in this object Example If you created a trafficPolicy object with index name my traffic policy tralficPolicy i e trafficPolicy my_traffic_policy and you want to apply this traffic wt policy here then enter the index name as value for the trafficPolicy N element Refer to e 8 10 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the bridge on page
278. ou want to manage the Telin dus 1031 Router via IP you have to configure an IP address in the bridgeGroup object instead telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup ip 8 9 2 Enabling bridging on the interfaces Refer to 8 1 Introducing bridging on page 140 for an introduction on bridging Use the mode attribute to enable or disable bridging per interface The location of this attribute depends on the interface Location of the mode attribute LAN telindus1031 laninterface mode on page 180 WAN Frame Relay telindus1031 wanInterface frameRelay diciTable mode on page 189 WAN PPP telindus1031 g703 channel ppp mode on page 185 WAN ATM telindus1031 wanlnterface atm pvcTable mode on page 193 tunnel telindus1031 router tunnels I2tpTunnels mode on page 218 8 9 3 Selecting the bridging protocol Refer to 8 2 The self learning and Transparent Spanning Tree bridge on page 141 for an introduction Use the protocol element in the spanningTree structure to select the bridging protocol Refer to telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup spanningTree on page 234 8 9 4 Setting the bridge priority Refer to 8 8 The Spanning Tree priority and cost on page 147 for more information on bridge priority Use the bridgePriority element in the spanningTree structure to set the bridge priority Refer to telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup spanningTree on page 234 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 8 151 User manual Configuring the bridge 8
279. outed or bridged data in AAL5 packets according to RFC 2684 ppp Select this value in case you want to encapsulate routed or bridged data in PPP over ATM PPPoA according to RFC2364 pppOverEthernet Select this value in case you want to encapsulate routed or bridged data in PPP over Ethernet PPPoE accord ing to RFC2516 This data is then further encapsulated in AAL5 packets according to RFC2684 In the PPPoE context the Telindus 1031 Router can only act as a client 196 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes Co ala multiProtocolMech Use this element to define how the protocol has to be Default IlcEncapsulation mapped onto ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AALS Range enumerated see below The multiProtocolMech element has the following values IlcEncapsulation Logical Link Control LLC encapsulation multiplexes multiple protocols over a single virtual circuit The proto col of a carried protocol data unit PDU is identified by prefixing the PDU with an LLC header vcMultiplexing Virtual Circuit VC based multiplexing uses one Virtual Channel VCI VPI pair for each protocol This uses more VCs than LLC encapsulation but reduces over head because a header is not necessary The following table gives an overview of which multi protocol mechanism can be used for which higher layer protocol encapsulation It also shows whether this can be combined with NAT PAT
280. outer Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 2 2 Configuring the routing table The following are some rules when configuring the routingTable ES pe O O As a rule of thumb one can say that the interface name has priority over the gateway In case you enter a correct i e existing interface name and in case it refers toa point to point PTP interface the route is always added to the routing table no matter which gateway GW is specified multi point MP interface then the route is only added to the routing table when a local gateway is specified the route is not added to the routing table when no gateway is specified a reroute occurs when no local gateway is specified In case you enter an incorrect interface name the route is not added to the routing table In case you enter no interface name then the route is added to the routing table when a local gateway is specified the route is not added to the routing table when no gateway is specified the route is not added to the routing table when the gateway lies within the configured network route For example network 10 0 0 0 mask 255 255 255 0 gateway 10 0 0 1 e areroute occurs when no local gateway is specified The following table summarises the above Interface name Gateway Result correct none 0 0 0 0 e PTP route added e MP route not added correct local route added always correct not local e PT
281. outer Chapter 7 101 User manual Configuring the router 7 2 1 Configuring static routes Refer to 7 1 Introducing routing on page 98 for an introduction on routing Static routes versus RIP You have to determine whether you are going to use static routes or the RIP routing protocol exclusively uses the RIP routing protocol you may skip this section Proceed with 7 3 Con figuring the Routing Information Protocol on page 107 does not use the RIP routing protocol or only part read this section to learn how to define static of it does routes to the remote IP networks that have to be reached The static routing configuration attributes Use the following to configure static routes e Use the routingTable attribute to specify routing entries for specific networks Refer to telindus1031 router routingTable on page 202 7 2 2 Configuring the routing table on page 102 for more information on the behaviour of the rout ing table when configuring it e Use the defaultRoute attribute to specify a default route also called gateway Packets for destinations that do not match one of the routing table entries are sent to this default route Refer to telindus1031 router defaultRoute on page 201 If you only have to reach one remote LAN network from your local Ethernet via this router you may skip the routingTable attribute In that case it is sufficient to define the defaultRoute attribute only 102 Telindus 1031 R
282. pAllocs it gives an indication of the type of traffic that is being routed telindus1031 router defaultNat resetNat Use this action to release all sockets currently in use and return them to the free socket pool In other words executing this action resets all NAT PAT sessions that are currently established It also releases all official IP addresses that are dynamically assigned to a private IP address If any TCP ses sions are still active these sessions will be aborted Take care when using this action All TCP information is lost when the sockets are released with this action Any TCP sessions in use at the time of the reset will go into a hang up state These applications will need to restart Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 317 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 4 3 L2TP tunnel performance attributes ra telindus1031 router tunnels I2tpTunnels This attribute gives you performance information on the L2TP tunnels The I2tpTunnels table contains the following elements ETS peen o name This is the name of the tunnel as you configured it mibCounters This displays the SNMP MIB2 parameters of the tunnel These are the same as the SNMP MIB2 parameters on the LAN interface Refer to 12 2 LAN interface performance attributes on page 302 318 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 5 Bridge performance attributes This section discusses the performance attributes
283. protocol should be disabled on the Telindus 1031 Router 236 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 6 2 Bridge access list configuration attributes The accessList object is not present in the containment tree by default If you want to use a bridge access list then add this object first Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 45 telindus1031 bridge accessList macAddress Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to filter bridged frames based on the source MAC address The access list is applied on the transmitted outgoing data of the interface Packets coming from MAC addresses that are specified in the access list are not sent out on the interface on which the access list is applied Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 237 Reference manual Configuration attributes 10 6 3 Bridge traffic policy configuration attributes telindus1031 bridge trafficPolicy vlanPriorityMap Default Range structure see below Use this attribute to impose a traffic policy on the bridged VLAN frames received by the Telindus 1031 Router Each VLAN frame has a certain priority this is specified in the 802 1p part of the 802 1Q header of the VLAN frame In case a traffic overload condition occurs and in case you imposed this traffic policy on a certain interface then the VLAN frames are sent to a queue Using the vianPriorityMap a
284. queues are filled when a traffic overload condition occurs Do this using the attribute telindus1031 bridge trafficPolicy vianPriorityMap on page 237 Important remark Whereas configuring a traffic policy for routed data is different than for bridged data configuring a priority policy is the same for both In other words the mechanism to fill the gueues is different for routed data than itis for bridged data but the mechanism to empty the gueues is the same for both routed and bridged data Refer to 7 6 5 Configuring a priority policy on page 135 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 8 157 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 10 3 Applying a bridging traffic policy on a certain interface This section shows you where to find the appropriate traffic policy elements in order to apply a traffic policy on a certain interface The following table shows you in which trafficPolicy element you have to enter the index name of the earlier created trafficPolicy object in order to apply a traffic policy on the bridged data of a certain interface For the you can find the trafficPolicy element in WAN interface each WAN encapsulation object frameRelay You can find the trafficPolicy element in the bridging structure within the dlciTable attribute under the frameRelay object telindus1031 g703 J channel frameRelay dlciTable bridging trafficPolicy This means that you can specify a traffic policy per DLCI You can find the trafficPoli
285. re mapped as follows 000 up to 100 queues 1 up to 5 respectively 101 and higher the low delay queue The next 2 bits define the drop levels Bit values correspond with 00 and 01 maxLength1 10 maxLength2 11 maxLength3 Refer to the attribute telindus1031 router trafficPolicy dropLevels for more information on drop levels tosMapped The data is redirected to the queues based on the settings of the attribute telindus1031 router trafficPolicy tos2AueueMapping 224 Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual Chapter 10 Configuration attributes kal telindus1031 router trafficPolicy trafficShaping The function of this attribute is twofold Default lt empty gt Range table see below e Incase you have set the telindus1031 router trafficPolicy method attribute to trafficShaping then use the traf ficShaping table to specify which data has to be redirected to which queue If an overload condition occurs then a packet is redirected to the specified queue when the criteria as specified in the trafficShaping table are met e You can use the trafficShaping table to set up an extended access list A packet is forwarded if the criteria as specified in the trafficShaping table are met When more than one entry applies to the same packet then only the most specific one is taken in consideration l e the entry covering the smallest range The extended access list it
286. re the traffic policy related parameters Refer to 8 10 2 Configuring a traffic pol icy on the bridge on page 156 Add a priorityPolicy object under the router object and give it a certain index name e g priorityPolicy my_priority_policy Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 45 Configure the priority policy related parameters Refer to 7 6 5 Configuring a priority pol icy on page 135 Apply the traffic policy to a certain interface Do this by typing the index name of the added trafficPolicy object in the appropriate element Refer to 8 10 3 Applying a bridging traffic policy on a certain interface on page 157 Apply the priority policy to a certain interface Do this by typing the index name of the added priorityPolicy object in the appropriate element Refer to 7 6 7 Applying a priority policy on a certain interface on page 137 156 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 8 User manual Configuring the bridge 8 10 2 Configuring a traffic policy on the bridge Refer to 7 6 1 Introducing traffic and priority policy on page 131 for an introduction This section shows you which configuration attributes you can use to configure a traffic policy on the bridge The trafficPolicy object is not present in the containment tree by default If you want to use traffic policy then add this object first Refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 45 You have to specify how the
287. red but you want to start from scratch then use this action to revert to the default configuration telindus1031 Load Saved Configuration If you execute this action the non active configuration is overwritten by the active configuration currently used by the Telindus 1031 Router After executing this action click on the TMA button Retrieve all attributes from device 4 to see the new non active configuration B When use this action If you are in the progress of modifying the non active configuration but made some mistakes then use this action to revert to the active configuration Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 177 Reference manual Configuration attributes WS telindus1031 Cold Boot If you execute this action the Telindus 1031 Router reboots As a result the Telindus 1031 Router performs a self test checks the software e reads the saved configuration and restarts program execution When use this action Use this action for instance to activate new application software 178 Telindus 1031 Router rj Reference manual 10 3 LAN interface configuration attributes Chapter 10 Configuration attributes telindus1031 lanInterface name Use this attribute to assign an administrative name to the LAN interface Default lan Range 1 24 characters telindus1031 laninterface ip Use this attribute to configure the IP related parameters ofthe LAN inter face Important
288. ribute displays the interface its Maximum Transfer Unit i e the maximum number of bytes that one packet can contain on this interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter 260 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes ra telindus1031 g703 channel JifOperStatus This attribute displays the current operational status of the interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter Possible values are The WAN interface is up data transfer is possible The following table shows you in which case the value of the ifOperStatus attribute is up Protocol The ifOperStatus attribute is up i e the alarm wanlnterface alarminfo linkDown off in case Frame Relay LMI is up the bit pump is synchronised PPP LCP is open the bit pump is synchronised the PVC is truly up the bit pump is synchronised The WAN interface is down data transfer is not possible Important remarks e Whether the Telindus 1031 Router is configured in bridging or routing has no effect on the value of the attributes telindus1031 wanlnterface ifOperStatus Status and telindus1031 wanInterface alarmInfo link Down Alarms Incase of Frame Relay if the configuration element telindus1031 wanlnterface frameRelay Imi auto is set to noLmi then the value of the status element telindus1031 wanlnterface frameRelay lmi status Status is always up However the other conditions as stated in the table above remain Incase of PPP
289. ring is enabled then the Telindus 1031 Router sends an echo request packet over the line at regular intervals If on consecutive requests no reply is given then the PPP link is declared down Data traffic is stopped until the PPP handshake succeeds again You can enable or disable link monitoring and fine tune it using the linkMonitoring attribute Refer to telindus1031 g703 channel ppp linkMonitoring on page 186 76 Telindus 1031 Router User manual Chapter 6 Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 2 4 Configuring PPP authentication Refer to 6 2 1 Introducing PPP on page 74 for an introduction on CHAP CHAP authentication in one direc tion The figure shows CHAP authentica tion in one direction Router A is called the authenticator and the router B is called the peer Router A is configured for CHAP authentication and the router B is not Router A authenticates after building its LCP layer and prior to building the IPCP layer If the authentication suc ceeds then the PPP link is built fur ther until data can be sent Else PPP starts its handshake again During data transfer it also authenticates at regular intervals CHAP authentication in both directions If CHAP authentication is enabled sysName my name router sysSecret my secret ppp authentication CHAP router pppSecretTable name my name secret my secret PPP link g
290. routed and bridged data First you have to choose an algorithm you want to use to empty the queues Do this using the attribute telindus1031 router priorityPolicy J algorithm on page 228 Then you can define the number of bytes packets that has to be dequeued from the user configurable queues when these queues are addressed Do this using the attribute telindus1031 router priorityPolicy queueConfigurations on page 230 Also with this attribute you can set the relative importance of the user configurable queues this is only relevant in case the telindus1031 router priorityPolicy algorithm attribute is set to weightedFairQueueing 136 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 6 6 Applying a routing traffic policy on a certain interface This section shows you where to find the appropriate traffic policy elements in order to apply a traffic policy on a certain interface The following table shows you in which trafficPolicy element you have to enter the index name of the earlier created trafficPolicy object in order to apply a traffic policy on the routed data of a certain interface For the LAN interface WAN interface you can find the trafficPolicy element in the ip structure under the lanInterface object telindus1031 lanInterface ip Important remark On the LAN interface you can not apply a traffic policy with the purpose of queue ing On this interface the traffic policy i
291. s This is another example of a local network that only uses private addresses A PPP link connects your site to the Internet Service Provider At your site a Telindus 1031 Router is installed You only received 1 official IP address from the ISP To reduce the number of official IP addresses the ISP also uses private IP addresses on the PPP link The central router its routing table has a host route to its PAT address per customer IP address LAN interface 192 168 47 254 your site IP subnet 192 168 47 0 mask 255 255 255 0 IP address WAN interface 192 168 100 1 PAT address 195 7 12 22 serial intf IP address WAN interface 192 168 100 254 Frame Relay or PDH SDH network MD D 7 ISP The configuration of the Telindus 1031 Router in CLI format is as follows action Load Default Configuration SET SELECT lanInterface LIST La ip address 192 168 47 254 mode routing SELECT g703 1 SELECT channel g703_ 1 LIST encapsulation ppp SELECT ppp LIST ip address 192 168 100 1 nat default SELECT router LIST defaultRoute gateway 192 168 100 254 SELECT defaultNat LIST patAddress 195 7 12 22 servicesAvailable a protocol tcp startPort 80 serverAddress 192 168 47 250 action Activate Configuration Chapter 9 165 Telindus 1031 Router Configuration exa
292. s 362 status attributes 258 general alarm attributes 331 alarms 332 configuration attributes 174 status attributes 248 group what is 43 H HDLC basic configuration 95 96 configuration attributes 199 introducing 96 status attributes 272 housing opening and closing ICMP message communication prohibited 210 port unreachable 210 TTL exceeded 209 ICMP redirect what is 59 IGMP topology 277 what is 277 index name what is 42 installation and connection pre cautions 17 installing and connecting the device 13 introducing alarm attributes 329 ATM 87 bridging 140 Frame Relay 78 HDLC 96 L2TP 128 management terminology 40 management tools 10 NAT 117 PAT 117 PPP 74 RIP 108 router applications 5 routing 98 the device 4 traffic and priority policy 131 introduction 3 Telindus 1031 Router Annex IP addresses automatically obtaining 56 basic configuration 55 on the ATM WAN 89 on the Frame Relay WAN 80 on the PPP WAN 75 explaining the IP structure 58 Frame Relay DLCI global IP 81 Frame Relay DLCI specific IP 82 getting the LAN IP address 343 where to find the IP related parameters 57 IP structure explanation 58 where to find 57 IPCP what is 74 L L2TP basic configuration 129 how works 129 introduction 128 terminology 128 what is 128 L2TP status authentication states 286 call states 284 control states 283 delivery states 285 L2TP tunnel basic configuration 12
293. s emptied as long as a higher priority queue contains data The priority of the queues runs parallel to the queue number l e the user config urable queue number 1 has the lowest priority whereas the system queue number 7 has the highest priority ew po 1 5 user config Queue 1 has the lowest priority whereas queue 5 has urable queue the highest priority A lower priority queue is only emptied in case no higher priority queue contains data 6 low delay queue This queue is only emptied in case the system queue contains no data 7 system queue This queue has priority over all other queues As soon as it contains data it is emptied Note that there is a risk of starvation This means that it is possible that the lower priority queues are never emptied because a higher priority queue continuously receives data weightedFair This is a priority queuing mechanism In this case the user configurable queues Queueing are addressed based on their weight However the low delay queue and system queue still have priority over the user configurable queues ew po ooo 1 5 user config These queues are addressed based on their weight urable queue The weight can be configured in the telindus1031 router priorityPolicy J gueueConfigurations attribute 6 low delay queue This queue is addressed between every user config urable queue 7 system queue This queue has priority over all other queues As soon as i
294. s intended to serve as extended access list Refer to 7 7 Configuring an extended access list on page 138 each WAN encapsulation object frameRelay You can find the trafficPolicy element in the ip structure within the dlciTable attribute under the frameRelay object telindus1031 g703 channel frameRelay dlciTable ip trafficPolicy This means that you can specify a traffic policy per DLCI You can find the trafficPolicy element in the ip structure under the ppp object telindus1031 g703 channel ppp ip trafficPolicy You can find the trafficPolicy element in the ip structure within the pvcTable attribute under the atm object telindus1031 g703 channel J atm pvcTable ipftrafficPolicy This means that you can specify a traffic policy per PVC tunnels inthe ip structure within the I2tpTunnels attribute under the tunnels object telindus1031 router tunnels I2tpTunnels ip trafficPolicy bridge in the ip structure under the bridgeGroup object telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup ip 1 The interface can be a physical interface such as the LAN interface but can also be a DLCI a PVC a tunnel etc Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 137 User manual Configuring the router 7 6 7 Applying a priority policy on a certain interface This section shows you where to find the appropriate priority policy attribute in order to apply a priority policy on a certain interface The priorityPolicy attr
295. sObjectID sysUpTime sysServices flash1Version flash2Version activeFlash flashVersions bootVersion loaderVersion messages deviceld configurationSaving gt gt gt channel g703 1 ifDescr ifType ifOperStatus ifLastChange ifSpeed ifMtu gt gt laninterface ifDescr ifType ifOperStatus ifLastChange ifSpeed ifMtu ip macAddress arpCache bridging adapter ipAdEntBcastAddr ipAdEntReasmMaxSize Action clearArpCache gt gt gt gt ppp ip lepState ipcpState bepState lepMyOptions lepHisOptions ipcpMyOptions ipcpHisOptions bcpMyOptions bcpHisOptions myAuthenState hisAuthenState bridging gt gt gt gt frameRelay ip dlciTable Imi cllmLastCongestionCause gt gt g703 1 ifDescr ifType ifOperStatus ifSpeed gt gt gt gt atm atmSync pvcTable gt gt gt gt hdlic bridging coding los Ifa ais openCircuit rxLevel gt gt router routingTable igmpTable dhcpBinding dhcpStatistics gt gt gt defaultNat addresses gt gt gt tunnels I2tpTunnels Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual gt gt bridge gt gt gt bridgeGroup ifDescr ifType ifOperStatus ifMtu ip arpCache bridgeCache bridging spanningTree Action clearArpCache Action clearBridgeCache gt gt management cms2Address gt gt gt loopback ifDescr ifType ifOperStatus ifMtu ipAddress gt gt fileSystem fileList freeSpace status corruptBlocks Ac
296. sObjectID 248 sysServices 248 sysUpTime 248 taskinfo 296 auto install 341 auxiliary connector specifica tions 365 B basic configuration 51 address translation 116 ATM 86 bridge 139 CIR 85 Classical IP 94 DLCI 83 extended access list 138 Frame Relay 77 G703 interface 61 HDLC 95 96 IP addresses 55 on the ATM WAN 89 on the Frame Relay WAN 80 on the PPP WAN 75 L2TP tunnel 127 link monitoring 75 LMI 84 major features ofthe device 65 multi protocol over ATM 94 passwords 62 PCR 91 PPP 73 PPP authentication 76 PVC 90 RIP 107 router 97 static routes 100 traffic and priority policy on routed and bridged data 132 on the bridge 154 on the router 130 WAN encapsulation 71 BCP what is 74 boot software what is 354 BootP relay agent 342 what is 342 BootP and DHCP what are 342 Telindus 1031 Router Annex BootP request DHCP server reaction on a 213 BootP versus DHCP releasing IP addresses 213 bridge basic configuration 139 configuration attributes 231 general configuration at tributes 232 introduction 140 performance attributes 318 specifications 367 status attributes 287 bridge access list configuration attributes 236 performance attributes 320 bridge cache time out 232 what is 232 bridge group configuration attributes 232 performance attributes 319 bridge port state transition diagram 144 states 144 bridge traffic policy applying on an interface 157 configuration attrib
297. saved configuration on page 68 5 6 4 Loading the default configuration using the action on page 68 5 6 5 Loading the default configuration using the DIP switch on page 69 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 5 67 User manual Basic configuration 5 6 1 What are the different configuration types This section explains the different configuration types that are present in the Telindus 1031 Router Which are the configuration types Three types of configuration are present in the Telindus 1031 Router e the non active configuration e the active configuration e the default configuration Explaining the configuration types When you configure the Telindus 1031 Router the following happens Phase Action Result Connect the computer running the man The non active configuration is displayed agement tool to the Telindus 1031 Router on the screen Modify the non active configuration The modifications have no immediate influ ence onthe active configuration currently used by the Telindus 1031 Router Complete the modifications on the non The non active configuration has to be acti active configuration vated Execute the Activate Configuration action The non active configuration becomes the active configuration What are the configuration actions You can execute the following actions on the configuration e activate configuration load saved configuration e load default configuration 68 Telindus 103
298. self is activated by specifying the trafficPolicy object its index name ina trafficPolicy attribute of a certain interface For example in the ip structure of the laninterface object pvcTable etcetera The trafficShaping table contains the following elements FS E A sourcelpStart Use these elements to set the IP source address as Address specified in the IP header Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 sourcelpEnd Packets that fall within the specified range are forwarded and queued if applicable Address destinationlpStart Use these elements to set the IP destination address Address as specified in the IP header Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 destinationlpEnd Packets that fall within the specified range are forwarded and gueued if applicable Address tosStartValue Use these elements to set the Type Of Service field value tosEndtValue Packets that fall within the specified range are forwarded and gueued if applicable Default any start optional end Range 0 256 ipProtocol Use this element to set the protocol field from the IP header Default any Range 0 255 Packets that have the specified protocol field are forwarded and queued if applica ble You can specify the protocol by typing the protocol number For ease of use some common protocols can be selected from a drop down box any 0 ICMP 1
299. sysSecret attribute in order to verify the peer its response Default lt empty gt Range 0 64 characters Refer to 6 2 4 Configuring PPP authentication on page 76 for more information on CHAP authentica tion telindus1031 router pppSecretTable Use this attribute for the CHAP authentication process Enter the CHAP name and secret of the remote router in this table Default lt empty gt Range table see below Refer to 6 2 4 Configuring PPP authentication on page 76 for more information on CHAP authentica tion The ripv2SecretTable table contains the following elements KT pee O OOOO OOOO OS Use this element to set the CHAP name of the remote router Default lt empty gt Range 0 64 characters If the remote router is a Telindus 1031 Router then the name element should cor respond with the remote Telindus 1031 Router its sysName attribute secret Use this element to set the CHAP secret of the remote router Default lt empty gt Range 0 64 characters If the remote router is a Telindus 1031 Router then the secret element should cor respond with the remote Telindus 1031 Router its sysSecret attribute 208 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1031 router helperProtocols Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to define the TCP and UDP port numb
300. t gt router A 4 gt router B Step 1 Router A sends a challenge packet containing its sysName or a default value if no jh Step 2 Router B sends a response _ using its own sysName and sysSecret as hashing value Step 3 Router A uses the sysName it receives from router B to look up the corresponding secret in its pppSecretTable Step 4 If the two secret names are equal then router A sends a success reply else itsendsa failure reply on both routers then they both request and respond to the authentication If the remote router is a router from another vendor then read the documentation in order to find out how to configure the CHAP name and secret values The authentication configuration attributes As can be seen in the figure above you have to use the following configuration attributes to configure PPP authentication e telindus1031 g703 channel J ppp authentication on page 187 e telindus1031 g703 J channel ppp authenPeriod on page 187 e telindus1031 router sysSecret on page 207 e telindus1031 router pppSecretTable on page 207 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 6 77 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 3 Configuring Frame Relay encapsulation This section introduces the Frame Relay encapsulation protocol and gives a short description of the attributes you can use to configure this encapsulation protocol The following gives an overview of this section
301. t at boot corrupt The file system is in a state were no guarantee can be given about the correct operation of the file system The file system will be formatted at the following boot corruptBlocks A certain block can not be erased ra telindus1031 fileSystem corruptBlocks The file system of the Telindus 1031 Router consists of several blocks When a block can not be erased the corruptBlocks count is incremented This block can no longer be used to store data Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 295 Reference manual Status attributes WS telindus1031 fileSystem Delete File Use this action to remove obsolete files from the file system You have to enter the file name you want to delete as argument value WS telindus1031 fileSystem Rename File Use this action to rename a file on the file system You have to enter the old and new file name in a struc ture 296 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes 11 9 Operating system status attributes kal telindus1031 operatingSystem taskinfo This attribute displays status information about the operating system The taskinfo table contains the following elements la PET e l taskName This is the name of the task taskStatus This is the current status of the task Possible values are awake This task is actually running asleep This task is waiting on an event inactive This task slot is not active i e no task
302. t contains data it is emptied 230 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes kal telindus1031 router priorityPolicy countingPolicy Default bytes Range enumerated see below Use this attribute to define whether the quotum of the queues is expressed in bytes or packets kal telindus1031 router priorityPolicy queueConfigurations Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to e set the number of bytes packets that is dequeued from the user configurable queue when the queue is addressed e set the relative importance of the user configurable queues The queueConfigurations table contains the following elements e UDINE Use this element to set the number of bytes packets Default 1500 that is dequeued from the user configurable queue Range 1 25000 when the queue is addressed The unit of the quotum bytes or packets can be set with the telindus1031 router pri orityPolicy countingPolicy attribute Use this element to set the relative importance of the Default 1 user configurable queues Range 1 10 The weight element is only relevant in case the telindus1031 router priorityPolicy J algo rithm attribute is set to weightedFairQueueing Example Suppose queue 1 has weight 2 queue 2 has weight 1 and both queues contain data In that case the queues are emptied in the following order queu
303. t is more the Telindus 1030 Router series themselves are designed to act as a management con centrator also called management proxy Refer to 1 3 Telindus 1030 Router family overview on page 6 for a detailed description of the differ ences between the models of the Telindus 1030 Router series Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 1 5 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1031 Router 1 2 Telindus 1031 Router applications Some examples of Telindus 1031 Router applications are LAN to LAN connection over a line e LAN extension over a network LAN to Internet connection LAN to network connection while managing the local access devices Point to point LAN interconnection 6 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 1 User manual Introducing the Telindus 1031 Router 1 3 Telindus 1030 Router family overview The Telindus 1030 Router family is a range of routers each with their own specific features This section gives an overview of all the members of the Telindus 1030 Router family First this section shows you how to distinguish the different members from one another Then it lists the features that apply on the complete Telindus 1030 Router family Finally this section highlights the specific features of each mem ber of the Telindus 1030 Router family The following gives an overview of this section 1 3 1 How to distinguish the different members of the Telindus 1030 Router family on page 7 1 3 2 Common Telindus 1030 Router fam
304. t is present in the containment tree The dif ferent objects are distinguished from one another by adding an index E g linePair 1 and linePair 2 where 1 and 2 are the indexes Also child objects are given an index by the user when adding the object An index name is also often referred to as index instance value or instance name attribute An attribute is a parameter related to a certain object It has a certain value value An attribute has a certain value which is e changeable in case of a configuration attribute provided you have write access e read only in case of a status performance and alarm attribute structured value Some attribute values contain underlying values a structured value These values are displayed in the structured value window If an attribute contains structured val ues then a bit string lt Table gt or lt Struct gt is displayed after the attribute A structured value is also often referred to as just structure Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 4 43 User manual Managing the Telindus 1031 Router element An element is an attribute within a structured value In other words they could be considered as sub attributes group Groups assemble a set of attributes related by functionality There are four groups in TMA which correspond with the four tabs in the attribute window e configuration e status performance alarms action A group in combination wi
305. t react to network changes they generally are considered unsuitable for today s large constantly changing networks Most of the dominant routing algorithms today are dynamic routing algorithms which adjust to changing network circumstances by analysing incoming routing update messages If the message indicates that a network change has occurred the rout ing software recalculates routes and sends out new routing update messages These messages permeate the network stimulating routers to rerun their algo rithms and change their routing tables accordingly Also refer to 7 3 1 Introducing RIP on page 108 static and Dynamic routing algorithms can be supplemented with static routes where appro dynamic priate A router of last resort a router to which all unroutable packets are sent for example can be designated to act as a repository for all unroutable packets ensuring that all messages are at least handled in some way 100 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 User manual Configuring the router 7 2 Configuring static routes This section introduces static routing and gives a short description of the attributes you can use to con figure static routing The following gives an overview of this section e 7 2 1 Configuring static routes on page 101 e 7 2 2 Configuring the routing table on page 102 e 7 2 3 Configuring static routes examples on page 103 7 2 4 The rerouting principle on page 106 i Telindus 1031 R
306. t routers With this information it adapts its routing table dynamically If after 180 seconds no information about a certain route has been received then this route is declared down If after an additional 120 seconds i e 300 seconds in total still no information about the route has been received then this route is deleted from the routing table RIP support The Telindus 1031 Router supports RIP protocol version 1 1 compatible and 2 RIP version 1 is a very common routing protocol Version 2 includes extra features like variable subnet masks and authentica tion Check which RIP version is used by the other routers in the network Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 109 User manual Configuring the router 7 3 2 Configuring RIP Refer to 7 1 Introducing routing on page 98 for an introduction on routing e 7 3 1 Introducing RIP on page 108 for an introduction on RIP Use the following to configure RIP First use the routingProtocol attribute to activate the general RIP process on the Telindus 1031 Router Refer to telindus1031 router routingProtocol on page 203 Then use the rip structure within the ip structure to configure for each interface the RIP version the RIP behaviour and to fine tune the RIP operation Refer to 5 2 2 Where to find the IP related parameters on page 57 for the location of the ip structure The rip structure is located within the ip structure 7 3 3 Explaining the rip structure on pag
307. t to the containment tree on page 46 4 4 2 How to add an object to the containment tree on page 47 e 4 4 3 Referring to an added object on page 49 46 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1031 Router 4 4 1 Why add an object to the containment tree Why can you add an object to the containment tree Some objects are not present in the containment tree by default but you can add them yourself because e inthis way the containment tree remains clear and surveyable e you possibly do not need the functions associated with such an object e you possibly need several of these objects so you can add as many objects as you like When do you have to add an object to the containment tree If you want to use the features associated with such an object then you have to add the object first Which objects can be added to the containment tree Section 4 3 The objects in the Telindus 1031 Router containment tree on page 44 gives you an over view of all the objects in the containment tree It also tells you which objects have to be added before you can use them Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 4 47 User manual Managing the Telindus 1031 Router 4 4 2 Howto add an object to the containment tree The section shows you for each management tool how to add an object to the containment tree The following section 4 4 3 Referring to an added object on page 49 shows you how you can refer to this added o
308. tMask This is the IP subnet mask of the DLCI It is either configured or retrieved automat ically remote This is the IP address of the remote end of the DLCI It is either configured or retrieved automatically telindus1031 g703 J channel frameRelay diciTable frameRelay The frameRelay structure in the dlciTable displays the specific Frame Relay related status information of the DLCI The frameRelay structure contains the following elements NN Pere dlci This is the DLCI identification number active This indicates whether the corresponding DLCI is active on or not off new This is set to on if the DLCI has just been created else it is off deleted This is set to on if the DLCI has been deleted else it is off rr This element is only relevant for LMI revision 1 It is the flow control flag If it is on then no traffic can be sent on this DLCI Else it is off bandwidth This is the available bandwidth on this DLCI as it is communicated by the Frame Relay network cllmLastCongestion CLLM Consolidated Link Layer Management is a Frame Relay protocol used for Cause traffic management The cllmLastCongestionCause element indicates the last reason which was received from the network for congestion on the corresponding DLCI Refer to telindus1031 g703 channel frameRelay cllmLastCongestionCause on page 269 for the possible values of the cllmLastCongestionCause element 268 Telindus 103
309. tOctets 302 ifOutPQLen 307 ifOutQLen 303 ifOutUcastPkts 302 I2tpTunnels 317 largestFreeBlockSize 323 Imi 310 pingResults 314 pvcTable 311 routingTable 313 socketsFree 315 taskInfo 324 tcpAllocs 316 tcpSessionCount 322 tcpSocketsUsed 315 tftpSessionCount 321 totalDataBuffers 323 totalMemory 324 udpAllocs 316 udpSocketsUsed 315 unknownCells 311 usedProcPower 323 attribute status activeFlash 249 adapter 256 addresses 280 ais 258 arpCache 253 288 atmSync 270 bcpHisOptions 264 bcpMy Options 264 bcpState 261 bootVersion 249 bridgeCache 289 bridging 254 265 272 290 cllmLastCongestionCause 269 cms2Address 293 coding 258 configurationSaving 250 corruptBlocks 294 deviceld 250 dhcpBinding 279 dhcpStatistics 279 diciTable 266 fileList 294 flash1Version 249 flash2Version 249 flashVersions 249 freeSpace 294 hisAuthenstate 265 ifDescr 251 258 259 287 293 ifLastChange 251 259 ifMtu 251 259 287 293 ifOperStatus 251 258 260 287 293 ifSpeed 251 258 259 ifType 251 258 259 287 293 igmpTable 277 ip 252 261 266 287 ipAddress 293 ipAdEntBcastAddr 256 ipAdEntReasmMaxSize 256 ipcpHisOptions 263 ipcoMyOptions 263 ipcpState 261 I2tpTunnels 281 IcpHisOptions 262 IcpMyOptions 262 IcpState 261 Ifa 258 Imi 268 loaderVersion 249 los 258 macAddress 252 messages 250 myAuthenstate 265 openCircuit 258 pvcTable 270 routingTable 274 rxLevel 258 Index spanningTree 290 status 294 sysDescr 248 sy
310. tatus of the device The following figure shows the front panel LED indicators of the Telindus 1031 Router s TEL NDUS 1030 Router Series 670371 670372 RS530 LAH Pwk CHK Act UNK Aac UME ACT AcT COL LED states One front panel LED can reflect different status modes by the way it lights up The front panel LEDs can light up as follows LED state LED duty cycle Description continuously off The LED never lights up continuously on The LED lights up continuously blinking The LED is as much lit as it is out flashing The LED only lights up during 20 of the time mostly off The LED occasionally lights up without a fixed duty cycle mostly on The LED occasionally goes out without a fixed duty cycle monitoring The LED lights up irregularly For instance it lights up on detection of a certain signal l e it monitors this signal 26 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1031 Router 2 6 2 The power LED PWR The power LED indicates the following continuously off No DC input power is available blinking The self test performed during the boot sequence failed In this condition the ACT LEDs are continuously on continuously on The Telindus 1031 Router is powered and the boot sequence has been completed successfully In case the Telindus 1031 Router remains in boot mode also the ACT LEDs are continuously on to indic
311. ter 4 1 3 Connecting through the control connector To established a connection between TMA and the Telindus 1031 Router through the control connector proceed as follows Connect a serial port of your com puter e g COM1 through a straight DB9 male female cable with the control connector of the Telindus 1031 Router Start TMA In the TMA window either select from the menu bar Connect gt ladies D evi ce Please specify how to reach the device you wish to connect to or press the short cut key Ctrl N occ ME or click on the Connect to device button Dialout No C PSTN modem The Connect to a device window is displayed as in the following figure C IPaddess Sibretr EEH Security Specify the password for connecting to this device This field may be left open Password Cancel In the Connect to a device window specify the following e Select the option Serial and specify the COM port of your computer to which the Tel indus 1031 Router is connected e If previously a password has been configured in the Telindus 1031 Router then also fill in the password field Click on the Next gt button The second Connect window is displayed Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 4 User manual Managing the Telindus 1031 Router In the Connect select a device window spec ify the following Address Select the opti on On device Choose whether to conne
312. tes it wants to authen ticate From that moment on the peer awaits a challenge packet Once the peer has sent a response it awaits a success or failure message Authen Successful The peer has received a success packet It remains in this state during data trans fer Authen Failure The peer has received a failure packet This is a transient state since the router starts the LCP handshake again after a failing authentication Authen Not Allowed This state only occurs when the peer does not accept the authentication request during the LCP handshake A possible reason might be that the peer router does not support CHAP kal telindus1031 g703 J channel ppp bridging This attribute displays the bridging status of the PPP link Refer to telindus1031 lanInterface bridging on page 254 for a detailed description of the bridging structure 266 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes 11 4 4 Frame Relay status attributes ra telindus1031 g703 channel frameRelay ip This attribute displays the IP information of the Frame Relay link Refer to telindus1031 laninterface ip on page 252 for a detailed description of the ip structure Ta telindus1031 g703 channel frameRelay dlciTable This attribute gives the complete status information of all known DLCIs The diciTable table contains the following elements mon pe O O O O O OS This is the name of the DLCI as you confi
313. tgoing Call Reply message is received an incoming or Outgoing Call Connected message is sent and the session moves to the established state waitConnect This is the state where an Incoming or Outgoing Call Connected message is awaited If an Incoming or Outgoing Call Connected message is received the call was successful and the session moves to the established state established Data is exchanged over the tunnel The session is terminated when receiving or sending a Call Disconnect Notify mes sage The session then returns to the idle state Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 285 Reference manual Status attributes L2TP status delivery states The states associated with the packet delivery are operating The Telindus 1031 Router has sent a packet but has not received an acknowl edgement on this packet yet idle All transmitted packets have been acknowledged 286 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes L2TP status authentication states The states associated with the LNS or LAC authentication are noAuthentication Authentication is not enabled This is also the start up state for the authentication process authenSuccessful Authentication was successful The Telindus 1031 Router remains in this state during data transfer authenFailure Authentication failed This is a transient state since the Telindus 1031 Router starts the handshake again after a failing authentication
314. th an object may have actions assigned to them These actions are displayed in the action window 44 Telindus 1031 Router User manual Chapter 4 Managing the Telindus 1031 Router 4 3 The objects in the Telindus 1031 Router containment tree The following table lists the different objects of the Telindus 1031 Router containment tree gt telindus1031 gt gt management gt gt laninterface gt gt g703 1 gt gt gt loopBack gt gt proxy gt gt gt channel g703 1 gt gt fileSystem gt gt gt gt ppp gt gt gt gt frameRelay gt gt gt gt atm gt gt gt gt hdic gt gt router gt gt gt tunnels gt gt gt routingFilter 1 gt gt gt priorityPolicy gt gt gt trafficPolicy 1 gt gt gt defaultNat gt gt bridge gt gt gt bridgeGroup gt gt gt accessList 1 gt gt snmp 1 Not present by default Has to be added refer to 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 45 The index name is user defined gt gt operatingSystem Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 4145 User manual Managing the Telindus 1031 Router 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree This section explains why and how you can add an object to the containment tree It then explains why and how to refer to this object The following gives an overview of this section e 4 4 1 Why add an objec
315. the Internet you may need NAT and or PAT Why use NAT and PAT Each device connected to the Internet must have an official i e unique IP address The success of the Internet has caused a lack of these official IP addresses As a result your Internet Service Provider ISP may offer you only one or a small number of official IP addresses If the number of IP devices on your local network is larger than the number of official IP addresses you can assign test or private IP addresses to your local network In that case you have to configure your Telindus 1031 Router to translate IP addresses using NAT or PAT Even when there are sufficient official IP addresses available you may still choose to use NAT e g for preserving previously assigned test addresses to all the devices on your local network Private IP address range The international authority IANA assigns the official also called global IP addresses It has also defined 3 ranges of IP addresses for private use This means that you can use these addresses without regis tration on your internal network as long as you are not connected to the Internet 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 1 class A network 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 16 class B networks 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 256 class C networks You can define sub networks in these ranges for your private IP addresses 118 Telindus 1031 Router User manual 7 4 2 When use NAT and or PAT You can use NAT PAT
316. the client application A list of multicast group addresses is maintained in the routers The reported multicast addresses can be seen in the igmpTable Refer to telindus1031 router igmpTable on page 277 Multicast frames are always forwarded on the proxy interface Therefore in the GMP topology example it is also possible to add a multicast server Server 2 on LAN 1 Client 2 can join a multicast group of Server S2 Since IGMP is send in UDP join leave can be lost the clients proxies are polled every 125 seconds A general query is send to 224 0 0 1 poll all systems A leave group message is send to 224 0 0 2 all routers Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 279 Reference manual Status attributes i telindus1031 router dhcpBinding This attribute contains a list of dynamically assigned i e leased IP addresses The dhcpBinding table contains the following elements Lea SN 2212 ENESESSE ipAddress This is the IP address that is dynamically assigned to a client macAddress This is the MAC address of the client leaseTime This is the remaining lease time ra telindus1031 router dhcpStatistics This attribute contains the statistics of all IP address ranges that have been specified in the configuration attribute telindus1031 router dhcpDynamic The dhcpStatistics table contains the following elements Emm eeen O startRange Displays the IP start address of an IP address range endRange Displays the IP e
317. the data integrity on the G 703 con nection Refer to telindus1031 g703 crc4Insertion on page 183 e If you have set the framing attribute to framed then use the timeSlots attribute to enable or disable the individual 64 kbps time slots in the framed data stream Refer to telindus1031 g703 J channel timeSlots on page 184 Important remark You can only use ATM encapsulation on the G703 interface when you selected framed mode not when you selected unframed mode refer to telindus1031 g703 framing on page 182 62 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 5 User manual Basic configuration 5 4 Configuring passwords This section shows you how to create a list of password s with associated access level in the security table It also explains how to correct the security table in case of error or in case you forgot your pass word Furthermore this section shows you how to enter the passwords in the different management tools The following gives an overview of this section e 5 4 1 Creating passwords in the security table on page 63 e 5 4 2 Correcting the security table on page 63 5 4 3 Entering passwords in the different management tools on page 64 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 5 63 User manual Basic configuration 5 4 1 Creating passwords in the security table In order to avoid unauthorised access to the Telindus 1031 Router and the network you can create a list of passwords with associated access levels in the security
318. the moment the interface entered its current operational state l e the moment the value of the ifOperStatus status attribute changes from up to down or vice versa the system up time value is written into the ifLastChange status attribute This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1031 laninterface ifSpeed This attribute displays the interface speed in bits per second bps This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter kal telindus1031 laninterface ifMtu This attribute displays the interface its Maximum Transfer Unit i e the maximum number of bytes that one packet can contain on this interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter 252 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes ra telindus1031 laninterface ip This attribute displays the IP information of the interface The ip structure contains the following elements A OS OA E status This is the current operational status of the IP layer layer 3 address This is the IP address of the interface It is either configured or retrieved automat ically netMask This is the IP subnet mask of the interface It is either configured or retrieved auto matically ra telindus1031 lanInterface macAddress This attribute displays the MAC address of the Telindus 1031 Router its LAN interface The LAN interface has been allocated a fixed Ethernet address also called MAC Medium Access Con trol address The MAC address is globally unique and can n
319. the rip structure on page 110 for more information on the metric parameter 202 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 Reference manual Configuration attributes ra telindus1031 router routingTable Default lt empty gt Range table see below Use this attribute to configure the static IP routes Refer to 7 2 Configuring static routes on page 100 for more information on static routes The routingTable table contains the following elements Beene pee O O OOOO OS network Use this element to specify the IP address of the des pefauit 0 0 0 0 tination network Range up to 255 255 255 255 mask Use this element to specify the network mask of the Defauit 255 255 255 0 destination network Range up to 255 255 255 255 gateway Use this element to specify the IP address of the next Default 0 0 0 0 router on the path to the destination network Range up to 255 255 255 255 Whether you can omit the gateway element or not is linked to the following condi tions If the interface element specifies the LAN interface you can not omit the gateway element the WAN interface you can omit the gateway element only when using PPP encapsulation a DLCI PVC or tunnel you can omit the gateway element interface Use this element to specify the interface through Default lt empty gt which the destination network can be reached Range 0 24 characters Do this b
320. tify a range of addresses Default 255 255 255 255 Range up to 255 255 255 255 action Use this element to setthe action when a packet arrives with a source IP address that falls within the specified address range The possible actions are Default deny Range enumerated see below The packet is dropped The packet is forwarded 1 If you specify one entry or multiple entries for which the action is set to deny then also specify at least one entry for which the action is set to allow Else all packets are dropped Example 1 V accesslist This example shows an access list that only allows traffic from subnet 192 168 48 0 except for packets soureefddress mask astion b 1 192 168 48 0 from station 192 168 48 10 rom station 19 b 2 192 168 48 10 Example 2 255 255 255 0 allow 255 255 255 255 deny accessList The next example shows an access list that allows all traffic except the traffic from subnet 192 168 48 0 source ddress mask action The second entry is the rule to add if you want all pack ets that do not match the previous entries to be allowed b2 0000 gt 1 192 168 48 0 255 255 255 0 deny 0 0 0 0 allow 242 Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual Chapter 10 Configuration attributes k telindus1031 management snmp Default enabled Range enabled disabled Use this attribute to accept enable
321. tion Delete File Action Rename File gt gt operatingSystem taskInfo gt gt proxy Refer to the Telindus 1030 Router Orchid function manual for more information on the status attributes of the proxy function also called Orchid function Chapter 11 247 Status attributes 248 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 m Reference manual Status attributes 11 2 General status attributes telindus1031 sysDescr This attribute displays a textual description of the device It is an SNMP MIB2 parameter Example Telindus 1031 Router Txxxx xxxxx 01 01 00 12 00 In this example the following parameters are visible e Telindus 1031 Router is the device name e Txxxx xxxxx is the application software code and version 01 01 00 12 00 is the application software release date and time telindus1031 sysObjectID This attribute displays the identification string This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1031 sysUpTime This attribute displays the elapsed time since the last power on or cold boot of the Telindus 1031 Router This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter telindus1031 sysServices This attribute displays the service identification This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 249 Reference manual Status attributes ra telindus1031 flash1Version This attribute displays the code and version of the application software stored as CONTROL1 Example Txxxx xxxxx 01 01 00 12 00 In this ex
322. tion on policies 4 4 Adding an object to the containment tree on page 45 for more information on adding objects On the LAN interface you can not apply a traffic policy with the purpose of queue ing On this interface the traffic policy is intended to serve as extended access list Refer to 7 7 Configuring an extended access list on page 138 Use this element to enable forward or disable dis Default enabled card directed broadcasts Range enabled disabled What is a directed broadcast A directed broadcast is an IP packet destined for a complete sub network For example a packet destined for all devices on subnetwork 192 168 48 0 with sub net mask 255 255 255 0 has destination address 192 168 48 255 l e all ones in the subnet area ofthe IP address icmpRedirects Use this element to enable or disable the transmission Default enabled of ICMP messages Range enabled disabled What is an ICMP redirect If icmpRedirects is enabled and if the Telindus 1031 Router receives an IP packet on the interface for which the next hop gateway is on the same interface e the next hop address is in the same subnet as the source then it sends an ICMP message to the originator of the packet to inform him that a better shorter route exists 60 User manual Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 5 Basic configuration s SUNNITA Use this element to configure the multicasting I
323. tions for the router at the other side remote side of the link The bcpMyOptions table contains the same elements as the telindus1031 g703 J channel ppp bcpMyOptions table Other option values than the ones supported by the Telindus 1031 Router may be present Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 265 Reference manual Status attributes kal telindus1031 g703 J channel ppp myAuthenstate This attribute displays the authentication state of the router at this side local side of the link 1 e the state of the authenticator Possible values are The local side does not reguest PPP authentication or still has to start the CHAP authentication LCP handshake is busy No Authentication Wait On Response The local side has sent a challenge packet and is waiting for an answer Authen Successful The response packet is found to be correct This is the state when authentication succeeded Authen Failure The response packet is found to be incorrect This is a transient state since the router starts the LCP handshake again after a failing authentication kal telindus1031 g703 J channel ppp hisAuthenstate This attribute displays the authentication state of the router at the other side remote side of the link l e the state of the peer Possible values are No Authentication This is the start up state Wait On Challenge Wait On Success During the LCP handshake the authenticator already indica
324. to be used for Network Address Translation Entering an address in the table automatically enables NAT The addresses table contains the following elements a SUNSET officialAddress Use this element to set the official IP address These addresses are used in the reverse order as they appear in the list privateAddress Use this element to set the private IP address i e to permanently assign an official IP address to a private address Refer to 7 4 Configuring address translation on page 116 for more information on NAT ra telindus1031 router defaultNat gateway Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 Use this attribute to define the gateway addresses from routes on which NAT or PAT should be applied Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 217 Reference manual Configuration attributes telindus1031 router defaultNat tcpSocketTimeOut Default 00001d 00h 00m 00s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s Use this attribute to define the time out for TCP sessions that are not closed 9 24855d 03h 14m 075 by the application Such sessions whether PAT or NAT is in use remain active for one day by default Only decrease this attribute if some TCP applications do not close properly filling up the available translation sessions telindus1031 router defaultNat udpSocketTimeOut Default 00000d 00h 03m 00s Range 00000d 00h 00m 00s Use this attribute to define the time out for UDP sessions that are
325. tor LAN G703 interface connec G703 tor auxiliary connector AUX DTE control connector CTRL DCE e SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage local connection e g PC to Telindus 1031 Router or leased line inside the building e TNV 1 Telecom Network Voltage leased line outside the building e TNV 2 PSTN from PABX inside the building e TNV 3 PSTN from operator PABX outside the building 6 NZ ZN Telindus 1031 Router Copyright safety and statements iii User and reference manual Statements C http www telindusproducts com Products Choose a product gt Download certificates Hereby Telindus declares that this Telindus 1031 Router complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Hierbij verklaart Telindus dat deze Telindus 1031 Router overeenstemt met de essenti le vereisten en andere relevante bepalingen van Richtlijn 1999 5 EC Par la pr sente Telindus d clare que ce Telindus 1031 Router est en conformit avec les exigences essentielles et autres articles applicables de la Directive 1999 5 EC Hiermit Telindus erkl rt da dieser Telindus 1031 Router in Fugsamkeit ist mit den wesentlichen Anforderungen und anderen relevanten Bereitstellungen von Direktive 1999 5 EC Mediante la presente Telindus declara que el Telindus 1031 Router cumple con los requisitos esen ciales y las demas prescripciones relevantes de la Directiva 1
326. transmission time out to at least 20 seconds The syntax to do this is typi cally rexmt 20 Set the total TFTP time out sufficiently large e g 40 seconds The syntax to do this is typically timeout 40 Set the transfer mode to binary octet format The syntax to do this is typically binary of octet Type the following command tftp gt put Txxxxxxx 00 CONTROL my pwd Where put is the TFTP command to send a file Txxxxxxx 00 is the application software file e g T1234001 00 CONTROL in capitals specifies that the file being downloaded is an application soft ware file my_pwd is the write access password as configured in the Telindus 1031 Router If no password has been configured you may omit the and the password When the file transfer is finished close the TFTP session Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 16 357 Reference manual Downloading software 16 4 Downloading application or loader software using TML When downloading with TMA over a serial connection you actually evoke TML Telindus Memory Loader through TMA You can also use TML without opening TMA To download application or loader software to the Telindus 1031 Router using TML proceed as follows KE po Connect a serial port of your com puter e g COM1 through a straight DB9 male female cable with the control connector of the Telindus 1031 Router Open a DOS window on your computer Go to the directory where the TML exec
327. tribute displays the number of non unicast packets that higher level protocols requested to be transmitted to a non unicast i e a broadcast or multicast address including those that were discarded or not sent This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1031 lanInterface ifOutDiscards This attribute displays the number of outgoing packets that were discarded to prevent they are transmit ted by the interface This could be due to for instance the presence of an access list This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1031 lanlnterface ifOutErrors This attribute displays the number of outgoing packets that could not be transmitted by the interface because they contained errors This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1031 lanInterface ifOutQLen This attribute displays the length expressed in packets of the output packet queue on the interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter 304 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes ra telindus1031 lanInterface h2Performance This attribute displays the 2 hours performance summary of the LAN interface The h2Performance table contains the following elements Element For the corresponding period this element displays sysUpTime the elapsed time since the last cold boot ifUpTime the time during which the interface was up ifStatusChanges the number of times the ifOperStatus value of the interface changed from up to
328. trieve the erro neous configuration by executing the Load Saved Configuration command Again disconnect the power supply and open the housing Reset DIP switch bank DS2 position 2 to on Properly replace the cover as described in 3 3 Opening and closing the housing on page 32 and reconnect the power supply 70 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 5 User manual Basic configuration Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 6 71 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols This chapter introduces the WAN encapsulation protocols and lists the attributes you can use to config ure the encapsulation protocols The following gives an overview of this chapter e 6 1 Selecting a WAN encapsulation protocol on page 72 6 2 Configuring PPP encapsulation on page 73 e 6 3 Configuring Frame Relay encapsulation on page 77 6 4 Configuring ATM encapsulation on page 86 6 5 Configuring HDLC encapsulation on page 95 q Refer to the Reference manual on page 169 for a complete overview of the attributes of the Telindus 1031 Router 72 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 1 Selecting a WAN encapsulation protocol First select the encapsulation protocol you want to use on the WAN Do this using the encapsulation attribute Refer to telindus1031 g703 channell J encapsulation on page 184 Once you selected a WAN encapsu
329. trol port This means that if you open a terminal emulation session on the control port you can monitor these messages If you hit the ENTER key the messages stop and you get the CLI password prompt telindus1031 deviceld This attribute displays a unique code This code is programmed into the Telindus 1031 Router before it leaves the factory You can use this code for inventory purposes telindus1031 configurationSaving This attribute indicates when the Telindus 1031 Router is writing its new configuration to the flash mem ory Possible values are The Telindus 1031 Router is busy writing its configuration to the flash memory During this state do not power down or reboot the Telindus 1031 Router else the new configuration will be lost The Telindus 1031 Router has finished writing its configuration to the flash mem ory Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 251 Reference manual Status attributes 11 3 LAN interface status attributes Ta telindus1031 lanInterface ifDescr This attribute displays the interface description This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter kal telindus1031 laninterface ifType This attribute displays the interface type This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1031 laninterface ifOperStatus This attribute displays the current operational status of the interface This is an SNMP MIB2 parameter ra telindus1031 laninterface ifLastChange This attribute shows the system up time on
330. ts This is the number of octets received over this virtual circuit since it was created inFrames This is the number of frames received over this virtual circuit since it was created outFecn This is the number of frames sent to the network indicating forward congestion and this since the virtual circuit was created outBecn This is the number of frames sent to the network indicating backward congestion and this since the virtual circuit was created outDe This is the number of frames sent to the network with the Discard Eligibility bit set outOctets This is the number of octets sent over this virtual circuit since it was created This is the number of frames sent over this virtual circuit since it was created 310 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes ra telindus1031 g703 channel frameRelay Imi This attribute gives a complete LMI performance overview The Imi structure contains the following elements E a a E inStatusEnquiry This is the number of Status Enquiries received from the network inStatus This is the number of Status Reports received from the network inStatusUpdate This is the number of unsolicited Status Updates received from the network outStatusEnquiry This is the number of Status Enquiries sent to the network outStatus This is the number of Status Reports sent to the network outStatusUpdate This is the number of unsolicited
331. ttribute Refer to telindus1031 router helperProtocols on page 208 Use this element to enable Network Address Transla Default lt empty gt tion on the interface Range 0 24 characters Do this by entering the string default as nat element value By doing so fal the NAT settings are applied as defined in the defaultNat object under the defaut router object In future releases it will also be possible to refer to user IN defined NAT object analogous to the routing filter traffic policy etc Refer to 7 4 Configuring address translation on page 116 for more information on NAT e 10 5 2 Default NAT configuration attributes on page 215 for a detailed description of the NAT configuration attributes Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 5 61 User manual Basic configuration 5 3 Configuring the G703 interface This sections lists the most essential attributes to configure the G703 interface Use the coding attribute to set the G703 interface encoding mode Refer to telindus1031 9703 coding on page 182 e Use the framing attribute to select between unframed or framed mode Refer to telindus1031 g703 J fram ing on page 182 Use the clocking attribute to select a clocking mode Refer to telindus1031 9703 clocking on page 182 e Use the crc4Insertion attribute to determine whether the CRC 4 Cyclic Redundancy Check is recalcu lated before sending it to the interface The CRC is used to check
332. ttribute you can specify which VLAN frame is sent to which queue based on the priority of the VLAN frame The vianPriorityMap structure contains the following elements mon Bessie priorityO Use these elements to define which priority corresponds with which queue The possible queues are queue1 up to queued and lowDelayQueue To empty these ee queues specify a priority policy priority Refer to 8 10 Configuring traffic and priority policy on the bridge on page 154 for more information on traffic policy priority policy and priority queuing 238 Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual 10 7 SNMP configuration attributes Chapter 10 Configuration attributes ra telindus1031 snmp trapDestinations Use this attribute to define to which IP address the SNMP traps have to be sent Default lt empty gt Range table see below The Telindus 1031 Router translates all alarm status changes into SNMP traps These traps can then be sent to a management system To enable this configure in the trapDestinations table the IP addresses to which the traps have to be sent If the trapDestinations table is empty then no traps are sent The trapDestinations table contains the following elements mew pe address Use this element to set the IP address of the manage ment station to which the SNMP trap messages have to be sent Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 community Use this element t
333. ucture see below e 5 2 3 Explaining the ip structure on page 58 for a detailed description of the ip structure 6 3 2 Configuring IP addresses on the Frame Relay WAN on page 80 for more specific information on configuring IP addresses in Frame Relay bridging Use this element to configure the bridging related parameters of the DLCI Refer to Default Range structure see below e 8 Configuring the bridge on page 139 for more information on bridging e 8 9 6 Explaining the bridging structure on page 152 for a detailed description of the bridging structure frameRelay Use this element to configure the specific DLCI parameters Default Range structure see below Refer to telindus1031 g703 channel frameRelay diciTable frameRelay on page 190 fora detailed description of the frameRelay structure 190 Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual Chapter 10 Configuration attributes telindus1031 g703 J channel frameRelay diciTable frameRelay Use the frameRelay structure in the diciTable to configure the Frame Relay related parameters of the corresponding DLCI Refer to Default Range structure see below e 6 3 3 Configuring the DLCls on page 83 for more information on DLCls e 6 3 5 Configuring CIR and EIR on page 85 for more information on CIR and EIR The frameRelay structure contains the following elements Fc
334. ure e 6 3 2 Configuring IP addresses on the Frame Relay WAN on page 80 for more specific information on configuring IP addresses in Frame Relay Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual Chapter 101189 Configuration attributes i telindus1031 g703 channel frameRelay diciTable Use this attribute to configure the Frame Relay Data Link Connection Iden tifiers DLCIs Default lt empty gt Range table see below Refer to 6 3 3 Configuring the DLCls on page 83 for more information on DLCls The dlciTable contains the following elements E EE Use this element to assign an administrative name to the DLCI Default lt empty gt Range 0 24 characters adminStatus Use this element to activate up or deactivate down the DLCI Default up Range up down Use this element to determine whether for the corre sponding DLCI the packets are treated by the routing process the bridging process or both mode The mode element has the following values Default routing Range enumerated see below bridging All packets received on the DLCI are bridged routing All packets received on the DLCI are routed routingAndBridging The SNAP header is checked to determine whether the packets have to be bridged or routed Use this element to configure the IP related parame ters of the corresponding DLCI Refer to Default Range str
335. ure Note however that the bridge group bridging structure contains one extra element name This is the name of the interface as you configured it Note that the interface can also be a DLCI an ATM PVC a tunnel etc kal telindus1031 bridge bridgeGroup spanningTree This attribute gives you the Spanning Tree status information of the bridge The spanningTree structure contains the following elements B E designatedPriority Together these two elements form the unique bridge identifier designatedMAC They display the unique bridge identifier of the root bridge as it is indicated in the root identifier parameter of the Configuration BPDUs These BPDUs are transmit ted by the designated bridge for the LAN that is currently connected to this port This bridge identifier is used to test the value of the root identifier parameter con veyed in received Configuration BPDUs rootPathCost This is the cost of the path from this bridge to the root bridge If this bridge is the root bridge the rootPathCost value equals 0 Else the rootPathCost value equals the sum of e the path cost as it is up to the designated bridge for the LAN that is currently connected to this port this cost is transmitted in Configuration BPDUs by the designated bridge and the path cost as it is configured for the root port The rootPathCost element is used e to test the value of the root path cost parameter conveyed in received Config urat
336. us 1031 Router to send such an ICMP message or not The sendAdminUnreachable attribute has the following values enabled The Telindus 1031 Router sends ICMP communication prohibited messages disabled The Telindus 1031 Router does not send ICMP communication prohibited mes sages Telindus 1031 Router Reference manual Chapter 10 211 Configuration attributes telindus1031 router dhcpStatic Use this attribute to assign a fixed IP address to a client its MAC address and this for an infinite time Default lt empty gt Range table see below The Telindus 1031 Router supports the DHCP server protocol This attribute and the following two attributes describe the configuration parameters to customise the DHCP server behaviour The dhcpStatic table contains the following elements Saa a s ipAddress Use this element to assign an IP address to a certain client This client is identified with its MAC address Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 If no IP address is specified then there is no connection to the client In that case all other attributes in the table are ignored for this client mask Use this element to set the client its subnet mask Default 255 255 255 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 gateway Use this element to set the default gateway for the cli ent its subnet If no gateway is specified then the gateway of the LAN channel is
337. used Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 259 255 255 255 nameServer Use this element to set the IP address of the name server that is available to the client Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 tftpServer Use this element to set the IP address of the TFTP server that is available to the client It is the next server to use in boottrap Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 255 255 255 255 macAddress Use this element to enter the client its MAC address If no MAC address is specified then there is no con Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 Range up to ff ff ff ff ff ff nection to the client Therefore all other attributes in the table are ignored for this client bootFile Use this element to set the location of the boot file Default lt empty gt Range max 128 characters hostName Use this element to set the name of the client Default lt empty gt Range max 20 characters domainName Use this element to set the name the client should use when resolving hostnames via the Domain Name System DNS Default lt empty gt Range max 20 characters netbiosNameServer Use this element to set the IP address of the NetBios server Default 0 0 0 0 Range up to 259 255 255 255 netbiosNodeType Use this element to configure the client as described in RFC1001 RFC1002 Default lt opt gt Range enumerated see below
338. utable is located Typically this is C Program Files TMA Place the software file you want to download in this directory Type the following command tml c1 v b f Txxxxxxx 00 CONTROL my_pwd where tml is the executable Telindus Memory Loader to download files to the Telindus devices through their control port c1 specifies the COM port of the computer connected to the Telindus 1031 Router in this example COM1 v returns graphical information on the download status b puts the Telindus 1031 Router in boot mode This is only necessary when you want to download loader software FTXxxxXxX 00 is the software file you want to download e g T1234001 00 CONTROL in capitals specifies that the file being downloaded is an application or loader software file my_pwd is the write access password as configured in the Telindus 1031 Router If no password has been configured you may omit the and the password To see a list of all the possible TML options type TmML in your DOS windows and press the ENTER key If you press the ENTER key the software download begins If you used the v option together with the TML command a graphical bar shows the download progress 358 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 16 Reference manual Downloading software 16 5 Downloading application or loader software in loader mode When a loader or application software download failed or when a flash memory error occurs it
339. ute serves as a cost for using the route In most cases it indicates the number of hops routers required to reach a destination timeOut In case of a RIP route the timeOut attribute displays the time the route will remain in the routing table if no RIP updates are received anymore For other routes this attribute always displays 00000d 00h 00m 00s 276 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 11 Reference manual Status attributes Example The following figure displays the routing table for the example in 9 1 LAN extension over a PDH SDH network on page 160 Y routinaTable network mask gateway intertace encapsulation status preference type metric_ timeout b1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 127 0 0 1 discard none discard 255 intemal 0 00000d 00h 00m 00s gt 2 192168 47 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 47 254 lan ethernet up 1 local 1 00000d 00h 00m 00s gt 3 192168 47 254 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 internal none up 1 host 0 00000d 00h 00m 00s b 4 2240 09 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 internal none up 1 host 0 00000d 00h 00m 00s gt 5 192 168 100 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 100 1 wan ppp down 1 local 1 00000d 00h 00m 00s gt 6 1921681001 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 internal none down 1 host 0 00000d 00h 00m 00s gt 7 192 168 48 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 100 2 wan ppp down 10 static 1 00000d 00h 00m 00s The lines in the routing table depicted above represent the following Line 1 represents the default gateway which is not defined Lines
340. uter Chapter 6 95 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 5 Configuring HDLC encapsulation This section introduces the HDLC encapsulation protocol and gives a short description of the attributes you can use to configure this encapsulation protocol The following gives an overview of this section e 6 5 1 Introducing HDLC on page 96 e 6 5 2 Configuring HDLC on page 96 96 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 5 1 Introducing HDLC High level Data Link Control HDLC encapsulation means that the Ethernet frames are put in an HDLC frame without any additional encapsulation such as Frame Relay or PPP This means that there is no protocol which monitors the status of the link but it also means that there is no encapsulation overhead Because the Ethernet frames are directly encapsulated only bridging is possible Important remark The HDLC encapsulation on the Telindus 1031 Router is compatible with the HDLC encapsulation on the Crocus Bridge interface It is however not compatible with the Cisco HDLC encapsulation 6 5 2 Configuring HDLC The only thing that is configurable for the HDLC encapsulation protocol is the attribute telindus1031 9703 I channel hdlc bridging on page 199 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 97 User manual Configuring the router 7 Configuring the router This chapter introduces routing on the Telindus 1031 Router and lists th
341. utes 237 bridging configuring 149 configuring an IP address 150 configuring the bridging pa rameters on the interfac es 151 enabling on the interfaces 150 explaining the bridging structure 152 selecting the bridging proto col 150 setting the bridge priority 150 versus routing 98 what is 140 bridging structure explanation 152 Cc CHAP authentication in both direc tions 76 authentication in one direc tion 76 what is 74 child object what is 42 CIR basic configuration 85 what is 78 Classical IP basic configura tion 94 combining bridging and routing in a network a configuration example 165 common TCP and UDP num bers 373 configuration activating the 68 loading the default using the action 68 using the DIP switch 69 loading the saved 68 configuration action executing 66 what is 67 configuration alarm attributes 330 configuration attributes 171 ATM 193 bridge 231 bridge access list 236 bridge group 232 bridge traffic policy 237 default NAT 215 Frame Relay 188 G703 channel 184 G703 interface 182 general 174 HDLC 199 L2TP tunnel 218 LAN interface 178 loop back 243 management 240 overview 172 PPP 185 priority policy 228 proxy 244 router 200 router general 201 SNMP 238 traffic policy 223 WAN interface 181 Index 379 configuration examples 159 configuration file creating a 347 creating a binary 348 creating an ASCII 349 using CLI get 351 using TFTP get 350
342. ved a valid configuration file then it stores the configu ration and possibly reboots Else it restarts with phase 1 346 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 15 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1031 Router The following figure illustrates the procedure as described in the table above It shows the procedure over a WAN link The IP address of the router is 192 168 100 1 and its hostname is his name In this example the DNS server and TFTP server are on different machines However in reality these two serv ices often reside on the same machine IP helpers e 195 7 12 251 e 195 7 12 252 helper protocols e DNS 53 e TFTP 69 Telindus Router with WAN IP address 192 168 100 1 central router DNS server I with IP address 195 7 12 251 t DNS reguest broadcast DNS unicast reguest DNS reply with hostname his name domain topleveldomain TFTP server JI with IP address 195 7 12 252 0 En TFTP request for file his name cms TFTP unicast reguest TFTP reply with file his_name cms TFTP request for file his_name cli broadcast TFTP unicast request TFTP reply with file his_name cli Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 15 347 Reference manual Auto installing the Telindus 1031 Router 15 4 Creating configuration files In 15 3 Getting the configuration with TFTP on page 344 you have seen how you can get a configura tion file with TFTP The two possible configur
343. very route learnt through that interface The metric parameter is also used to represent the directly connected subnets on the LAN and WAN interfaces Use this element to set the transmission and or recep Default active tion of RIP updates on the interface By default the Range enumerated see below Telindus 1031 Router transmits and receives RIP updates on all interfaces The mode element has the following values active RIP updates are transmitted and received on this inter face passive RIP updates are not transmitted on this interface but received updates are parsed disabled RIP updates are nor transmitted nor received on this interface Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 7 111 User manual Configuring the router CON E S txVersion Use this element to set the version of the RIP updates Default rip2 that are transmitted on the interface Range enumerated see below The txVersion element has the following values rip1 The transmitted RIP updates are RIP version 1 updates rip2 The transmitted RIP updates are RIP version 2 updates rip1 compatible The contents of the RIP update packet is a RIP version 2 packet but it is encapsulated as a RIP version 1 packet This allows some older implementations of RIP 1 to be interoperable with RIP 2 rxVersion Use this element to set which version of received RIP Default rip2only updates is accepted on the interface Range enu
344. w ing screenshot shows part diciTable of the diciTable of the set up adminStatus i bridging gt frameRelay depicted in the figure b 1 network2 up routing lt Structy lt Struct gt Structs above gt 2 network3 up routing lt Struct gt lt Struct gt Struct gt 3 network4 up routing eStructs lt Struct gt Struct gt V diciTable row 1 ip V dciT able row 1 frameRelay ae or Tei gt KE 0 D netMask remote 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 2 diciT able row 2 ip diciT able row 2 frameRelay netMask remote 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 3 diciT able row 3 ip dlciT able row 3 rameRelay dlci cit eir Eo o netMask remote 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 4 84 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 6 User manual Configuring the WAN encapsulation protocols 6 3 4 Configuring LMI Refer to 6 3 1 Introducing Frame Relay on page 78 for an introduction on LMI The LMI provides a status mechanism which gives an on going status report on the DLCls These status reports are R router modem exchanged between the Frame Relay LMI Status Enquiry access device or Frame Relay DTE or 1 user and Frame Relay node or Frame LMI Status Enquiry reply Relay DCE or network At regular intervals the DTE sends Full Status Enquiry messages to the DCE The DCE answers with the status of all its DLCIs on the interface At smaller int
345. what is 74 priority policy applying on an interface 137 configuration attributes 228 configuring 135 how to configure on the bridge 155 how to configure on the router 133 what is 131 priority queuing what is 131 private IP address range 117 product information 375 proxy configuration attributes 244 performance attributes 325 status attributes 297 PVC basic configuration 90 R reading a DIP switch table 53 TMA attribute string 54 reading DIP switch tables and TMA attribute strings 52 rear view of the device 19 referring to an added object example 49 how to 49 what is 49 relative and absolute address ing 240 releasing IP addresses DHCP versus BootP 213 remarks on ATM on G703 interface 61 184 193 bridging traffic policy on the LAN interface 157 CIR 85 dhcpStatistics attribute 279 G703 data LED 26 HDLC encapsulation 96 helperProtocols attribute 208 host routes to local interface IP address 276 ifOperStatus of the WAN in terface 260 IP address on the LAN inter face in case of bridging 57 178 233 messages attribute 250 natAddresses attribute 124 passwords 175 priority policy on the bridge 156 rerouting principle 106 resetNat action 316 rip2Authentication attribute 113 ripv2SecretTable attribute 206 routing traffic policy on the LAN interface 59 136 rerouting principle what is 106 RIP authentication basic config uration 115 basic configuration 107
346. with EMC directive 89 336 EEC shielded cables or ferrite beads have to be used ANMERKUNG Das Ger t kann gespeist wurden durch ein IT power System 18 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1031 Router 2 5 Connecting the Telindus 1031 Router This section explains how to connect the Telindus 1031 Router The following gives an overview of this section e 2 5 1 Rear view of the Telindus 1031 Router on page 19 2 5 2 Connecting the different parts of the Telindus 1031 Router on page 20 e 2 5 3 Connecting the Telindus 1031 Router an example on page 22 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 2 19 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1031 Router 2 5 1 Rear view of the Telindus 1031 Router The following is a rear view of the Telindus 1031 Router CTRL DCE AUX DTE RS530 DTE an 20 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 2 User manual Installing and connecting the Telindus 1031 Router 2 5 2 Connecting the different parts of the Telindus 1031 Router The following table gives an overview of the parts located at the back of the Telindus 1031 Router and reveals their function Part Label Function This is the power input Insert the plug of the external power supply in this socket This RJ45 Twisted Pair Interface TPI is the connection towards the IP LAN Connect one side of an RJ45 to RJ45 cable not included to the LAN connector of the Telindus 1031
347. y typing the name of the interface as you assigned it using the configura tion attribute name e g telindus1031 laninterface name on page 178 Note that the interface can also be a DLCI PVC tunnel etc If you do not specify a value for the interface element then it is deduced by checking all interfaces including DLCls PVCs and tunnels and finding an interface for which the gateway lies in the subnet defined by the IP address and net mask of that interface Typing the string discard discards all packets for the corresponding destination preference Use this element to set the level of importance of the Default 10 route with respect to routes learnt via RIP Range 1 200 RIP routes always have a preference of 60 Routes with a lower preference value are chosen over routes with higher preference value Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 10 203 Reference manual Configuration attributes Benet Besson O O metric Use this element to set with how much the metric Default 1 parameter of a route has to be incremented Range 1 15 If two routes exist with the same preference then the route with the lowest metric value is chosen This element is only important when combining static routes and RIP routes Refer to 7 3 3 Explaining the rip structure on page 110 for more information on the metric parameter ra telindus1031 router routingProtocol Default none Range enumerated
348. ys the Virtual Channel Identifier VCI of the PVC The VPI in conjunction with the VCI identifies the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on the way to its destination ra telindus1031 g703 channel atm unknownCells This attribute displays the number of received cells that are not treated by the Telindus 1031 Router For example data cells for PVCs that are not configured in the Telindus 1031 Router etc 312 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 4 Router performance attributes This section discusses the performance attributes concerned with routing First it describes the general routing performance attributes Then it explains the performance attributes of the extra features as there are default NAT filtering L2TP tunnelling etc The following gives an overview of this section e 12 4 1 General router performance attributes on page 313 e 12 4 2 Default NAT performance attributes on page 315 e 12 4 3 L2TP tunnel performance attributes on page 317 Telindus 1031 Router Chapter 12 313 Reference manual Performance attributes 12 4 1 General router performance attributes ra telindus1031 router routingTable This attribute lists all known routes and how many times they are used The routingTable contains the following elements men peen network This is the IP address of the destination network mask This is the

Telindus 1031 Router

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents